WO2023008352A1 - Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and dye multimer - Google Patents

Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and dye multimer Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023008352A1
WO2023008352A1 PCT/JP2022/028563 JP2022028563W WO2023008352A1 WO 2023008352 A1 WO2023008352 A1 WO 2023008352A1 JP 2022028563 W JP2022028563 W JP 2022028563W WO 2023008352 A1 WO2023008352 A1 WO 2023008352A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
formula
represented
substituent
dye
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2022/028563
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
佑太 奥秋
祐一 安原
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2023538504A priority Critical patent/JPWO2023008352A1/ja
Publication of WO2023008352A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023008352A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F2/00Processes of polymerisation
    • C08F2/44Polymerisation in the presence of compounding ingredients, e.g. plasticisers, dyestuffs, fillers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F20/00Homopolymers and copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride, ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
    • C08F20/02Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms, Derivatives thereof
    • C08F20/10Esters
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B67/00Influencing the physical, e.g. the dyeing or printing properties of dyestuffs without chemical reactions, e.g. by treating with solvents grinding or grinding assistants, coating of pigments or dyes; Process features in the making of dyestuff preparations; Dyestuff preparations of a special physical nature, e.g. tablets, films
    • C09B67/006Preparation of organic pigments
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B69/00Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
    • C09B69/10Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to coloring compositions.
  • the present invention also relates to a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored composition.
  • the present invention also relates to dye multimers.
  • a color filter usually comprises three primary color pixels of red, green and blue and serves to separate the transmitted light into the three primary colors.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a pigment composition for color filters containing a phthalocyanine-based pigment and an azomethine copper complex-based pigment, wherein the mass ratio of the phthalocyanine-based pigment to the azomethine copper complex-based pigment is 99.9/ A color filter pigment composition is described which is from 0.1 to 96.5/3.5.
  • C.I. Pigment Yellow 129 is used as an azomethine copper complex-based pigment.
  • C. I. Pigment Yellow 129 is a compound having the structure shown below. According to the studies of the present inventors, the film obtained using the composition containing the azomethine copper complex-based pigment described in the examples of Patent Document 1 cannot be said to have sufficient light resistance, and there is room for improvement. It turns out there is.
  • the present invention provides the following.
  • a coloring composition containing a pigment multimer and a curable compound The dye multimer has a structure a1 in which aromatic rings having hydroxy groups as substituents are bonded via an azomethine group, or a dye structure having a structure a2 in which the structure a1 is coordinated to a metal atom. coloring composition.
  • the dye multimer contains at least one repeating unit selected from repeating units represented by formula (A), repeating units represented by formula (B), and repeating units represented by formula (C).
  • a dye multimer containing repeating units or A dye multimer represented by formula (D), The coloring composition according to ⁇ 1>;
  • a 1 represents a trivalent linking group, L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, DyeI represents the above dye structure;
  • a 2 represents a trivalent linking group, L2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, DyeII represents the above dye structure having a group capable of forming an ionic bond or a coordinate bond with Y2, Y 2 represents a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with DyeII;
  • L3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, DyeIII represents the above dye structure, m represents 0 or 1;
  • the dye structure represented by DyeII of the above formula (B) is a structure represented by formula (1) or a structure in which the structure represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom
  • the dye structure represented by DyeIII of the above formula (C) is a structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure represented by formula (1) coordinated to a metal atom.
  • the dye structure represented by DyeIV of formula (D) is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure represented by formula (1) coordinated to a metal atom.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x
  • R x represents a substituent
  • DyeII of formula (B) at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent.
  • the structure represented by the formula (1) is a structure represented by the formula (1-1) or a structure represented by the formula (1-2), ⁇ 3>
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x
  • R x represents a substituent
  • when adjacent two of X 2 to X 9 are CR x , R x of two adjacent CR x may combine to form a ring
  • DyeII of formula (B) at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent;
  • formula (1-1) satisfies any of the following requirements 1 to 4;
  • Requirement 1 Adjacent two of X 3 to X 5 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are are
  • ⁇ 5> Further, including a coloring agent other than the above-mentioned dye multimer, The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the coloring agent contains a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment.
  • ⁇ 6> A film obtained from the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>.
  • ⁇ 7> An optical filter having the film according to ⁇ 6>.
  • ⁇ 8> A solid-state imaging device having the film according to ⁇ 6>.
  • ⁇ 9> An image display device comprising the film according to ⁇ 6>.
  • a dye polymer comprising a dye structure having a structure a1 in which aromatic rings having a hydroxy group as a substituent are bonded to each other through an azomethine group, or a structure a2 in which the structure a1 is coordinated to a metal atom.
  • a 1 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • DyeI is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a structure in which the structure represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom represents the dye structure of
  • a 2 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • DyeII is the above dye structure having a group capable of forming an ionic bond or a coordinate bond with Y 2 , the structure represented by formula (1), or the structure represented by formula (1) on a metal atom represents the dye structure of the coordinated structure
  • Y 2 represents a
  • a colored composition capable of forming a film with excellent light resistance.
  • a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a dye multimer can be provided.
  • is used to include the numerical values before and after it as lower and upper limits.
  • a description that does not describe substitution or unsubstituted includes a group (atomic group) having no substituent as well as a group (atomic group) having a substituent.
  • an "alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • exposure includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified.
  • Light used for exposure includes actinic rays or radiation such as emission line spectra of mercury lamps, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
  • EUV light extreme ultraviolet rays
  • (meth)acrylate” represents both or either acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth)acryl represents both or either acrylic and methacrylic
  • (meth) ) acryloyl refers to acryloyl and/or methacryloyl.
  • Me in the structural formulas represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group.
  • the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight are polystyrene equivalent values measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
  • total solid content refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent.
  • a pigment means a compound that is difficult to dissolve in a solvent.
  • the term "process” includes not only an independent process, but also when the intended action of the process is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is a coloring composition comprising a dye multimer and a curable compound,
  • the dye multimer contains a dye structure having a structure a1 in which aromatic rings having hydroxyl groups as substituents are bonded to each other via an azomethine group, or a structure a2 in which the structure a1 is coordinated to a metal atom. characterized by
  • the dye multimer contained in the coloring composition of the present invention is a dye that is a compound in which aromatic rings having a hydroxy group as a substituent are bonded via an azomethine group, or the above-mentioned compound (hydroxy group is attached to a metal atom A compound in which aromatic rings having substituents are bonded via an azomethine group) is coordinated to polymerize a dye. It is presumed that by polymerizing such a dye, it has a certain degree of motility, and thus becomes more susceptible to heat inactivation. It is presumed that the easier the thermal deactivation, the shorter the lifetime in the excited state, and thus the improved light resistance.
  • coloring composition of the present invention can also suppress the generation of development residues when pixels are formed by patterning by photolithography.
  • the dye multimer contained in the coloring composition of the present invention has excellent dispersibility in the coloring composition, can suppress aggregation in the coloring composition, and the viscosity of the coloring composition changes over time. Change can also be suppressed. Therefore, the coloring composition of the present invention is also excellent in storage stability.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably used as a coloring composition for color filters or infrared transmission filters. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming color filter pixels or as a coloring composition for forming infrared transmission filters, and is more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming color filter pixels.
  • Pixel types include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and yellow pixels. Red pixels, green pixels, and yellow pixels are preferred. More preferably, it is a green pixel.
  • the maximum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 1100 to 1300 nm.
  • Filters satisfying spectral characteristics with a value of 70% or more are preferred.
  • the infrared transmission filter is preferably a filter that satisfies any one of the following spectral characteristics (1) to (5).
  • the maximum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 800 to 1500 nm is A filter that is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more).
  • the maximum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 750 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 900 to 1500 nm is A filter that is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more).
  • the maximum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 830 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 1000 to 1500 nm is A filter that is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more).
  • the maximum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 950 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 1100 to 1500 nm is A filter that is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more).
  • the maximum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 1050 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 1200 to 1500 nm is A filter that is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more).
  • the wavelength at which the light transmittance of the film is 50% is preferably present in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm. More preferably in the wavelength range of 520 nm, even more preferably in the wavelength range of 480-520 nm. In particular, it is preferable that the wavelengths at which the light transmittance is 50% exist in both the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm and the wavelength range of 575 to 625 nm. In this embodiment, the wavelength on the short wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% preferably exists in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm.
  • the wavelength on the long wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% preferably exists in the wavelength range of 580 to 620 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 585 to 615 nm.
  • a coloring composition capable of forming a film having such spectral characteristics is preferably used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter.
  • the colored composition of the present invention is preferably used for solid-state imaging devices. More specifically, it is preferably used as a coloring composition for optical filters used in solid-state imaging devices, and more preferably used as a coloring composition for color filters used in solid-state imaging devices.
  • the solid content concentration of the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 30% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 7.5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 25% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a dye multimer containing a dye structure (hereinafter also referred to as a specific dye structure), which will be described later.
  • a dye multimer containing a specific dye structure is also referred to as a specific dye multimer.
  • the dye multimer means a compound having two or more dye structures in one molecule.
  • the specific dye multimer has two or more specific dye structures in one molecule, preferably three or more, and more preferably four or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but may be 100 or less.
  • the specific dye multimer has a structure a1 in which aromatic rings having hydroxyl groups as substituents are bonded to each other through an azomethine group, or a structure a2 in which the structure a1 described above is coordinated to a metal atom (specific dye structure structure).
  • the aromatic ring may be an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic heterocyclic ring.
  • An aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferable because it can further improve light resistance, residue suppression and storage stability.
  • each aromatic ring may further contain a substituent other than a hydroxy group. Substituents include the substituent T described later.
  • the metal atom coordinated by the above structure a1 includes a copper atom, a zinc atom, an iron atom, a titanium atom, an aluminum atom, a tin atom, a magnesium atom and a chromium atom. It is preferably a copper atom, more preferably a copper atom.
  • a ligand may be further coordinated to the metal atom.
  • Ligands include heterocyclic compounds (e.g., pyridine, pyrimidine, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, tetrazole, quinoline, 1,10-phenanthroline, etc.), protic compounds (e.g., water, methanol, ethanol, etc.), amine compounds ( For example, triethylamine, N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenediamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid N,N,N',N'',N''-pentamethyldiethylenetriamine, etc.), amide compounds (for example, N,N- dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, etc.), dimethylsulfoxide, sulfolane, nitrile compounds (eg, acetonitrile, etc.), and the like.
  • heterocyclic compounds e.g., pyridine, pyrimidine, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, t
  • the specific dye structure preferably has the above structure a2 because it can further improve light resistance, residue suppression and storage stability, and further improve heat resistance.
  • the specific dye structure is a structure derived from a compound having a structure represented by formula (1) (hereinafter, also referred to as compound A1), or a compound in which compound A1 is coordinated to a metal atom (hereinafter, also referred to as compound A2). It is preferably a structure derived from In formula (1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x , R x represents a substituent, When two adjacent CR x 's among X 2 to X 9 are CR x's, the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's may combine to form a ring.
  • formula (1) hereinafter, also referred to as compound A1
  • compound A2 a compound in which compound A1 is coordinated to a metal atom
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 1 in formula (1) is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-15, and even more preferably 1-8.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent.
  • Substituents include the substituent T described later.
  • the aryl group represented by R 1 in formula (1) preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent.
  • Substituents include the substituent T described later.
  • R 1 in formula (1) is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X 2 to X 9 in formula (1) each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x , and R x represents a substituent.
  • Substituents represented by R x include substituents T described later.
  • the substituent represented by R x is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably a specific functional group A described later.
  • X 2 to X 9 in formula (1) are each independently CH or CR x .
  • at least one of X 2 to X 9 in formula (1) is CR x
  • R x is a group containing a heteroatom (preferably is also preferably a specific functional group A) described later.
  • Specific functional groups A include a nitro group, a cyano group, -NR 101 R 102 , -OR 103 , -SR 104 , -COOR 105 , -OCOR 106 , -SO 2 R 107 , -SO 2 NR 108 R 109 , - SO 2 OR 110 , —CONR 111 R 112 and —NR 113 COR 114 , preferably a nitro group, a cyano group, —NR 101 R 102 , —OR 103 , —SR 104 and —COOR 105 , — NR 101 R 102 and -OR 103 are more preferred.
  • R 101 and R 102 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, R 101 and R 102 may combine to form a ring, and R 103 to R 114 each independently , represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 101 to R 114 is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, still more preferably 1-3, and particularly preferably 1 or 2.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent. Substituents include the substituent T described later.
  • the alkyl groups represented by R 101 to R 114 are preferably methyl groups or ethyl groups.
  • the aryl group represented by R 101 to R 114 preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent. Substituents include the substituent T described later.
  • R 101 and R 102 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or an ethyl group.
  • R 103 to R 114 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, more preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.
  • the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's may combine to form a ring.
  • the ring formed may be a hydrocarbon ring or a hetero ring.
  • the hydrocarbon ring may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • Heteroatoms contained in the heterocycle include nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen atoms.
  • the heterocycle is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • the ring to be formed include a benzene ring, a hydrocarbon ring such as a naphthalene ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a pyridine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, an imidazoline ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, indole ring, isoindole ring, benzimidazole ring, benzoxazole ring, benzothiazole ring, benzotriazole ring, purine ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, quinazoline ring, quinoxaline ring, cinnoline ring, Heterocycles such as pteridine ring, pyrrolidine ring, piperidine ring,
  • Halogen atom e.g., fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom
  • alkyl group preferably alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkenyl group preferably alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkynyl group preferably an alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms
  • an aryl group preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms
  • a heterocyclic group preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • an amino group preferably amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkoxy group preferably alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • aryloxy group preferably aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms
  • heterocyclic oxy group preferably carbon 1 to 30 heterocyclic oxy groups
  • acyl groups preferably acyl groups having 2 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkoxy group preferably al
  • Compound A1 is preferably a compound represented by formula (1-1) or a compound represented by formula (1-2).
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x
  • R x represents a substituent
  • the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's may combine to form a ring.
  • formula (1-1) satisfies any one of requirements 1 to 4 below.
  • Requirement 1 Adjacent two of X 3 to X 5 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring;
  • Requirement 2 X 2 and X 3 are CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 2 and R x of CR x represented by X 3 combine to form a heterocyclic ring;
  • Requirement 3 Adjacent two of X 6 to X 9 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring;
  • Requirement 4 At least one of X 2 and X 3 is CH, and at least one of X 2 to X 9 is CR x .
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • R 2 to R 11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • Adjacent two of R 2 to R 11 may combine to form a ring, and at least one of R 2 to R 11 is a substituent.
  • R 1 in formula (1-1) has the same definition as R 1 in formula (1). Further, details of X 2 to X 9 in formula (1-1) are the same as X 2 to X 9 in formula (1). However, formula (1-1) satisfies any one of requirements 1 to 4 described above.
  • Requirement 1 is that adjacent two of X 3 to X 5 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring.
  • the ring formed by bonding R x together include the rings described above, preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring.
  • the ring formed by combining R x may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • X 3 and X 4 are each independently CR x
  • R x of CR x represented by X 3 and R x of CR x represented by X 4 combine to form a ring
  • X 4 and X 5 are each independently CR x
  • R x of CR x represented by X 4 and R x of CR x represented by X 5 combine to form a ring.
  • At least one of X 6 to X 9 is CR x and R x is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably, the specific functional group A described above).
  • Requirement 2 is that X 2 and X 3 are CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 2 and R x of CR x represented by X 3 combine to form a heterocyclic ring.
  • the heterocycles formed by combining R x include the heterocycles described above.
  • the hetero ring formed by combining R x may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • At least one of X 6 to X 9 is CR x and R x is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably the specific functional group A described above).
  • Requirement 3 is that adjacent two of X 6 to X 9 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring.
  • the ring formed by bonding R x together include the rings described above, preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring.
  • the ring formed by combining R x may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • X 6 and X 7 are each independently CR x
  • R x of CR x represented by X 6 and R x of CR x represented by X 7 combine to form a ring
  • X 7 and X 8 are each independently CR x
  • R x of CR x represented by X 7 and R x of CR x represented by X 8 combine to form a ring.
  • Examples include embodiments in which X 8 and X 9 are each independently CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 8 and R x of CR x represented by X 9 combine to form a ring.
  • X 6 and X 7 are each independently CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 6 and R x of CR x represented by X 7 can be formed. are combined to form a ring, or X 7 and X 8 are each independently CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 7 and R x of CR x represented by X 8 are preferably bonded to form a ring, X 7 and X 8 are each independently CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 7 and R of CR x represented by X 8 It is more preferable that x is bonded to form a ring.
  • the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's may combine to form a ring.
  • the ring formed by bonding R x together include the rings described above, preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring.
  • the ring formed by combining R x may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • At least one of X 2 to X 5 is CR x and R x is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably the specific functional group A described above).
  • Requirement 4 is that at least one of X 2 and X 3 is CH, and at least one of X 2 to X 9 is CR x .
  • R x represents a substituent.
  • 1 to 4 of X 2 to X 9 are preferably CR x , more preferably 1 or 2 are CR x .
  • Examples of the substituent represented by R x include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • the compound represented by formula (1-1) preferably satisfies any one of requirements 1, 3 or 4 described above, more preferably satisfies requirement 3 or requirement 4, It is more preferable that Requirement 3 is satisfied.
  • the compound represented by formula (1-1) is preferably a compound represented by formula (1-1-1).
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • R x2 to R x9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; adjacent two of R x2 to R x9 may combine to form a ring;
  • formula (1-1-1) satisfies any of the following requirements 1a to 4a;
  • Requirement 1a Adjacent two of R x3 to R x5 are bonded to form a ring;
  • Requirement 2a R x2 and R x3 combine to form a heterocycle;
  • Requirement 3a adjacent two of R x6 to R x9 are bonded to form a ring;
  • Requirement 4a At least one of R x2 and R x3 is a hydrogen atom, and at least one of R x2 to R x9 is a substituent.
  • R 1 in formula (1-1-1) has the same definition as R 1 in formula (1).
  • substituents represented by R x2 to R x9 in formula (1-1-1) include the above-described substituent T, preferably a group containing a hetero atom, and the above-described specific functional group A. is more preferred.
  • adjacent two of R x2 to R x9 may combine to form a ring.
  • the ring to be formed includes the rings described above.
  • the ring thus formed may further have a substituent.
  • the substituent include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • Formula (1-1-1) satisfies any one of the requirements 1a to 4a described above.
  • Requirement 1a is that adjacent two of R x3 to R x5 are bonded to form a ring.
  • the ring to be formed includes the rings described above, preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring.
  • the ring formed above may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • requirement 1a include an embodiment in which R x3 and R x4 are bonded to form a ring, and an embodiment in which R x4 and R x5 are bonded to form a ring.
  • At least one of R x6 to R x9 is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably the specific functional group A described above).
  • Requirement 2a is that R x2 and R x3 combine to form a heterocyclic ring.
  • the heterocycles formed include the heterocycles described above.
  • the hetero ring formed above may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • At least one of R x6 to R x9 is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably the specific functional group A described above).
  • Requirement 3a is that adjacent two of R x6 to R x9 are bonded to form a ring.
  • the ring to be formed includes the rings described above, preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring.
  • the ring formed above may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • requirement 3a include an aspect in which R x6 and R x7 are bonded to form a ring, an aspect in which R x7 and R x8 are bonded to form a ring, and R x8 and R x9 is bonded to form a ring, and since it is possible to form a film with more excellent light resistance, an embodiment in which R x6 and R x7 are bonded to form a ring, or R The embodiment in which x7 and R x8 are bonded to form a ring is preferable, and the embodiment in which R x7 and R x8 are bonded to form a ring is more preferable.
  • adjacent two of R x2 to R x5 may combine to form a ring.
  • the ring to be formed includes the rings described above, preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring.
  • the ring formed above may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • At least one of R x2 to R x5 is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably the specific functional group A described above).
  • Requirement 4a is that at least one of R x2 and R x3 is a hydrogen atom, and at least one of R x2 to R x9 is a substituent.
  • 1 to 4 of R x2 to R x9 are preferably substituents, and more preferably 1 or 2 are substituents.
  • Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • Formula (1-1-1) preferably satisfies any of the requirements 1a, 3a or 4a described above, more preferably satisfies requirement 3a or requirement 4a, and satisfies requirement 3a More preferably.
  • R 1 in formula (1-2) has the same definition as R 1 in formula (1).
  • Examples of the substituent represented by R 2 to R 11 in formula (1-2) include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • adjacent two of R 2 to R 11 may combine to form a ring.
  • the ring to be formed includes the rings described above.
  • the ring thus formed may further have a substituent.
  • the substituent include the substituent T described above.
  • the substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
  • At least one of R 2 to R 11 in formula (1-2) is a substituent, and is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, since a film having more excellent light resistance can be formed. More preferably, it is the specific functional group A described above. Further, 1 to 4 (more preferably 1 or 2, still more preferably 1) of R 2 to R 11 in formula (1-2) are preferably substituents, and are groups containing heteroatoms. It is preferable that there is, and it is more preferable that it is the specific functional group A described above.
  • At least one of R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 9 and R 10 in formula (1-2) is preferably a substituent, preferably a group containing a heteroatom, and more preferably a specific functional group A described above.
  • at least one of R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 9 and R 10 in formula (1-2) is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably the above-described specific functional group A), and the rest are hydrogen atoms.
  • the metal atom to which compound A1 is coordinated includes a copper atom, a zinc atom, an iron atom, a titanium atom, an aluminum atom, a tin atom, a magnesium atom, a chromium atom, a calcium atom and a silicon atom. and a zinc atom, more preferably a copper atom.
  • a ligand may be further coordinated to the metal atom.
  • Ligands include heterocyclic compounds (e.g., pyridine, pyrimidine, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, tetrazole, quinoline, 1,10-phenanthroline, etc.), protic compounds (e.g., water, methanol, ethanol, etc.), amine compounds ( For example, triethylamine, N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenediamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid N,N,N',N'',N''-pentamethyldiethylenetriamine, etc.), amide compounds (for example, N,N- dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, etc.), dimethylsulfoxide, sulfolane, nitrile compounds (eg, acetonitrile, etc.), and the like.
  • heterocyclic compounds e.g., pyridine, pyrimidine, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, t
  • Examples of compound A2 include a compound represented by formula (A2-1), a compound represented by formula (A2-2), a compound represented by formula (A2-3), and a compound represented by formula (A2-4). and the compounds represented.
  • M 1 to M 5 each independently represent a metal atom.
  • Compound A2 is a compound in which a ligand is coordinated to a metal atom at a ratio of 1:3, a compound in which a ligand is coordinated to a metal atom at a ratio of 1:4, a metal atom A compound in which the ligand is coordinated to the metal atom in a ratio of 2:3 and a compound in which the ligand is coordinated to the metal atom in a ratio of 3:3 may be used.
  • a part of the ligand may be dissociated from the metal atom, or a compound other than the ligand may be coordinated to the metal atom.
  • the specific dye multimer has at least one repeating unit selected from repeating units represented by the formula (A), repeating units represented by the formula (B), and repeating units represented by the formula (C). or a dye multimer represented by the formula (D).
  • a dye multimer having a repeating unit represented by formula (A) is also referred to as a dye multimer (A).
  • a dye multimer having a repeating unit represented by formula (B) is also referred to as a dye multimer (B).
  • a dye multimer having a repeating unit represented by formula (C) is also referred to as a dye multimer (C).
  • the dye multimer represented by Formula (D) is also called dye multimer (D).
  • Pigment multimer (A) contains a repeating unit represented by Formula (A).
  • the proportion of repeating units represented by formula (A) is preferably 20 to 100% by mass of all repeating units constituting the specific dye multimer.
  • the lower limit is preferably 25% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 90% by mass or less, more preferably 80% by mass or less.
  • a 1 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • DyeI represents the dye structure.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by A 1 of the formula (A) includes a poly(meth)acrylic linking group, a polyalkyleneimine linking group, a polyester linking group, a polyurethane linking group, a polyurea linking group, and a polyamide linking group.
  • a linking group, a polyether-based linking group, a polystyrene-based linking group, a bisphenol-based linking group, a novolak-based linking group and the like can be mentioned, and a poly(meth)acrylic-based linking group is preferred.
  • L1 in formula (A) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 1-30.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, even more preferably 20 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
  • the arylene group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the arylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • the heteroatom possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
  • the dye structure represented by DyeI of formula (A) is preferably a residue obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from compound A1 described above, or a residue obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from compound A2 described above. More specifically, hydrogen A structure in which one atom is removed is preferable.
  • the structure represented by formula (1) is preferably the structure represented by formula (1-1) described above or the structure represented by formula (1-2) described above.
  • the dye structure represented by DyeI is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by the above formula (1), or a structure in which the structure represented by the above formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom.
  • the specific dye multimer having a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from is also the dye multimer of the present invention.
  • repeating unit represented by formula (A) include the following.
  • Me represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Ac represents an acetyl group.
  • the dye multimer (A) may contain other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit represented by formula (A).
  • Other repeating units include repeating units having a crosslinkable group, repeating units having an acid group, and the like.
  • crosslinkable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups such as vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups and (meth)acryloyl groups, and cyclic ether groups such as epoxy groups and oxetanyl groups.
  • a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, etc. are mentioned as an acid group.
  • the proportion of repeating units having a crosslinkable group is preferably 35% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less, and 25% by mass or less of all repeating units constituting the dye multimer (A). It is even more preferable to have The lower limit is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the proportion of repeating units having an acid group is preferably 25% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and 15% by mass or less of all repeating units constituting the dye multimer (A). is more preferred.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • dye multimer (A) examples include dye multimers (S-1), (S-2), (S-5), (S-9) to (S-14) described in the examples below. ), (S-16) and the like.
  • Pigment multimer (B) contains a repeating unit represented by Formula (B).
  • the proportion of the repeating unit represented by formula (B) is preferably 20 to 100% by mass of the total repeating units constituting the specific dye multimer.
  • the lower limit is preferably 25% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 95% by mass or less, more preferably 90% by mass or less.
  • a 2 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • DyeII represents a dye structure having a group capable of ionic bonding or bonding with Y2
  • Y2 represents a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with DyeII .
  • a 2 in formula (B) has the same definition as A 1 in formula (A), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • L2 in formula (B) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • each R independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • the details of the divalent linking group are the same as for L1 in formula ( A ).
  • L 2 is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, an arylene group, -NH-, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, or a divalent linking group in which two or more of these are combined.
  • Examples of groups capable of ionic bonding or coordinative bonding with DyeII represented by Y 2 of formula (B) include anionic groups and cationic groups.
  • anionic group examples include -SO 3 - , -COO - , -PO 4 2- , -PO 4 H - , a group containing a bis(sulfonyl)imide anion structure and a group containing a tris(sulfonyl)methide anion structure. be done. Specific examples include a group represented by formula (AN-1) and a group represented by formula (AN-2).
  • L AN1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • R AN1 represents -SO 3 - , -COO - , -PO 4 2- or -PO 4 H - .
  • the divalent linking group represented by L AN1 may be —NR AN10 —, —O—, —SO 2 —, an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom, an arylene group containing a fluorine atom, or a group consisting of a combination thereof. preferable.
  • a group consisting of a combination of —NR AN10 — and —SO 2 and an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom a group consisting of a combination of —O— and an arylene group containing a fluorine atom, or —NR AN10 — and —SO A group consisting of a combination of 2 and an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferred.
  • R AN10 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-6, and even more preferably 1-3. These alkylene groups are more preferably perfluoroalkylene groups. Specific examples of fluorine-substituted alkylene groups include a difluoromethylene group, a tetrafluoroethylene group, and a hexafluoropropylene group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the arylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 6-20, more preferably 6-14, even more preferably 6-10.
  • arylene groups containing fluorine atoms include a tetrafluorophenylene group, a hexafluoro-1-naphthylene group and a hexafluoro-2-naphthylene group.
  • L AN2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, preferably a single bond.
  • the divalent linking group represented by LAN2 includes an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, —O—, —S—, or a group consisting of a combination thereof.
  • L AN3 represents -SO 2 - or -CO-, preferably -SO 2 -.
  • G represents a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, preferably a nitrogen atom.
  • n represents 2 when G is a carbon atom, and represents 1 when G is a nitrogen atom.
  • RAN2 represents an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom or an aryl group containing a fluorine atom.
  • the fluorine atom-containing alkyl group represented by R AN2 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the fluorine atom-containing aryl group represented by R AN2 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • Cationic groups include substituted or unsubstituted onium cations (eg, ammonium, pyridinium, imidazolium, phosphonium, etc.), with ammonium cations being particularly preferred.
  • Ammonium cations include -N(R) 3 + .
  • Each R independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and at least one of R represents an alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear.
  • DyeII in formula (B) represents a dye structure having a group capable of ionically bonding or bonding with Y2.
  • Groups capable of ionically bonding or bonding to Y2 include anionic groups and cationic groups. Specific examples of anionic groups and cationic groups include the groups described above.
  • the dye structure represented by DyeII of formula (B) is a structure represented by the above formula (1) or a structure in which the structure represented by the above formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom, and At least one of X 2 to X 9 in (1) preferably has a structure having a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent.
  • the structure represented by formula (1) is preferably the structure represented by formula (1-1) described above or the structure represented by formula (1-2) described above.
  • At least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent
  • At least one of R 2 to R 11 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent.
  • the dye structure represented by DyeII is a structure represented by the above formula (1), or a structure in which the structure represented by the above formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom
  • the specific dye multimer in which at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent is also the dye multimer of the present invention.
  • repeating unit represented by formula (B) include the following.
  • the pigment multimer (B) may contain, in addition to the repeating unit represented by formula (B), other repeating units described in the description of the embodiment of the pigment multimer (A).
  • pigment multimer (B) examples include the pigment multimers (S-3), (S-4), (S-17), etc. described in the examples below.
  • Pigment multimer (C) contains a repeating unit represented by Formula (C).
  • the proportion of repeating units represented by formula (C) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass of all repeating units constituting the specific dye multimer.
  • the lower limit is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 95% by mass or less, more preferably 90% by mass or less.
  • L3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • DyeIII represents the dye structure
  • m represents 0 or 1;
  • L3 in formula ( C) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • each R independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group and alkylene group is preferably 1-30.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, even more preferably 20 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more.
  • Alkyl groups and alkylene groups may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the aryl group and the arylene group preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • the heteroatom possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • An alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyl group and an aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent.
  • substituents include the groups listed above for the substituent T, the crosslinkable group, and the acid group.
  • development promoting groups groups containing repeating unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains of 2 to 20, groups containing lactone structures, acid anhydride groups, cyano groups, etc.
  • hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity adjusting groups long-chain or cyclic alkyl group, long-chain or cyclic aralkyl group, aryl group, polyalkylene oxide group, hydroxy group, maleimide group, amino group, etc.
  • L 3 of formula (C) is an alkylene group, an arylene group, -NH-, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, -SO 2 -, or a combination of two or more of these Linking groups are preferred.
  • the dye structure represented by DyeIII of formula (C) is preferably a residue obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from compound A1 described above, or a residue obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from compound A2 described above. More specifically, hydrogen A structure in which two atoms are removed is preferable.
  • the structure represented by formula (1) is preferably the structure represented by formula (1-1) described above or the structure represented by formula (1-2) described above.
  • the dye structure represented by DyeIII is a structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the structure represented by the above formula (1), or a structure in which the structure represented by the above formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom.
  • the specific dye multimer having a structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from is also the dye multimer of the present invention.
  • n in formula (C) represents 0 or 1, preferably 1.
  • repeating unit represented by formula (C) include the following.
  • the pigment multimer (C) may contain, in addition to the repeating unit represented by formula (C), other repeating units described in the description of the embodiment of the pigment multimer (A).
  • pigment multimer (C) examples include the pigment multimer (S-6) described in the examples below.
  • Dye multimer (D) is a compound represented by Formula (D).
  • L 4 represents an (n+k)-valent linking group
  • n represents an integer from 2 to 20
  • k represents an integer from 0 to 20
  • DyeIV stands for dye structure
  • P4 represents a substituent
  • Each of n DyeIV may be different, When k is 2 or more, the plurality of P 4 may be different, n+k represents an integer from 2 to 20;
  • n in formula (D) is preferably 2 to 14, more preferably 2 to 8, particularly preferably 2 to 7, and even more preferably 2 to 6.
  • k is preferably 1 to 13, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 8, particularly preferably 1 to 7, and even more preferably 1 to 6.
  • the (n+k)-valent linking group represented by L 4 in formula (D) includes 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 Groups consisting of 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms and 0 to 20 sulfur atoms are included.
  • the (n+k)-valent linking group is preferably the following structural unit or a group (which may form a ring structure) formed by combining two or more of the following structural units. * in the following formulas represents a bond.
  • the (n+k) -valent linking group represented by L4 is preferably a linking group derived from a polyfunctional thiol, a linking group derived from a polyfunctional alcohol, or a linking group derived from an acid anhydride, A linking group derived from a polyfunctional thiol is more preferred.
  • the (n+k)-valent linking group represented by L 4 is preferably a group represented by any one of formulas (Za-1) to (Za-4).
  • La 3 represents a trivalent group
  • Ta 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • the three Ta 3 present may be the same or different.
  • La 4 represents a tetravalent group
  • Ta 4 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • the four Ta 4 present may be the same or different.
  • La 5 represents a pentavalent group
  • Ta 5 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • the five Ta 5 present may be the same or different.
  • La 6 represents a hexavalent group
  • Ta 6 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • the six Ta 6s present may be the same or different.
  • * represents a bond.
  • each R independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • the divalent linking group represented by Ta 3 to Ta 6 is preferably a group containing -S-, more preferably -S-.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group and alkylene group is preferably 1-30.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, even more preferably 20 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more.
  • Alkyl groups and alkylene groups may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the aryl group and the arylene group preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • the heteroatom possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • An alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyl group and an aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent.
  • substituents include the groups listed above for the substituent T, the crosslinkable group, and the acid group.
  • development promoting groups groups containing repeating unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains of 2 to 20, groups containing lactone structures, acid anhydride groups, cyano groups, etc.
  • hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity adjusting groups long-chain or cyclic alkyl group, long-chain or cyclic aralkyl group, aryl group, polyalkylene oxide group, hydroxy group, maleimide group, amino group, etc.
  • Examples of the trivalent group represented by La 3 include groups obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the above divalent linking group.
  • Examples of the tetravalent group represented by La 4 include groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the above divalent linking group.
  • Examples of the pentavalent group represented by La 5 include groups obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the above divalent linking group.
  • the hexavalent group represented by La 6 includes a group obtained by removing 4 hydrogen atoms from the above divalent linking group.
  • the tri- to hexavalent groups represented by La 3 to La 6 may have the substituents described above.
  • linking groups having the structures shown below linking groups described in paragraphs 0071 to 0072 of JP-A-2008-222950, and paragraphs of JP-A-2013-029760.
  • Examples include the linking group described in No. 0176, the linking group described in paragraphs 0022 to 0024 of WO 2016/031442, and the like.
  • a wavy line in the following formula represents a bond.
  • the dye structure represented by DyeIV of formula (D) is preferably a residue obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from compound A1 described above, or a residue obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from compound A2 described above. More specifically, hydrogen A structure in which one atom is removed is preferable.
  • the structure represented by formula (1) is preferably the structure represented by formula (1-1) described above or the structure represented by formula (1-2) described above.
  • the dye structure represented by DyeIV is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by the above formula (1), or a structure in which the structure represented by the above formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom.
  • the specific dye multimer having a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from is also the dye multimer of the present invention.
  • substituents represented by P4 in formula ( D) include an acid group and a crosslinkable group.
  • the substituent represented by P4 may be a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit.
  • a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit derived from a vinyl compound is preferable as the monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit.
  • k P4's may be the same or different.
  • P 4 is a monovalent polymer chain having repeating units and k is 1, P 4 has 2 to 20 (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10) is preferred. Further, when P 4 is a monovalent polymer chain having repeating units and k is 2 or more, the average number of vinyl compound-derived repeating units in k P 4 is 2 to 20 ( preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10). When P4 is a monovalent polymer chain having repeating units, the number of repeating units and the average number of repeating units can be determined by nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR).
  • NMR nuclear magnetic resonance
  • the repeating unit constituting P 4 includes other repeating units described in the description of the embodiment of the dye multimer (A) described above. .
  • Other repeating units preferably have one or more selected from repeating units having an acid group and repeating units having a crosslinkable group.
  • P4 contains a repeating unit containing an acid group
  • the proportion of the repeating unit containing an acid group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, preferably 10 to 65 mol%, relative to the total repeating units of P4. is more preferred.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit having a crosslinkable group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, preferably 10 to 65 mol, relative to the total repeating units of P 4 . % is more preferred.
  • the dye multimer (D) is preferably a compound represented by formula (D-1).
  • L 41 represents an (n+k)-valent linking group
  • n represents an integer from 2 to 20
  • k represents an integer from 0 to 20
  • DyeIV stands for dye structure
  • P4 represents a substituent
  • L 42 and L 43 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • each of the n DyeIV and L 43 may be different
  • n+k represents an integer from 2 to 20;
  • DyeIV, P 4 , n and k in formula (D-1) are synonymous with DyeIV, P 4 , n and k in formula (D), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • the (n+k)-valent linking group represented by L 41 of formula (D-1) includes 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, and 0 to 50 oxygen atoms. , from 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and from 0 to 20 sulfur atoms.
  • the (n+k)-valent linking group is preferably the following structural unit or a group (which may form a ring structure) formed by combining two or more of the following structural units. * in the following formulas represents a bond.
  • each R independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
  • L 42 and L 43 are preferably groups containing -S-, more preferably -S-.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group and alkylene group is preferably 1-30.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, even more preferably 20 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more.
  • Alkyl groups and alkylene groups may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the aryl group and the arylene group preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • the heteroatom possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • An alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyl group and an aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent.
  • substituents include the groups listed above for the substituent T, the crosslinkable group, and the acid group.
  • development promoting groups groups containing repeating unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains of 2 to 20, groups containing lactone structures, acid anhydride groups, cyano groups, etc.
  • hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity adjusting groups long-chain or cyclic alkyl group, long-chain or cyclic aralkyl group, aryl group, polyalkylene oxide group, hydroxy group, maleimide group, amino group, etc.
  • dye multimer (D) examples include the dye multimers (S-7), (S-8), (S-15), etc. described in the examples below.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific dye multimer is preferably 2,000 to 50,000. If the weight-average molecular weight of the specific dye multimer is within the above range, the effects of the present invention are remarkably exhibited.
  • the lower limit of the weight-average molecular weight is preferably 3,000 or more, more preferably 6,000 or more, from the viewpoint of storage stability.
  • the upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 30,000 or less, more preferably 20,000 or less, from the viewpoint of suppressing residue.
  • the acid value of the specific dye multimer is preferably 10-400 mgKOH/g. If the acid value of the specific dye multimer is within the above range, the generation of residue can be further suppressed.
  • the lower limit of the acid value is preferably 20 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, from the viewpoint of pattern formability.
  • the upper limit of the acid value is preferably 300 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value of the specific dye multimer is preferably 0.1 to 2.5 mmol/g. If the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value of the specific dye multimer is within the above range, a film having excellent light resistance and solvent resistance can be easily obtained.
  • the lower limit of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value is preferably 0.2 mmol/g or more, more preferably 0.3 mmol/g or more.
  • the upper limit of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value is preferably 2.0 mmol/g or less, more preferably 1.5 mmol/g or less, from the viewpoint of light resistance.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value of the specific dye multimer is a numerical value representing the molar amount of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group per 1 g of the solid content of the specific dye multimer.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value of the specific dye multimer can be calculated by dividing the number of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups contained in one molecule of the specific dye multimer by the molecular weight of the specific dye multimer. can.
  • the specific dye multimer may be a dye, but is preferably a pigment from the viewpoint of heat resistance and light resistance.
  • the amount of the specific dye multimer dissolved in 100 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether at 23°C is preferably 1 g or less, more preferably 0.5 g or less.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of the specific dye multimer preferably exists in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 400 to 600 nm.
  • the specific dye multimer is preferably a yellow colorant.
  • the specific dye multimer may form a salt with the carboxylic acid used during synthesis.
  • Specific examples of the specific dye multimer include the dye multimers (S-1) to (S-17) described in the examples below.
  • the content of the specific dye multimer in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.5 to 80% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 2% by mass or more, still more preferably 5% by mass or more, even more preferably 10% by mass or more, and 15% by mass. The above is even more preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, even more preferably 50% by mass or less, even more preferably 40% by mass or less, and 35% by mass. The following are even more preferred.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of specific dye multimer, or may contain two or more types. When two or more specific dye multimers are included, the total amount thereof preferably falls within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a curable compound.
  • the curable compound include polymerizable compounds and resins.
  • the resin may be a non-polymerizable resin (a resin having no polymerizable group) or a polymerizable resin (a resin having a polymerizable group).
  • Polymerizable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups. Examples of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups include vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, and (meth)acryloyl groups.
  • the cyclic ether group include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, with the epoxy group being preferred.
  • the epoxy group may be a cycloaliphatic epoxy group.
  • the alicyclic epoxy group means a monovalent functional group having a cyclic structure in which an epoxy ring and a saturated hydrocarbon ring are condensed.
  • the curable compound it is preferable to use one containing at least a resin.
  • a resin having an acid group and a polymerizable monomer can be used as the curable compound. More preferably, a resin having an acid group and a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group (monomer-type polymerizable compound) are used.
  • polymerizable compound examples include compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and compounds having a cyclic ether group.
  • a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group can be preferably used as a radically polymerizable compound.
  • a compound having a cyclic ether group can also be preferably used as a cationically polymerizable compound.
  • resin-type polymerizable compounds include resins containing repeating units having polymerizable groups.
  • the molecular weight of the monomer type polymerizable compound is preferably less than 2000, more preferably 1500 or less.
  • the lower limit of the molecular weight of the polymerizable monomer is preferably 100 or more, more preferably 200 or more.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin-type polymerizable compound is preferably 2,000 to 2,000,000.
  • the upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 1,000,000 or less, more preferably 500,000 or less.
  • the lower limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 3000 or more, more preferably 5000 or more.
  • the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group as a polymerizable monomer is preferably a 3- to 15-functional (meth)acrylate compound, more preferably a 3- to 6-functional (meth)acrylate compound.
  • Specific examples include paragraph numbers 0095 to 0108 of JP-A-2009-288705, paragraph 0227 of JP-A-2013-029760, paragraph numbers 0254-0257 of JP-A-2008-292970, and JP-A-2013-253224.
  • Examples of compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include dipentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), and dipentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate (commercially available).
  • KAYARAD D-320 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate commercially available KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate ) Acrylate commercially available as KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., NK Ester A-DPH-12E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • the (meth)acryloyl groups of these compounds are ethylene glycol and / Or a compound having a structure linked via a propylene glycol residue (for example, SR454 and SR499 commercially available from Sartomer).
  • Examples of compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include diglycerin EO (ethylene oxide)-modified (meth)acrylate (commercially available as M-460; manufactured by Toagosei), pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry ( Ltd., NK Ester A-TMMT), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., KAYARAD HDDA), RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Toagosei Co., Ltd.), NK Oligo UA-7200 (Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 8UH-1006, 8UH-1012 (Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), Light acrylate POB-A0 (Kyoeish
  • Examples of compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane propylene oxide-modified tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethylene oxide-modified tri(meth)acrylate, and ethylene oxide isocyanurate. It is also preferable to use trifunctional (meth)acrylate compounds such as modified tri(meth)acrylate and pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate. Commercial products of trifunctional (meth)acrylate compounds include Aronix M-309, M-310, M-321, M-350, M-360, M-313, M-315, M-306 and M-305.
  • M-303, M-452, M-450 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group may further have an acid group such as a carboxy group, a sulfo group, or a phosphoric acid group.
  • an acid group such as a carboxy group, a sulfo group, or a phosphoric acid group.
  • Commercially available products of such compounds include Aronix M-305, M-510, M-520 and Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • a compound having a caprolactone structure can also be used as the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
  • the descriptions in paragraphs 0042 to 0045 of JP-A-2013-253224 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Compounds having a caprolactone structure include, for example, DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, DPCA-120, etc., which are commercially available as a series from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an alkyleneoxy group can also be used as the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
  • Such a compound is preferably a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an ethyleneoxy group and/or a propyleneoxy group, and is a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an ethyleneoxy group. More preferably, it is a tri- to hexa-functional (meth)acrylate compound having 4 to 20 ethyleneoxy groups.
  • a polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used as the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
  • Commercially available products include Ogsol EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals Co., Ltd., (meth)acrylate monomer having a fluorene skeleton).
  • the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group it is also preferable to use a compound such as toluene that does not substantially contain environmentally regulated substances.
  • Commercially available products of such compounds include KAYARAD DPHA LT and KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • Examples of compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA- 306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600, LINC-202UA (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), 8UH-1006, 8UH-1012 (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), light acrylate POB-A0 ( Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like are also preferably used.
  • Compounds having a cyclic ether group include compounds having an epoxy group, compounds having an oxetanyl group, and the like, and compounds having an epoxy group are preferred.
  • Compounds having an epoxy group include compounds having 1 to 100 epoxy groups in one molecule.
  • the upper limit of the number of epoxy groups can be, for example, 10 or less, or 5 or less.
  • the lower limit of the number of epoxy groups is preferably two or more.
  • a compound having a cyclic ether group may be a low-molecular compound (for example, a molecular weight of less than 1000) or a macromolecule (for example, a molecular weight of 1000 or more, and in the case of a polymer, a weight-average molecular weight of 1000 or more).
  • the weight average molecular weight of the cyclic ether group is preferably from 200 to 100,000, more preferably from 500 to 50,000.
  • the upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less.
  • a resin can be used as a curable compound in the coloring composition of the present invention. It is preferable to use a curable compound containing at least a resin.
  • the resin is blended, for example, for dispersing a pigment or the like in a coloring composition or as a binder.
  • a resin mainly used for dispersing a pigment or the like in a coloring composition is also called a dispersant.
  • such uses of the resin are only examples, and the resin can be used for purposes other than such uses.
  • a resin having a polymerizable group also corresponds to a polymerizable compound.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the resin is preferably 3,000 to 2,000,000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, more preferably 500,000 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 4000 or more, more preferably 5000 or more.
  • resins include (meth)acrylic resins, epoxy resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, polyimide resins, Polyamide resins, polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, vinyl acetate resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinyl acetal resins, polyurethane resins, polyurea resins, and the like.
  • norbornene resin is preferable from the viewpoint of improving heat resistance.
  • Commercially available norbornene resins include, for example, the ARTON series manufactured by JSR Corporation (for example, ARTON F4520). Further, as the resin, the resin described in the examples of International Publication No.
  • a resin having a fluorene skeleton can also be preferably used.
  • the description of US Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0102610 can be referred to, the content of which is incorporated herein.
  • the resin the resin described in paragraphs 0199 to 0233 of JP-A-2020-186373, the alkali-soluble resin described in JP-A-2020-186325, and the Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0078339.
  • a resin represented by the formula 1 can also be used.
  • a resin having an acid group As the resin.
  • acid groups include carboxy groups, phosphoric acid groups, sulfo groups, and phenolic hydroxy groups. Only one kind of these acid groups may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used.
  • a resin having an acid group can be used, for example, as an alkali-soluble resin.
  • the acid value of the resin having acid groups is preferably 30-500 mgKOH/g.
  • the lower limit is preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 70 mgKOH/g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, still more preferably 150 mgKOH/g or less, and most preferably 120 mgKOH/g or less.
  • a resin containing a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the formula (ED1) and/or a compound represented by the formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as an "ether dimer"). It is also preferred to include
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the description in JP-A-2010-168539 can be referred to.
  • paragraph number 0317 of JP-A-2013-029760 can be referred to, the content of which is incorporated herein.
  • polymerizable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups.
  • repeating unit Ep at least one type of repeating unit selected from repeating units represented by formula (Ep-1) and repeating units represented by formula (Ep-2).
  • a resin hereinafter also referred to as resin Ep
  • the resin Ep may contain only one of the repeating units represented by the formula (Ep-1) and the repeating unit represented by the formula (Ep-2). -1) and the repeating unit represented by formula (Ep-2) may be included.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit represented by the formula (Ep-1) to the repeating unit represented by the formula (Ep-2) is the molar ratio represented by the formula (Ep-1).
  • Repeating unit: repeating unit represented by formula (Ep-2) preferably 5:95 to 95:5, more preferably 10:90 to 90:10, 20:80 to 80 :20 is more preferred.
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • the substituent represented by R 1 includes an alkyl group and an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, more preferably 1-3.
  • R 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 1 includes an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S- and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched.
  • the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. A hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, etc. are mentioned as a substituent.
  • the content of the repeating unit Ep in the resin Ep is preferably 1 to 100 mol% of all repeating units in the resin Ep.
  • the upper limit is preferably 90 mol % or less, more preferably 80 mol % or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2 mol % or more, more preferably 3 mol % or more.
  • the resin Ep may have other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit Ep.
  • Other repeating units include a repeating unit having an acid group, a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, and the like.
  • the acid group includes a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group, and a phosphoric acid group, preferably a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group, more preferably a carboxy group.
  • ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups examples include vinyl groups, styrene groups, (meth)allyl groups, and (meth)acryloyl groups.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an acid group in the resin Ep is preferably 5 to 85 mol% of all repeating units in the resin Ep.
  • the upper limit is preferably 60 mol % or less, more preferably 40 mol % or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 8 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the resin Ep is 1 to 65 mol% of the total repeating units of the resin Ep. is preferably The upper limit is preferably 45 mol % or less, more preferably 30 mol % or less. The lower limit is preferably 2 mol % or more, more preferably 3 mol % or more.
  • the resin Ep preferably further contains a repeating unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring may have a substituent. An alkyl group etc. are mentioned as a substituent.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring is 1 to 65 in all repeating units of the resin having a cyclic ether group.
  • Mole % is preferred. The upper limit is preferably 45 mol % or less, more preferably 30 mol % or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2 mol % or more, more preferably 3 mol % or more.
  • Repeating units having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring include repeating units derived from monofunctional polymerizable compounds having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring, such as vinyl toluene and benzyl (meth)acrylate.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an alkylene group
  • n represents an integer of 0-15.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group represented by R 21 and R 22 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, even more preferably 1 to 3, particularly 2 or 3.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 15, preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and even more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
  • Examples of the compound represented by formula (X) include ethylene oxide- or propylene oxide-modified (meth)acrylate of paracumylphenol.
  • Commercially available products include Aronix M-110 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • resin Ac a resin having an aromatic carboxy group
  • the aromatic carboxy group may be contained in the main chain of the repeating unit or may be contained in the side chain of the repeating unit.
  • the aromatic carboxy group is preferably contained in the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • an aromatic carboxy group is a group having a structure in which one or more carboxy groups are bonded to an aromatic ring.
  • the number of carboxy groups bonded to the aromatic ring is preferably 1-4, more preferably 1-2.
  • Resin Ac is preferably a resin containing at least one repeating unit selected from repeating units represented by formula (Ac-1) and repeating units represented by formula (Ac-2).
  • Ar 1 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxyl group
  • L 1 represents -COO- or -CONH-
  • L 2 represents a divalent linking group
  • Ar 10 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxyl group
  • L 11 represents -COO- or -CONH-
  • L 12 represents a trivalent linking group
  • P 10 represents a polymer represents a chain.
  • aromatic carboxy group-containing group represented by Ar 1 in formula (Ac-1) examples include structures derived from aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydrides, structures derived from aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydrides, and the like.
  • Aromatic tricarboxylic anhydrides and aromatic tetracarboxylic anhydrides include compounds having the following structures.
  • Q 1 is a single bond, -O-, -CO-, -COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, represented by the following formula (Q-1) or a group represented by the following formula (Q-2).
  • the group containing an aromatic carboxyl group represented by Ar 1 may have a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group is preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and a cyclic ether group, more preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
  • Specific examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 1 include a group represented by formula (Ar-11), a group represented by formula (Ar-12), and a group represented by formula (Ar-13). and the like.
  • n1 represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably 1 or 2, more preferably 2.
  • n2 represents an integer of 1 to 8, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2, and still more preferably 2.
  • n3 and n4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 1 or 2, preferably 1 More preferred. However, at least one of n3 and n4 is an integer of 1 or more.
  • Q 1 is a single bond, -O-, -CO-, -COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, the above formula (Q- 1) or a group represented by the above formula (Q-2).
  • * 1 represents the bonding position with L1.
  • L 1 represents -COO- or -CONH-, preferably -COO-.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 2 in formula (Ac-1) includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S- and these A group obtained by combining two or more of The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-15.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the arylene group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • An alkylene group and an arylene group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 2 is preferably a group represented by -L 2a -O-.
  • L 2a is an alkylene group; an arylene group; a group in which an alkylene group and an arylene group are combined; at least one selected from an alkylene group and an arylene group; Examples include groups in which at least one selected from —NH— and —S— are combined, and alkylene groups are preferred.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-15.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. An alkylene group and an arylene group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent.
  • the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 10 in formula (Ac-2) has the same meaning as Ar 1 in formula (Ac-1), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • L 11 represents -COO- or -CONH-, preferably -COO-.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 in formula (Ac-2) includes a hydrocarbon group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S- and 2 of these Groups in which more than one species are combined are included.
  • Hydrocarbon groups include aliphatic hydrocarbon groups and aromatic hydrocarbon groups. The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-15.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The number of carbon atoms in the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 6-30, more preferably 6-20, even more preferably 6-10.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 is preferably a group represented by formula (L12-1), more preferably a group represented by formula (L12-2).
  • L 12b represents a trivalent linking group
  • X 1 represents S
  • *1 represents the bonding position with L 11 of formula (Ac-2)
  • *2 represents formula ( The binding position of Ac- 2 ) with P10 is shown.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12b includes a hydrocarbon group; and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH- and -S- and the like, and a hydrocarbon group or a group of a combination of a hydrocarbon group and —O— is preferred.
  • L 12c represents a trivalent linking group
  • X 1 represents S
  • *1 represents the bonding position with L 11 of formula (Ac-2)
  • *2 represents formula ( The binding position of Ac- 2 ) with P10 is shown.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12c includes a hydrocarbon group; and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH- and -S- and the like, preferably a hydrocarbon group.
  • P 10 in formula (Ac-2) represents a polymer chain.
  • the polymer chain represented by P10 preferably has at least one repeating unit selected from poly(meth)acrylic repeating units, polyether repeating units, polyester repeating units and polyol repeating units.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain P10 is preferably 500-20,000 .
  • the lower limit is preferably 1000 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, even more preferably 3,000 or less. If the weight average molecular weight of P10 is within the above range, the dispersibility of the pigment in the composition is good.
  • the resin having an aromatic carboxyl group is a resin having repeating units represented by formula (Ac-2), this resin is preferably used as a dispersant.
  • the polymer chain represented by P10 may contain a polymerizable group.
  • Polymerizable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin as a dispersant.
  • Dispersants include acidic dispersants (acidic resins) and basic dispersants (basic resins).
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is greater than the amount of basic groups.
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) a resin having an acid group content of 70 mol % or more is preferable when the total amount of the acid group and the basic group is 100 mol %.
  • the acid group possessed by the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxy group.
  • the acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10-105 mgKOH/g.
  • a basic dispersant represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups.
  • a resin containing more than 50 mol % of basic groups is preferable when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol %.
  • the basic group possessed by the basic dispersant is preferably an amino group.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a graft resin.
  • graft resin for details of the graft resin, reference can be made to paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP-A-2012-255128, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a polyimine-based dispersant containing nitrogen atoms in at least one of its main chain and side chains.
  • the polyimine-based dispersant has a main chain having a partial structure having a functional group with a pKa of 14 or less and a side chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms, and at least one of the main chain and the side chain has a basic nitrogen atom.
  • a resin having The basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it is a nitrogen atom exhibiting basicity.
  • the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0166 of JP-A-2012-255128 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin having a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core.
  • resins include, for example, dendrimers (including star polymers). Further, specific examples of dendrimers include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP-A-2013-043962.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in its side chain.
  • the content of repeating units having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 20 to 70, of the total repeating units of the resin. More preferably, it is mol %.
  • resins described in JP-A-2018-087939, block copolymers (EB-1) to (EB-9) described in paragraphs 0219 to 0221 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077, Polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in International Publication No. 2016/104803, a block copolymer described in International Publication No. 2019/125940, a block polymer having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A-2020-066687 , a block polymer having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A-2020-066688, a dispersant described in WO 2016/104803, and the like can also be used.
  • Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples thereof include Disperbyk series manufactured by BYK-Chemie (e.g., Disperbyk-111, 161, 2001, etc.), Solsperse manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. series (for example, Solsperse 20000, 76500, etc.), Ajinomoto Fine-Techno Co., Inc. Ajisper series, and the like.
  • Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples thereof include Disperbyk series manufactured by BYK-Chemie (e.g., Disperbyk-111, 161, 2001, etc.), Solsperse manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. series (for example, Solsperse 20000, 76500, etc.), Ajinomoto Fine-Techno Co., Inc. Ajisper series, and the like.
  • the content of the curable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 70% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of curable compound, or may contain two or more kinds of curable compounds. When two or more curable compounds are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 1 to 70% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one polymerizable compound, or may contain two or more polymerizable compounds. When two or more polymerizable compounds are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the content of the polymerizable monomer is preferably 1 to 50% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 35% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less, and even more preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one polymerizable monomer, or may contain two or more polymerizable monomers. When two or more polymerizable monomers are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the content of the resin is preferably 1 to 70 wt% of the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less.
  • the content of the resin having an acid group is preferably 1 to 70 mass% of the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less.
  • the content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1 to 70% by mass of the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less.
  • the content of the resin as a dispersant is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the upper limit is preferably 25% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the content of the resin as a dispersant is preferably 1 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment.
  • the upper limit is preferably 80 parts by mass or less, more preferably 70 parts by mass or less, and even more preferably 60 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more, and even more preferably 20 parts by mass or more.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one resin, or may contain two or more resins. When two or more resins are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the content of the polymerizable monomer is preferably 30 to 150 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin.
  • the upper limit is preferably 130 parts by mass or less, more preferably 110 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 40 parts by mass or more, more preferably 50 parts by mass or more.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can further contain a coloring agent (another coloring agent) other than the specific dye multimer described above.
  • a coloring agent include chromatic colorants such as green colorants, red colorants, yellow colorants, violet colorants, blue colorants, orange colorants, and the like.
  • the other coloring agent is preferably at least one selected from a green coloring agent, a red coloring agent and a yellow coloring agent, more preferably a green coloring agent.
  • Other coloring agents may be pigments or dyes, but are preferably pigments.
  • the average primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 1 to 200 nm.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 nm or more, more preferably 10 nm or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 180 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, and even more preferably 100 nm or less.
  • the primary particle diameter of the pigment can be determined from the image photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment with a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is obtained, and the corresponding circle equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment.
  • the average primary particle size in this specification is the arithmetic mean value of the primary particle sizes of 400 primary particles of the pigment.
  • the primary particles of the pigment refer to independent particles without agglomeration.
  • green colorants examples include phthalocyanine compounds and squarylium compounds, with phthalocyanine compounds being preferred.
  • the green colorant is preferably a pigment, more preferably a phthalocyanine pigment, and even more preferably a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment.
  • Specific examples of green colorants include C.I. I. Green pigments such as Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65 and 66 are included.
  • a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine having an average number of halogen atoms of 10 to 14, an average number of bromine atoms of 8 to 12, and an average number of chlorine atoms of 2 to 5 per molecule. Pigments can also be used.
  • Specific examples include compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720.
  • the compound described in Chinese Patent Application No. 106909027 the phthalocyanine compound having a phosphoric acid ester as a ligand described in WO 2012/102395, described in JP 2019-008014.
  • the phthalocyanine compound, the phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A-2018-180023, the compound described in JP-A-2019-038958, the aluminum phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A-2020-070426, JP-A-2020-076995 Core-shell type dyes described in, diarylmethane compounds described in JP-A-2020-504758, and the like can also be used.
  • the green coloring agent is C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, 36, 58, 59, 62 and 63 are preferred, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, 36, 58 and 59 are more preferred.
  • red colorants examples include diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, azo compounds, naphthol compounds, azomethine compounds, xanthene compounds, quinacridone compounds, perylene compounds, and thioindigo compounds.
  • the red colorant is preferably a pigment, more preferably a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment, anthraquinone pigment, azo pigment, naphthol pigment, azomethine pigment, xanthene pigment, quinacridone pigment, perylene pigment or thioindigo pigment.
  • Pyrrole pigments, anthraquinone pigments and azo pigments are more preferred, and diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments are particularly preferred.
  • red colorants include C.I. I. (Color Index) Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48:4, 49, 49:1, 49:2, 52:1, 52:2, 53:1, 57:1, 60:1, 63:1, 66, 67, 81:1, 81:2, 81: 3, 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184, 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 269, 270, 272, 279, 291, 294, 295, 296, 297 and other red pigments.
  • a red colorant a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound in which at least one bromine atom is substituted in the structure described in JP-A-2017-201384, a diketopyrrolopyrrole described in paragraphs 0016 to 0022 of Japanese Patent No.
  • 10-2019-0140741 anthraquinone compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0140744, JP 2020 -Perylene compounds described in JP-A-079396, perylene compounds described in JP-A-2020-083982, xanthene compounds described in JP-A-2018-035345, paragraph numbers 0025 to 0041 of JP-A-2020-066702
  • the described diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds and the like can also be used.
  • red colorant a compound having a structure in which an aromatic ring group in which a group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom is bonded to an aromatic ring is bonded to a diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton is used.
  • Lumogen F Orange 240 manufactured by BASF, red pigment, perylene pigment
  • red colorant can also be used as a red colorant.
  • the red coloring agent is C.I. I. Pigment Red 122, 177, 179, 254, 255, 264, 269, 272 and 291 are preferred, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 254, 264, 272 are more preferred.
  • yellow colorants examples include azo compounds, azomethine compounds, isoindoline compounds, pteridine compounds, quinophthalone compounds and perylene compounds.
  • the yellow colorant is preferably a pigment, more preferably an azo pigment, an azomethine pigment, an isoindoline pigment, a pteridine pigment, a quinophthalone pigment or a perylene pigment, and even more preferably an isoindoline pigment or an azo pigment.
  • Specific examples of yellow colorants include C.I. I.
  • an azobarbiturate nickel complex having the following structure can also be used.
  • X 1 to X 16 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
  • Z 1 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (QP1) include compounds described in paragraph 0016 of Japanese Patent No. 6443711.
  • Y 1 to Y 3 each independently represent a halogen atom.
  • n and m are integers from 0 to 6; p is an integer from 0 to 5; (n+m) is 1 or more.
  • Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (QP2) include compounds described in paragraphs 0047 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077.
  • the yellow coloring agent is C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 117, 129, 138, 139, 150 and 185 are preferred.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Orange 2 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. of orange pigments.
  • C.I. I. Purple pigments such as Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, 60, 61 are included.
  • C.I. I. pigment blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 22, 29, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80, 87, 88, etc. be done.
  • An aluminum phthalocyanine compound having a phosphorus atom can also be used as a blue colorant. Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0030 of JP-A-2012-247591 and paragraph number 0047 of JP-A-2011-157478.
  • Dyes can also be used as other coloring agents.
  • the dye is not particularly limited, and known dyes can be used.
  • colorants include diarylmethane compounds described in JP-A-2020-504758, triarylmethane dye polymers described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0028160, and JP-A-2020-117638.
  • the chromatic colorant may be a rotaxane, and the dye skeleton may be used in the cyclic structure of the rotaxane, may be used in the rod-like structure, or may be used in both structures.
  • colorants may be used in combination of two or more. Further, when two or more other colorants are used in combination, black color may be formed by the combination of the specific dye multimer and two or more other colorants.
  • a colored composition is preferably used as a colored composition for forming an infrared transmission filter.
  • the combination of two or more other colorants includes, for example, the following (1) to (5) A combination of (1) A mode containing a red colorant and a blue colorant. (2) A mode containing a red colorant, a blue colorant, and a purple colorant.
  • Other colorants include at least one selected from phthalocyanine pigments, dioxazine pigments, quinacridone pigments, anthraquinone pigments, perylene pigments, azo pigments, azomethine pigments, diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments, pyrrolopyrrole pigments, isoindoline pigments and quinophthalone pigments. It preferably contains a phthalocyanine pigment, more preferably at least one selected from diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments and pyrrolopyrrole pigments, and more preferably contains a phthalocyanine pigment from the viewpoint of light resistance and solvent resistance. .
  • the phthalocyanine pigment is preferably a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment. That is, the other coloring agent preferably contains a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment. Further, the halogenated phthalocyanine pigment used as another coloring agent is preferably a green pigment.
  • a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment is a phthalocyanine pigment having a halogen atom as a substituent. Further, the phthalocyanine pigment is preferably a phthalocyanine pigment having a central metal, more preferably a phthalocyanine pigment having a copper atom, a zinc atom or an aluminum atom as the central metal, and having a copper atom or a zinc atom as the central metal. Phthalocyanine pigments are more preferred.
  • a ligand may be further coordinated to the central metal.
  • halogenated copper phthalocyanine pigments halogenated phthalocyanine pigments having a copper atom as the central metal
  • halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments halogenated phthalocyanine pigments having a zinc atom as the central metal
  • halogenated aluminum phthalocyanines It preferably contains at least one selected from pigments (halogenated phthalocyanine pigments having an aluminum atom as a central metal), and more preferably contains at least one selected from halogenated copper phthalocyanine pigments and halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments. preferable.
  • Halogenated copper phthalocyanine pigments include C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, 36 and the like.
  • Halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments include C.I. I. Pigment Green 58, 59 and the like.
  • halogenated aluminum phthalocyanine pigments include C.I. I. Pigment Green 63 and the like.
  • the content of other colorants in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 10 to 80% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, still more preferably 35% by mass or more, and even more preferably 40% by mass or more.
  • the content of the other colorant is preferably 50 to 1000 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the specific dye multimer.
  • the upper limit is preferably 900 parts by mass or less, more preferably 800 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 70 parts by mass or more, more preferably 100 parts by mass or more.
  • the total content of the specific dye multimer and the other colorant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 20 to 90% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 85% by mass or less, more preferably 80% by mass or less, and even more preferably 75% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 40% by mass or more, still more preferably 45% by mass or more, and even more preferably 50% by mass or more.
  • the other coloring agent preferably contains a green coloring agent. It is also preferable to use a green coloring agent and a yellow coloring agent together.
  • the green colorant is preferably a phthalocyanine pigment, more preferably a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment.
  • the content of the green coloring agent in the other coloring agent is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more.
  • the content of the green colorant is preferably 150 to 600 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the specific pigment multimer. The upper limit is preferably 550 parts by mass or less, more preferably 500 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 200 parts by mass or more, more preferably 250 parts by mass or more.
  • the yellow coloring agent is preferably an isoindoline pigment or an azo pigment.
  • the other coloring agent preferably contains a red coloring agent. It is also preferable to use a red coloring agent and a yellow coloring agent together.
  • the red colorant is preferably a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment.
  • the content of the red colorant in the other colorant is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more.
  • the content of the red coloring agent is preferably 50 to 900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the specific pigment multimer.
  • the upper limit is preferably 850 parts by mass or less, more preferably 800 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 70 parts by mass or more, more preferably 100 parts by mass or more.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the colored composition of the invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, compounds having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet range to the visible range are preferred.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • photopolymerization initiators include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds and the like.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.
  • acylphosphine compounds e.g., acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds and the like.
  • photopolymerization initiators include trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, hexaarylbi imidazole compounds, onium compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes, halomethyloxadiazole compounds and 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds, oxime compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketones compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds, more preferably oxime compounds.
  • hexaarylbiimidazole compounds include 2,2′,4-tris(2-chlorophenyl)-5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenyl-1,1′-biimidazole, etc. is mentioned.
  • ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 2959, Irgacure 127 (above company) and the like.
  • ⁇ -aminoketone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 907, Irgacure 369, Irgacure 369E, Irgacure 379EG (manufactured by Irgacure 369E, Irgacure 379EG). made), etc.
  • acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819, Omnirad TPO (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 819 and Irgacure TPO (manufactured by BASF).
  • Examples of oxime compounds include compounds described in JP-A-2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A-2000-080068, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, J. Am. C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.1653-1660); C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.156-162), compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp.202-232), compounds described in JP-A-2000-066385, Compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, compounds described in JP-A-2017-019766, compounds described in Patent No. 6065596, International Publication No.
  • oxime compounds include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino -1-phenylpropane-1-one, 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-3-cyclohexyl-propane-1,2-dione-2-(O-acetyloxime) and the like.
  • An oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include compounds described in JP-A-2014-137466, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6636081, and compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2016-0109444. mentioned.
  • an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of the carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring can also be used.
  • Specific examples of such oxime compounds include compounds described in WO2013/083505.
  • An oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP-A-2010-262028, compounds 24, 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A-2013-164471. and the compound (C-3) of.
  • An oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably a dimer.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0031 to 0047 of JP-A-2013-114249 and paragraph numbers 0008-0012 and 0070-0079 of JP-A-2014-137466; Compounds described in paragraphs 0007 to 0025 of Japanese Patent No. 4223071 and ADEKA Arkles NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) can be mentioned.
  • An oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples include OE-01 to OE-75 described in WO 2015/036910.
  • an oxime compound in which a substituent having a hydroxyl group is bonded to the carbazole skeleton can also be used.
  • Examples of such a photopolymerization initiator include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2019/088055.
  • an oxime compound having an aromatic ring group Ar 2 OX1 in which an electron-withdrawing group is introduced into the aromatic ring (hereinafter also referred to as oxime compound OX) can be used.
  • the electron-withdrawing group of the aromatic ring group Ar OX1 include an acyl group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, an alkylsulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, and a cyano group.
  • a benzoyl group may have a substituent.
  • substituents include halogen atoms, cyano groups, nitro groups, hydroxy groups, alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryl groups, aryloxy groups, heterocyclic groups, heterocyclic oxy groups, alkenyl groups, alkylsulfanyl groups, arylsulfanyl groups, It is preferably an acyl group or an amino group, more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylsulfanyl group, an arylsulfanyl group or an amino group.
  • a sulfanyl group or an amino group is more preferred.
  • the oxime compound OX is preferably at least one selected from the compounds represented by the formula (OX1) and the compounds represented by the formula (OX2), more preferably the compound represented by the formula (OX2). preferable.
  • R X1 is an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkoxy group, aryl group, aryloxy group, heterocyclic group, heterocyclicoxy group, alkylsulfanyl group, arylsulfanyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl a group, an arylsulfonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amino group, a phosphinoyl group, a carbamoyl group or a sulfamoyl group
  • R X2 is an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkoxy group, aryl group, aryloxy group, heterocyclic group,
  • electron-withdrawing groups include acyl groups, nitro groups, trifluoromethyl groups, alkylsulfinyl groups, arylsulfinyl groups, alkylsulfonyl groups, arylsulfonyl groups, and cyano groups, with acyl groups and nitro groups being preferred.
  • An acyl group is more preferred, and a benzoyl group is even more preferred, because a film having excellent properties can be easily formed.
  • R X12 is an electron-withdrawing group
  • R X10 , R X11 , R X13 and R X14 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • oxime compound OX examples include compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0105 of Japanese Patent No. 4600600.
  • oxime compounds preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
  • the oxime compound is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm, more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 360 to 480 nm.
  • the molar extinction coefficient of the oxime compound at a wavelength of 365 nm or a wavelength of 405 nm is preferably high from the viewpoint of sensitivity, more preferably 1000 to 300000, further preferably 2000 to 300000, even more preferably 5000 to 200000. It is particularly preferred to have
  • the molar extinction coefficient of a compound can be measured using known methods. For example, it is preferably measured at a concentration of 0.01 g/L using an ethyl acetate solvent with a spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian).
  • Irgacure OXE01 manufactured by BASF
  • Irgacure OXE02 manufactured by BASF
  • Omnirad 2959 manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.
  • a bifunctional or trifunctional or higher functional photoradical polymerization initiator may be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • a radical photopolymerization initiator two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the radical photopolymerization initiator, so good sensitivity can be obtained.
  • the crystallinity is reduced, the solubility in a solvent or the like is improved, the precipitation becomes difficult over time, and the stability over time of the colored composition can be improved.
  • Specific examples of bifunctional or trifunctional or higher photoradical polymerization initiators include Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 15% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or less.
  • only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more kinds are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent.
  • An organic solvent is mentioned as a solvent.
  • the type of solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the coatability of the composition.
  • Organic solvents include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, and hydrocarbon-based solvents. For these details, reference can be made to paragraph 0223 of WO2015/166779, the content of which is incorporated herein. Ester-based solvents substituted with cyclic alkyl groups and ketone-based solvents substituted with cyclic alkyl groups can also be preferably used.
  • organic solvents include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2 -heptanone, 2-pentanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethylcarbitol Acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N
  • aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as organic solvents may be better reduced for environmental reasons (e.g., 50 mass ppm (parts per million), 10 mass ppm or less, or 1 mass ppm or less).
  • an organic solvent with a low metal content it is preferable to use an organic solvent with a low metal content.
  • the metal content of the organic solvent is preferably, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less. If necessary, an organic solvent at a ppt (parts per trillion) level by mass may be used, and such an organic solvent is provided, for example, by Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015). .
  • Examples of methods for removing impurities such as metals from organic solvents include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter.
  • the filter pore size of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 3 ⁇ m or less.
  • the material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
  • the organic solvent may contain isomers (compounds with the same number of atoms but different structures). Moreover, only one isomer may be contained, or a plurality of isomers may be contained.
  • the content of peroxide in the organic solvent is preferably 0.8 mmol/L or less, and more preferably substantially free of peroxide.
  • the content of the solvent in the coloring composition is preferably 10-95% by mass, more preferably 20-90% by mass, and even more preferably 30-90% by mass.
  • the colored composition of the present invention does not substantially contain environmentally regulated substances.
  • substantially free of environmentally regulated substances means that the content of environmentally regulated substances in the colored composition is 50 ppm by mass or less, preferably 30 ppm by mass or less. , is more preferably 10 mass ppm or less, and particularly preferably 1 mass ppm or less.
  • Environmental control substances include, for example, benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene.
  • distillation off a small amount of environmentally regulated substances it is also useful to azeotrope with a solvent having a boiling point equivalent to that of the solvent in order to increase the efficiency.
  • a polymerization inhibitor or the like is added and distilled off under reduced pressure in order to suppress the radical polymerization reaction from progressing during the vacuum distillation and the intermolecular cross-linking.
  • These distillation methods are the raw material stage, the reaction product of the raw materials (for example, the resin solution or polyfunctional monomer solution after polymerization), or the colored composition stage produced by mixing these compounds. It is possible at any stage such as
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain pigment derivatives.
  • Pigment derivatives are used, for example, as dispersing aids.
  • Pigment derivatives include compounds having a structure in which an acid group or a basic group is bonded to a pigment skeleton.
  • Dye skeletons constituting pigment derivatives include quinoline dye skeletons, benzimidazolone dye skeletons, benzoisoindole dye skeletons, benzothiazole dye skeletons, iminium dye skeletons, squarylium dye skeletons, croconium dye skeletons, oxonol dye skeletons, and pyrrolopyrrole dye skeletons.
  • diketopyrrolopyrrole dye skeleton azo dye skeleton, azomethine dye skeleton, phthalocyanine dye skeleton, naphthalocyanine dye skeleton, anthraquinone dye skeleton, quinacridone dye skeleton, dioxazine dye skeleton, perinone dye skeleton, perylene dye skeleton, thioindigo dye skeleton, Isoindoline dye skeletons, isoindolinone dye skeletons, quinophthalone dye skeletons, iminium dye skeletons, dithiol dye skeletons, triarylmethane dye skeletons, pyrromethene dye skeletons, and the like can be mentioned.
  • the acid group includes a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boronic acid group, a carboxylic acid amide group, a sulfonic acid amide group, an imidic acid group and salts thereof.
  • Atoms or atomic groups constituting the salt include alkali metal ions (Li + , Na + , K + etc.), alkaline earth metal ions (Ca 2+ , Mg 2+ etc.), ammonium ions, imidazolium ions, pyridinium ions, phosphonium ion and the like.
  • the carboxylic acid amide group a group represented by —NHCOR X1 is preferable.
  • sulfonic acid amide group a group represented by —NHSO 2 R X2 is preferable.
  • the imidic acid group is preferably a group represented by —SO 2 NHSO 2 R X3 , —CONHSO 2 R X4 , —CONHCOR X5 or —SO 2 NHCOR X6 , more preferably —SO 2 NHSO 2 R X3 .
  • R X1 to R X6 each independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the alkyl groups and aryl groups represented by R X1 to R X6 may have substituents.
  • the substituent is preferably a halogen atom, more preferably a fluorine atom.
  • Basic groups include amino groups, pyridinyl groups and salts thereof, salts of ammonium groups, and phthalimidomethyl groups.
  • Atoms or atomic groups constituting salts include hydroxide ions, halogen ions, carboxylate ions, sulfonate ions, and phenoxide ions.
  • a pigment derivative having excellent visible transparency (hereinafter also referred to as a transparent pigment derivative) can also be used as the pigment derivative.
  • the maximum value ( ⁇ max) of the molar extinction coefficient of the transparent pigment derivative in the wavelength region of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 3000 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less, and 1000 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less. is more preferable, and 100 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less is even more preferable.
  • the lower limit of ⁇ max is, for example, 1 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or more, and may be 10 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or more.
  • pigment derivatives include compounds described in JP-A-56-118462, compounds described in JP-A-63-264674, compounds described in JP-A-01-217077, JP-A-03- 009961, compounds described in JP-A-03-026767, compounds described in JP-A-03-153780, compounds described in JP-A-03-045662, JP-A-04-285669 Compounds described in publications, compounds described in JP-A-06-145546, compounds described in JP-A-06-212088, compounds described in JP-A-06-240158, JP-A-10-030063 Compounds described, compounds described in JP-A-10-195326, compounds described in paragraphs 0086 to 0098 of WO 2011/024896, WO 2012/102399 described in paragraphs 0063 to 0094 Compounds, compounds described in paragraph number 0082 of WO 2017/038252, compounds described in paragraph number 0171 of JP 2015-151530, JP 2011-25
  • the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 3 to 20 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the specific coloring agent.
  • the total content of the pigment derivative and the colorant is preferably 35% by mass or more, more preferably 40% by mass or more, still more preferably 45% by mass or more, and 50% by mass of the total solid content of the coloring composition. More than % by mass is particularly preferred.
  • the upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 65% by mass or less. Only one pigment derivative may be used, or two or more pigment derivatives may be used in combination.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can also contain a polyalkyleneimine.
  • Polyalkyleneimines are used, for example, as dispersing aids for pigments.
  • a dispersing aid is a material for enhancing dispersibility of a pigment in a coloring composition.
  • Polyalkyleneimine is a polymer obtained by ring-opening polymerization of alkyleneimine.
  • Polyalkyleneimine is preferably a polymer having at least a secondary amino group.
  • the polyalkyleneimine may contain a primary amino group or a tertiary amino group in addition to the secondary amino group.
  • the polyalkyleneimine is preferably a polymer having a branched structure each containing a primary amino group, a secondary amino group and a tertiary amino group.
  • the alkyleneimine preferably has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms, still more preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 carbon atoms.
  • the molecular weight of the polyalkyleneimine is preferably 200 or more, more preferably 250 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less, even more preferably 10,000 or less, and particularly preferably 2,000 or less.
  • the molecular weight of the polyalkyleneimine when the molecular weight can be calculated from the structural formula, the molecular weight of the polyalkyleneimine is the value calculated from the structural formula.
  • the molecular weight of the specific amine compound cannot be calculated from the structural formula or is difficult to calculate, the value of the number average molecular weight measured by the boiling point elevation method is used.
  • the value of the number average molecular weight measured by the viscosity method is used.
  • the value of the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene measured by the GPC (gel permeation chromatography) method is used.
  • the amine value of the polyalkyleneimine is preferably 5 mmol/g or more, more preferably 10 mmol/g or more, and even more preferably 15 mmol/g or more.
  • alkyleneimine examples include ethyleneimine, propyleneimine, 1,2-butyleneimine, 2,3-butyleneimine and the like, preferably ethyleneimine or propyleneimine, more preferably ethyleneimine. preferable. It is particularly preferred that the polyalkyleneimine is polyethyleneimine. In addition, the polyethyleneimine preferably contains 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more, of the primary amino group with respect to the total of the primary amino group, the secondary amino group and the tertiary amino group. , more preferably 30 mol % or more.
  • Commercial products of polyethyleneimine include Epomin SP-003, SP-006, SP-012, SP-018, SP-200, P-1000 (manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.).
  • the content of polyalkyleneimine in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.2% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 4.5% by mass or less, more preferably 4% by mass or less, and even more preferably 3% by mass or less.
  • the content of the polyalkyleneimine is preferably 0.5 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.6 parts by mass or more, more preferably 1 part by mass or more, and even more preferably 2 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 8 parts by mass or less. Only one kind of polyalkyleneimine may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a curing accelerator.
  • Curing accelerators include thiol compounds, methylol compounds, amine compounds, phosphonium salt compounds, amidine salt compounds, amide compounds, base generators, isocyanate compounds, alkoxysilane compounds, onium salt compounds and the like.
  • the curing accelerator include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0094 to 0097 of WO 2018/056189, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0246 to 0253 of JP 2015-034963, JP 2013-041165 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0186 to 0251 of the publication, ionic compounds described in JP 2014-055114, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0071 to 0080 of JP 2012-150180, JP 2011-253054 Alkoxysilane compounds having an epoxy group described in JP-A-2005-200557, compounds described in paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of Japanese Patent No. 5765059, and carboxy group-containing epoxy curing agents described in JP-A-2017-036379.
  • the content of the curing accelerator in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass, more preferably 0.8 to 6.4% by mass.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can further contain an infrared absorbing agent.
  • an infrared absorbing agent for example, in the case of forming an infrared transmission filter using the coloring composition of the present invention, the wavelength of the light transmitted through the film obtained by containing an infrared absorbing agent in the coloring composition is shifted to the longer wavelength side.
  • the infrared absorbing agent is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength on the longer wavelength side than the wavelength of 700 nm.
  • the infrared absorbing agent is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 1800 nm or less.
  • the ratio A 1 /A 2 between the absorbance A 1 at a wavelength of 500 nm and the absorbance A 2 at the maximum absorption wavelength of the infrared absorbent is preferably 0.08 or less, more preferably 0.04 or less.
  • infrared absorbers examples include pyrrolopyrrole compounds, cyanine compounds, squarylium compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, quaterrylene compounds, merocyanine compounds, croconium compounds, oxonol compounds, iminium compounds, dithiol compounds, triarylmethane compounds, pyrromethene compounds, and azomethine. compounds, anthraquinone compounds, dibenzofuranone compounds, dithiolene metal complexes, metal oxides, metal borides, and the like.
  • pyrrolopyrrole compound compounds described in paragraph numbers 0016 to 0058 of JP-A-2009-263614, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0037-0052 of JP-A-2011-068731, WO 2015/166873 Compounds described in Paragraph Nos. 0010 to 0033 and the like.
  • examples of the squarylium compound include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0044 to 0049 of JP-A-2011-208101, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0060 to 0061 of Japanese Patent No. 6065169, and paragraph number 0040 of WO 2016/181987.
  • Examples of croconium compounds include compounds described in JP-A-2017-082029.
  • As the iminium compound for example, compounds described in JP-A-2008-528706, compounds described in JP-A-2012-012399, compounds described in JP-A-2007-092060, International Publication No. 2018/043564 and the compounds described in paragraphs 0048 to 0063 of.
  • Examples of the phthalocyanine compound include compounds described in paragraph number 0093 of JP-A-2012-077153, oxytitanium phthalocyanine described in JP-A-2006-343631, and paragraph numbers 0013 to 0029 of JP-A-2013-195480. compounds, vanadium phthalocyanine compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6081771, vanadium phthalocyanine compounds described in International Publication No. 2020/071486, and phthalocyanine compounds described in International Publication No. 2020/071470. Examples of naphthalocyanine compounds include compounds described in paragraph number 0093 of JP-A-2012-077153. Dithiolene metal complexes include compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5733804.
  • metal oxides include indium tin oxide, antimony tin oxide, zinc oxide, Al-doped zinc oxide, fluorine-doped tin dioxide, niobium-doped titanium dioxide, and tungsten oxide.
  • metal borides include lanthanum boride.
  • Commercially available lanthanum boride products include LaB 6 -F (manufactured by Nippon New Metal Co., Ltd.).
  • a metal boride the compound as described in international publication 2017/119394 can also be used.
  • commercially available products of indium tin oxide include F-ITO (manufactured by DOWA Hitech Co., Ltd.).
  • the infrared absorbing agent the squarylium compound described in JP-A-2017-197437, the squarylium compound described in JP-A-2017-025311, the squarylium compound described in WO 2016/154782, and the patent No. 5884953. No. 6036689, squarylium compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5810604, squarylium compounds described in paragraphs 0090 to 0107 of International Publication No.
  • the content of the infrared absorbing agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 40% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of infrared absorbing agent, or may contain two or more types thereof. When two or more kinds of infrared absorbing agents are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain an ultraviolet absorber.
  • ultraviolet absorbers include conjugated diene compounds, aminodiene compounds, salicylate compounds, benzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, acrylonitrile compounds, hydroxyphenyltriazine compounds, indole compounds, and triazine compounds. Specific examples of such compounds include paragraph numbers 0038 to 0052 of JP-A-2009-217221, paragraph numbers 0052-0072 of JP-A-2012-208374, and paragraph numbers 0317-0317 of JP-A-2013-068814.
  • UV absorbers examples include UV-503 (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd.), Tinuvin series and Uvinul series manufactured by BASF, and Sumisorb series manufactured by Sumika Chemtex Co., Ltd. .
  • Benzotriazole compounds include the MYUA series manufactured by Miyoshi Oil (Kagaku Kogyo Nippo, February 1, 2016).
  • the ultraviolet absorber is a compound described in paragraph numbers 0049 to 0059 of Japanese Patent No.
  • a thioaryl group-substituted benzotriazole-type ultraviolet absorber described in can also be used.
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass. Only one type of ultraviolet absorber may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more kinds are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a polymerization inhibitor.
  • Polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salts (ammonium salts, cerous salts, etc.). Among them, p-methoxyphenol is preferred.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass. Only one kind of polymerization inhibitor may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent.
  • a silane coupling agent means a silane compound having a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups.
  • the hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and capable of forming a siloxane bond by at least one of hydrolysis reaction and condensation reaction.
  • Hydrolyzable groups include, for example, halogen atoms, alkoxy groups, acyloxy groups and the like, with alkoxy groups being preferred. That is, the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group.
  • Examples of functional groups other than hydrolyzable groups include vinyl group, (meth)allyl group, (meth)acryloyl group, mercapto group, epoxy group, oxetanyl group, amino group, ureido group, sulfide group and isocyanate group. , phenyl group, etc., and amino group, (meth)acryloyl group and epoxy group are preferred.
  • silane coupling agent examples include N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-602), N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -amino propyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-603), N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBE-602), ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-903), ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM
  • silane coupling agent examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0018 to 0036 of JP-A-2009-288703 and compounds described in paragraph numbers 0056-0066 of JP-A-2009-242604. , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the content of the silane coupling agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 15.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 10.0% by mass. Only one kind of silane coupling agent may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a surfactant.
  • a surfactant various surfactants such as fluorine surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, anionic surfactants, and silicone surfactants can be used.
  • the surfactant is preferably a silicone-based surfactant or a fluorine-based surfactant.
  • surfactants reference can be made to surfactants described in paragraphs 0238-0245 of WO2015/166779, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorine-based surfactant is preferably 3-40% by mass, more preferably 5-30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7-25% by mass.
  • a fluorosurfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of the thickness of the coating film and saving liquid, and has good solubility in the coloring composition.
  • JP 2014-041318 Paragraph Nos. 0060 to 0064 (corresponding International Publication No. 2014/017669 Paragraph Nos. 0060 to 0064) surfactants described in, JP 2011- Examples include surfactants described in paragraphs 0117 to 0132 of JP-A-132503 and surfactants described in JP-A-2020-008634, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Commercially available fluorosurfactants include Megafac F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143 and F-144.
  • the fluorosurfactant has a molecular structure with a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and an acrylic compound in which the functional group containing a fluorine atom is cleaved and the fluorine atom volatilizes when heat is applied is also suitable.
  • fluorine-based surfactants include MegaFac DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)), for example, Mega Fac DS-21.
  • fluorosurfactant it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound as the fluorosurfactant.
  • fluorosurfactants include fluorosurfactants described in JP-A-2016-216602, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • a block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant.
  • the fluorosurfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meta)
  • a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactants described in paragraphs 0016 to 0037 of JP-A-2010-032698 and the following compounds are also exemplified as fluorine-based surfactants used in the present invention.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3000-50000, for example 14000. In the above compounds, % indicating the ratio of repeating units is mol%.
  • a fluoropolymer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in a side chain can also be used as the fluorosurfactant.
  • Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0050 to 0090 and paragraph numbers 0289 to 0295 of JP-A-2010-164965, MEGAFACE RS-101, RS-102 and RS-718K manufactured by DIC Corporation, and RS-72-K.
  • compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A-2015-117327 can also be used.
  • a fluorine-containing imide salt compound represented by formula (fi-1) is a surfactant.
  • m represents 1 or 2
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 4
  • a represents 1 or 2
  • X a + is a valent metal ion, primary ammonium ion, Represents secondary ammonium ion, tertiary ammonium ion, quaternary ammonium ion or NH4 + .
  • Nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and their ethoxylates and propoxylates (e.g., glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, Polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2 (BASF company), Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1 (manufactured by BASF), Solsperse 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.), NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 (Fuji
  • Silicone surfactants include DOWSIL SH8400, SH8400 FLUID, FZ-2122, 67 Additive, 74 Additive, M Additive, SF 8419 OIL (manufactured by Dow Toray Industries, Inc.), TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP-341, KF-6000, KF-6001, KF-6002, KF-6003 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) , BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-333, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie) and the like.
  • a compound having the following structure can also be used as the silicone-based surfactant.
  • the content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3.0% by mass. Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain an antioxidant.
  • Antioxidants include phenol compounds, phosphite ester compounds, thioether compounds and the like. Any phenolic compound known as a phenolic antioxidant can be used as the phenolic compound. Preferred phenolic compounds include hindered phenolic compounds. A compound having a substituent at a site adjacent to the phenolic hydroxy group (ortho position) is preferred. As the aforementioned substituent, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms is preferred.
  • the antioxidant is also preferably a compound having a phenol group and a phosphite ester group in the same molecule.
  • Phosphorus-based antioxidants can also be suitably used as antioxidants.
  • a phosphorus antioxidant tris[2-[[2,4,8,10-tetrakis(1,1-dimethylethyl)dibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-6 -yl]oxy]ethyl]amine, tris[2-[(4,6,9,11-tetra-tert-butyldibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-2-yl ) oxy]ethyl]amine, ethyl bis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl) phosphite, and the like.
  • antioxidants examples include Adekastab AO-20, Adekastab AO-30, Adekastab AO-40, Adekastab AO-50, Adekastab AO-50F, Adekastab AO-60, Adekastab AO-60G, Adekastab AO-80. , ADEKA STAB AO-330 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) and the like.
  • antioxidants are compounds described in paragraph numbers 0023 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967, compounds described in WO 2017/006600, compounds described in WO 2017/164024, Compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0059371 can also be used.
  • the content of the antioxidant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.3 to 15% by mass. Only one kind of antioxidant may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used. When two or more kinds are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may optionally contain sensitizers, curing accelerators, fillers, thermosetting accelerators, plasticizers and other auxiliaries (e.g., conductive particles, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, release accelerators, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.). Properties such as film physical properties can be adjusted by appropriately containing these components. These components are, for example, described in JP 2012-003225, paragraph number 0183 and later (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812, paragraph number 0237), JP 2008-250074 paragraph The descriptions of numbers 0101 to 0104, 0107 to 0109, etc. can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • auxiliaries e.g., conductive particles, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, release accelerators, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a latent antioxidant, if desired.
  • the latent antioxidant is a compound in which the site functioning as an antioxidant is protected with a protective group, and is heated at 100 to 250°C, or heated at 80 to 200°C in the presence of an acid/base catalyst.
  • a compound that functions as an antioxidant by removing the protective group by the reaction is exemplified.
  • Examples of latent antioxidants include compounds described in International Publication No. 2014/021023, International Publication No. 2017/030005, and JP-A-2017-008219.
  • Commercially available latent antioxidants include ADEKA Arkles GPA-5001 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.).
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a metal oxide in order to adjust the refractive index of the resulting film.
  • metal oxides include TiO 2 , ZrO 2 , Al 2 O 3 and SiO 2 .
  • the primary particle size of the metal oxide is preferably 1 to 100 nm, more preferably 3 to 70 nm, even more preferably 5 to 50 nm.
  • Metal oxides may have a core-shell structure. Moreover, in this case, the core portion may be hollow.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a light resistance improver.
  • a light resistance improver compounds described in paragraph numbers 0036 to 0037 of JP-A-2017-198787, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0029-0034 of JP-A-2017-146350, JP-A-2017-129774 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0036 to 0037, 0049 to 0052 of JP 2017-129674 JP 2017-129674 paragraph numbers 0031 to 0034, 0058 to 0059 compounds described in JP 2017-122803 paragraph numbers 0036 to 0037 , compounds described in 0051 to 0054, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0025 to 0039 of WO 2017/164127, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0047 of JP 2017-186546, JP 2015-025116 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0019 to 0041 of JP-A-2012-145604, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0101-0125 of JP-A-2012-103475, compounds
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably does not substantially contain terephthalic acid ester.
  • substantially free means that the content of terephthalic acid ester is 1000 mass ppb or less in the total amount of the coloring composition, and more preferably 100 mass ppb or less, Zero is particularly preferred.
  • perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts may be regulated.
  • perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid especially perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group
  • fluoroalkylcarboxylic acid especially perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group
  • its salt is 0.01ppb to 1,000ppb with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts.
  • a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt and a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salt, perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and salts thereof may be selected.
  • Examples of compounds that can substitute for regulated compounds include compounds that are excluded from the scope of regulation due to differences in the number of carbon atoms in perfluoroalkyl groups. However, the above content does not prevent the use of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts within the maximum permissible range.
  • the water content of the coloring composition of the present invention is usually 3% by mass or less, preferably 0.01 to 1.5% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass.
  • the water content can be measured by the Karl Fischer method.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be used by adjusting the viscosity for the purpose of adjusting the film surface state (such as flatness) and adjusting the film thickness.
  • the viscosity value can be appropriately selected as necessary, and is preferably, for example, 0.3 mPa ⁇ s to 50 mPa ⁇ s, more preferably 0.5 mPa ⁇ s to 20 mPa ⁇ s at 25°C.
  • a method for measuring the viscosity for example, a cone-plate type viscometer can be used, and the viscosity can be measured in a state where the temperature is adjusted to 25°C.
  • the colored composition of the present invention preferably has a chloride ion content of 10000 ppm or less, more preferably 1000 ppm or less, from the viewpoint of environmental friendliness, suppression of foreign matter generation, suppression of equipment contamination, etc. preferable.
  • a chloride ion content 10000 ppm or less, more preferably 1000 ppm or less, from the viewpoint of environmental friendliness, suppression of foreign matter generation, suppression of equipment contamination, etc. preferable.
  • the use of raw materials with a low chloride ion content, washing with water, ion exchange resin, a method of removing chloride ions by filter filtration, etc. be done.
  • a known method can be used as a method for measuring chloride ions, and examples thereof include ion chromatography and combustion ion chromatography.
  • the container for the coloring composition is not particularly limited, and known containers can be used.
  • a storage container a multi-layer bottle whose inner wall is composed of 6 types and 6 layers of resins and a bottle with a 7-layer structure of 6 types of resins for the purpose of suppressing contamination of raw materials and coloring compositions. It is also preferred to use Examples of such a container include the container described in JP-A-2015-123351.
  • the inner wall of the container is preferably made of glass or stainless steel for the purpose of preventing metal elution from the inner wall of the container, enhancing the storage stability of the coloring composition, and suppressing deterioration of components.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the aforementioned ingredients.
  • all components may be simultaneously dissolved and / or dispersed in a solvent to prepare a colored composition, and if necessary, each component may be appropriately mixed into two or more solutions or dispersions. , these may be mixed at the time of use (at the time of coating) to prepare a colored composition.
  • a process of dispersing the pigment when preparing the coloring composition.
  • mechanical forces used for dispersing pigments include compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation, and the like.
  • Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high pressure wet atomization, ultrasonic dispersion, and the like.
  • 2015-157893 can be suitably used.
  • the particles may be made finer in the salt milling process.
  • Materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc. used in the salt milling step can be referred to, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2015-194521 and 2012-046629.
  • any filter that has been conventionally used for filtration or the like can be used without particular limitation.
  • fluororesins such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF)
  • polyamide resins such as nylon (eg nylon-6, nylon-6,6)
  • polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (including high-density, ultra-high-molecular-weight polyolefin resin) and other materials.
  • PP polypropylene
  • nylon including high density polypropylene
  • nylon including high density polypropylene
  • the pore size of the filter is preferably 0.01-7.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.01-3.0 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 0.05-0.5 ⁇ m. If the pore diameter of the filter is within the above range, fine foreign matter can be removed more reliably.
  • the pore size value of the filter reference can be made to the filter manufacturer's nominal value.
  • Various filters provided by Nippon Pall Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NXEY, DFA4201NAEY, DFA4201J006P, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Nihon Entegris Co., Ltd. (former Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.), Kitz Micro Filter Co., Ltd., etc. can be used as filters. .
  • fibrous filter media include polypropylene fibers, nylon fibers, and glass fibers.
  • Commercially available products include SBP type series (SBP008, etc.), TPR type series (TPR002, TPR005, etc.), and SHPX type series (SHPX003, etc.) manufactured by Roki Techno.
  • filters When using filters, different filters (eg, a first filter and a second filter, etc.) may be combined. At that time, filtration with each filter may be performed only once, or may be performed twice or more. Also, filters with different pore sizes within the range described above may be combined. Further, the filtration with the first filter may be performed only on the dispersion liquid, and after mixing other components, the filtration with the second filter may be performed. In addition, the filter can be appropriately selected according to the hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity of the composition.
  • the film of the present invention is a film obtained from the colored composition of the present invention described above.
  • the film of the present invention can be used for optical filters such as color filters and infrared transmission filters.
  • it can be preferably used as a colored pixel of a color filter.
  • colored pixels include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and yellow pixels. Green pixels, yellow pixels, or red pixels are preferred, and green pixels are more preferred. preferable.
  • the film thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose, but is preferably 0.1 to 20 ⁇ m.
  • the upper limit of the film thickness is preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 3 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 1.5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more.
  • the film of the invention can be produced through a step of applying the coloring composition of the invention onto a support.
  • the film manufacturing method further includes a step of forming a pattern (pixels).
  • a method for forming the pattern (pixels) includes a photolithography method and a dry etching method, and the photolithography method is preferable.
  • Pattern formation by photolithography includes the steps of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, a step of patternwise exposing the colored composition layer, and a step of exposing the colored composition layer. forming a pattern (pixels) by developing and removing the exposed portion. If necessary, a step of baking the coloring composition layer (pre-baking step) and a step of baking the developed pattern (pixels) (post-baking step) may be provided.
  • the colored composition layer of the present invention is used to form the colored composition layer on the support.
  • the support is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected depending on the application. Examples thereof include glass substrates and silicon substrates, and silicon substrates are preferred. Also, a charge-coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film, or the like may be formed on the silicon substrate.
  • CCD charge-coupled device
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • the silicon substrate is formed with a black matrix that isolates each pixel.
  • the silicon substrate may be provided with an underlying layer for improving adhesion with the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface.
  • the underlayer may be formed using a composition obtained by removing the coloring agent from the colored composition described herein, or a composition containing the resin, polymerizable compound, surfactant, etc. described herein. good.
  • the surface contact angle of the underlayer is preferably 20 to 70° when measured with diiodomethane. Further, it is preferably 30 to 80° when measured with water.
  • a known method can be used as a method for applying the coloring composition.
  • dropping method drop cast
  • slit coating method spray method
  • roll coating method spin coating
  • methods described in publications inkjet
  • ejection system printing such as nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, metal mask printing, etc.
  • Examples include various printing methods; transfer methods using molds and the like; nanoimprinting methods and the like.
  • the application method for inkjet is not particularly limited.
  • the colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (pre-baked). Pre-baking may not be performed when the film is manufactured by a low-temperature process.
  • the pre-baking temperature is preferably 150° C. or lower, more preferably 120° C. or lower, and even more preferably 110° C. or lower.
  • the lower limit can be, for example, 50° C. or higher, and can also be 80° C. or higher.
  • the pre-bake time is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, even more preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Pre-baking can be performed using a hot plate, an oven, or the like.
  • the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure step).
  • the colored composition layer can be exposed in a pattern by exposing through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using a stepper exposure machine, a scanner exposure machine, or the like. Thereby, the exposed portion can be cured.
  • Radiation (light) that can be used for exposure includes g-line, i-line, and the like.
  • Light with a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light with a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used.
  • Light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less includes KrF rays (wavelength: 248 nm), ArF rays (wavelength: 193 nm), etc., and KrF rays (wavelength: 248 nm) are preferable.
  • a long-wave light source of 300 nm or more can also be used.
  • the light when exposing, the light may be continuously irradiated and exposed, or may be irradiated and exposed in pulses (pulse exposure).
  • pulse exposure is an exposure method in which exposure is performed by repeating light irradiation and rest in short-time (for example, millisecond level or less) cycles.
  • the dose is, for example, preferably 0.03 to 2.5 J/cm 2 , more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 J/cm 2 .
  • the oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be selected as appropriate.
  • the exposure may be in an oxygen-free atmosphere, or in a high-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration exceeding 21% by volume (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume, or 50% by volume).
  • the exposure illuminance can be set as appropriate, and is usually selected from the range of 1000 W/m 2 to 100000 W/m 2 (eg, 5000 W/m 2 , 15000 W/m 2 or 35000 W/m 2 ). can be done.
  • the oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may be appropriately combined.
  • the illuminance may be 10000 W/m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 10% by volume and 20000 W/m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 35% by volume.
  • the unexposed areas of the colored composition layer are removed by development to form a pattern (pixels).
  • the development and removal of the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer can be performed using a developer.
  • the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer in the exposure step is eluted into the developer, leaving only the photocured portion.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably 20 to 30° C., for example.
  • the development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Further, in order to improve the residue removability, the step of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and then supplying new developer may be repeated several times.
  • the developer includes an organic solvent, an alkaline developer, etc., and an alkaline developer is preferably used.
  • an alkaline developer an alkaline aqueous solution (alkali developer) obtained by diluting an alkaline agent with pure water is preferable.
  • alkaline agents include ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, diglycolamine, diethanolamine, hydroxylamine, ethylenediamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, and tetrabutylammonium hydroxide.
  • ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide
  • benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide dimethylbis(2-hydroxyethyl)ammonium hydroxide
  • choline pyrrole
  • piperidine 1,8-diazabicyclo-[5.4.0]-7-undecene
  • examples include organic alkaline compounds and inorganic alkaline compounds such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium silicate and sodium metasilicate.
  • a compound having a large molecular weight is preferable for the alkaline agent from the standpoint of environment and safety.
  • the concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass.
  • the developer may further contain a surfactant. From the viewpoint of transportation and storage convenience, the developer may be produced once as a concentrated solution and then diluted to the required concentration when used. Although the dilution ratio is not particularly limited, it can be set, for example, in the range of 1.5 to 100 times. It is also preferable to wash (rinse) with pure water after development. Rinsing is preferably carried out by supplying a rinse solution to the developed colored composition layer while rotating the support on which the developed colored composition layer is formed.
  • the nozzle for discharging the rinsing liquid from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion of the support.
  • the moving speed of the nozzle may be gradually decreased.
  • Additional exposure processing and post-baking are post-development curing treatments for complete curing.
  • the heating temperature in post-baking is, for example, preferably 100 to 240.degree. C., more preferably 200 to 240.degree.
  • Post-baking can be performed continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulating dryer), or a high-frequency heater so that the developed film satisfies the above conditions. .
  • the light used for exposure preferably has a wavelength of 400 nm or less.
  • the additional exposure process may be performed by the method described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2017-0122130.
  • Pattern formation by a dry etching method is a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, and curing the entire colored composition layer to form a cured product layer; a step of forming a photoresist layer on the cured layer; a step of patternwise exposing the photoresist layer and then developing it to form a resist pattern; and etching the cured layer using the resist pattern as a mask. and dry etching using a gas.
  • a mode in which heat treatment after exposure and heat treatment (post-baking treatment) after development are performed is desirable.
  • pattern formation by a dry etching method descriptions in paragraphs 0010 to 0067 of JP-A-2013-064993 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • optical filter of the present invention has the film of the present invention as described above.
  • Types of optical filters include color filters and infrared transmission filters, and color filters are preferred.
  • a color filter preferably has the film of the present invention as its colored pixels.
  • the film thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose.
  • the film thickness is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or more, and even more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more.
  • the width of pixels included in the optical filter is preferably 0.4 to 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.4 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more, and even more preferably 0.6 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 5.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.8 ⁇ m or less.
  • the Young's modulus of the pixel is preferably 0.5 to 20 GPa, more preferably 2.5 to 15 GPa.
  • Each pixel included in the optical filter preferably has high flatness.
  • the pixel surface roughness Ra is preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 40 nm or less, and even more preferably 15 nm or less. Although the lower limit is not specified, it is preferably 0.1 nm or more, for example.
  • the surface roughness of a pixel can be measured using, for example, AFM (Atomic Force Microscope) Dimension 3100 manufactured by Veeco.
  • the contact angle of water on the pixel can be appropriately set to a preferable value, but is typically in the range of 50 to 110°. The contact angle can be measured using, for example, a contact angle meter CV-DT-A type (manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd.).
  • the volume resistance value of the pixel is high.
  • the volume resistance value of the pixel is preferably 10 9 ⁇ cm or more, more preferably 10 11 ⁇ cm or more.
  • the upper limit is not specified, it is preferably 10 14 ⁇ cm or less, for example.
  • the volume resistance value of the pixel can be measured using an ultra-high resistance meter 5410 (manufactured by Advantest).
  • a protective layer may be provided on the surface of the film of the present invention.
  • the protective layer By providing the protective layer, it is possible to impart various functions such as blocking oxygen, reducing reflection, making the film hydrophilic and hydrophobic, and blocking light of a specific wavelength (ultraviolet rays, near-infrared rays, etc.).
  • the thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01-10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1-5 ⁇ m.
  • Examples of the method of forming the protective layer include a method of applying a protective layer-forming composition, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of adhering a molded resin with an adhesive.
  • Components constituting the protective layer include (meth)acrylic resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, and polyimides.
  • the protective layer preferably contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 and Si 2 N 4 .
  • the protective layer preferably contains a (meth)acrylic resin and a fluororesin.
  • the protective layer contains organic/inorganic fine particles, absorbers for light of specific wavelengths (e.g., ultraviolet rays, near-infrared rays, etc.), refractive index modifiers, antioxidants, adhesion agents, additives such as surfactants. may contain.
  • organic/inorganic fine particles include polymeric fine particles (eg, silicone resin fine particles, polystyrene fine particles, melamine resin fine particles), titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, aluminum oxide, titanium nitride, and titanium oxynitride. , magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate, and the like.
  • a known absorber can be used as the absorber for light of a specific wavelength.
  • the content of these additives can be appropriately adjusted, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 1 to 60% by mass, based on the total mass of the protective layer.
  • the protective layer the protective layers described in paragraphs 0073 to 0092 of JP-A-2017-151176 can also be used.
  • the optical filter may have a structure in which each pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partition walls, for example, in a grid pattern.
  • the solid-state imaging device of the present invention includes the film of the present invention described above.
  • the configuration of the solid-state imaging device is not particularly limited as long as it functions as a solid-state imaging device.
  • a plurality of photodiodes and transfer electrodes made of polysilicon or the like are provided on the substrate, forming the light-receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor, CMOS (complementary metal-oxide semiconductor) image sensor, etc.). and a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light shielding film and the photodiode light receiving portion. and a color filter on the device protective film.
  • CCD charge-coupled device
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
  • the color filter may have a structure in which each color pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partition walls, for example, in a grid pattern.
  • the partition wall preferably has a lower refractive index than each color pixel. Examples of imaging devices having such a structure include devices described in JP-A-2012-227478, JP-A-2014-179577, and International Publication No. 2018/043654.
  • an ultraviolet absorption layer may be provided in the structure of the solid-state imaging device to improve light resistance.
  • An imaging device equipped with the solid-state imaging device of the present invention can be used not only for digital cameras and electronic devices having an imaging function (mobile phones, etc.), but also for vehicle-mounted cameras and monitoring cameras.
  • the image display device of the present invention includes the film of the present invention described above.
  • image display devices include liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence display devices.
  • electroluminescence display devices For a definition of an image display device and details of each image display device, see, for example, “Electronic Display Device (by Akio Sasaki, Industrial Research Institute, 1990)", “Display Device (by Junsho Ibuki, Sangyo Tosho ( Co., Ltd.) issued in 1989).
  • Liquid crystal display devices are described, for example, in “Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, published by Kogyo Choukai Co., Ltd., 1994)". There is no particular limitation on the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied.
  • Dye monomers (X-1) to (X-6) were synthesized according to the following scheme.
  • DMF is N,N-dimethylformamide
  • THF is tetrahydrofuran.
  • the dye multimers (S-1) to (S-17) dissolved in 100 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether at 23° C. in an amount of 1.0 g or less.
  • dispersion liquid A mixed liquid obtained by mixing raw materials shown in the table below was mixed and dispersed for 3 hours using a bead mill (zirconia beads with a diameter of 0.1 mm). Then, dispersion treatment was carried out using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) equipped with a decompression mechanism under conditions of a pressure of 2000 kg/cm 2 and a flow rate of 500 g/min. This dispersing treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a dispersion. Numerical values indicating compounding amounts in the following table are parts by mass. In addition, the numerical value of the compounding quantity of a dispersing agent is a numerical value in solid content conversion.
  • PG36 C.I. I. Pigment Green 36 (halogenated phthalocyanine pigment, green pigment)
  • PG58 C.I. I. Pigment Green 58 (halogenated phthalocyanine pigment, green pigment)
  • PG59 C.I. I. Pigment Green 59 (halogenated phthalocyanine pigment, green pigment)
  • PG63 C.I. I. Pigment Green 63 (halogenated phthalocyanine pigment, green pigment)
  • PR254 C.I. I. Pigment Red 254 (diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment, red pigment)
  • PY129 C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129 (azomethine pigment, yellow pigment)
  • PY139 C.I. I.
  • Pigment Yellow 139 isoindoline pigment, yellow pigment
  • PY150 C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150 (azo pigment, yellow pigment)
  • PY155 C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 155 (azo pigment, yellow pigment)
  • PY215 C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 215 (pteridine pigment, yellow pigment)
  • PY185 C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 185 (isoindoline pigment, yellow pigment)
  • PB15:6 C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15:6 (phthalocyanine pigment, blue pigment)
  • pigment multimer S-1 to S-17 the dye multimers S-1 to S-17 described above
  • IR-1 a compound having the following structure (infrared absorber)
  • B-1 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 24,000)
  • B-2 Resin having the following structure (The numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 10,000)
  • a coloring composition was produced by mixing the materials shown in the table below.
  • Dispersions 1 to 53, c1 Dispersions 1 to 53, c1 described above
  • E-1 to E-4 compounds having the following structures E-5: 2,2′,4-tris(2-chlorophenyl)-5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenyl-1,1 '-Biimidazole
  • (alkali-soluble resin) J-1 Resin having the following structure (numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight: 15,000)
  • J-2 Resin having the following structure (numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight: 15,000)
  • J-3 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units.
  • J-4 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units.
  • J-5 Resin having the following structure (numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios
  • J-6 Resin having the following structure (numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios.
  • Weight average molecular weight: 30,000) J-7 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the mass ratio, weight average molecular weight 14600) J-8: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the mass ratio.
  • Weight average molecular weight 10600) J-9 Resin synthesized by the following method A flask equipped with a reflux condenser, a dropping funnel and a stirrer is filled with an appropriate amount of nitrogen to replace the atmosphere with nitrogen, and 371 parts by mass of 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate is added. was heated to 85° C. with stirring.
  • D-1 A compound having the following structure
  • D-2 A mixture of compounds having the following structure (a mixture in which the molar ratio of the left compound (hexafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) and the right compound (pentafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) is 7:3)
  • D-3 A compound having the following structure
  • D-4 Trimethylolpropane ethyleneoxy-modified triacrylate (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., Aronix M-350)
  • D-5 EBECRYL80 (manufactured by Daicel Allnex, amine-containing tetrafunctional acrylate)
  • D-6 ethoxylated dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate
  • F-1 KF-6001 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., silicone surfactant, carbinol-modified polydimethylsiloxane at both ends, hydroxy value 62 mgKOH/g)
  • F-2 A compound having the following structure (weight average molecular weight: 14,000). In the following formulas, % indicating the ratio of repeating units is mol %.
  • F-3 Futergent 208G (manufactured by NEOS, fluorosurfactant)
  • F-4 BYK-330 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie, silicone surfactant)
  • F-5 DOWSIL SH8400 FLUID (manufactured by Dow Toray Industries, Inc., silicone surfactant)
  • G-1 compound having the following structure (ultraviolet absorber)
  • G-2 compound having the following structure (compound having an epoxy group, weight average molecular weight: 3500)
  • G-3 EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation, 1,2-epoxy-4-(2-oxiranyl)cyclohexane adduct of 2,2′-bis(hydroxymethyl)-1-butanol)
  • G-4 A compound having the following structure (silane coupling agent)
  • the film prepared above was irradiated with light of 100,000 Lux for 2,000 hours using a light resistance tester (super xenon weather meter SX75, manufactured by Suga Test Instruments Co., Ltd.) (total irradiation amount: 200 million Lux hr. ).
  • the transmittance of the film after light irradiation was measured, and the light resistance was evaluated according to the following criteria.
  • the integrated transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm after light irradiation is 95% or more and less than 98% of the integrated transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm before light irradiation.
  • C The integrated transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm after light irradiation is 93% or more and less than 95% of the integrated transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm before light irradiation.
  • D The integrated value of the transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm after light irradiation is 90% or more and less than 93% of the integrated value of the transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm before light irradiation.
  • E The integrated value of the transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm after light irradiation is less than 90% of the integrated value of the transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm before light irradiation.
  • the coloring composition described in the above table is applied to a silicon wafer by spin coating, and then heated (pre-baked) at 100° C. for 120 seconds using a hot plate to form a composition layer having a thickness of 1 ⁇ m. bottom.
  • the obtained composition layer was irradiated with light having a wavelength of 365 nm at 1000 mJ/cm 2 through a 2.0 ⁇ m square Bayer pattern mask using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5+ (manufactured by Canon Inc.). was exposed at an exposure dose of Then, the exposed composition layer was puddle-developed at 23° C.
  • the silicon wafer after the paddle development is fixed on a horizontal rotary table by a vacuum chuck method, and while the silicon wafer is rotated at a rotation speed of 50 rpm by a rotating device, pure water is sprayed from above the center of rotation in the form of a shower.
  • Supply and rinse treatment 23 seconds ⁇ 2 times
  • spin drying then heat treatment (post-baking) using a hot plate at 200 ° C. for 300 seconds to form a pattern (pixel) bottom.
  • B The viscosity increase rate of the coloring composition exceeds 5% and is 7.5% or less.
  • C The viscosity increase rate of the coloring composition exceeds 7.5% and is 10% or less.
  • D The viscosity increase rate of the coloring composition exceeds 10%.
  • the colored compositions of Examples were able to form films with excellent light resistance. Furthermore, the colored compositions of Examples were also excellent in storage stability. Furthermore, the use of the coloring composition of the example could suppress the generation of development residue.
  • optical filters By using the films obtained from the colored compositions of Examples 1 to 53, optical filters, solid-state imaging devices, and image display devices with excellent light resistance can be obtained.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides: a coloring composition comprising a dye multimer and a curable compound, the dye multimer including a dye structure having a structure a1, in which aromatic rings having hydroxy groups as substituents are bonded to each other via an azomethine group, or a structure a2, in which the structure a1 is coordinated to a metallic atom; a film; an optical filter; a solid-state imaging device; an image display device; and a dye multimer.

Description

着色組成物、膜、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置および色素多量体Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and dye multimer
 本発明は、着色組成物に関する。また、本発明は、着色組成物を用いた膜、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子および画像表示装置に関する。また、本発明は、色素多量体に関する。 The present invention relates to coloring compositions. The present invention also relates to a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored composition. The present invention also relates to dye multimers.
 近年、デジタルカメラ、カメラ付き携帯電話等の普及から、電荷結合素子(CCD)イメージセンサなどの固体撮像素子の需要が大きく伸びている。ディスプレイや光学素子のキーデバイスとしてカラーフィルタが使用されている。カラーフィルタは、通常、赤、緑及び青の3原色の画素を備えており、透過光を3原色へ分解する役割を果たしている。 In recent years, due to the spread of digital cameras, camera-equipped mobile phones, etc., the demand for solid-state imaging devices such as charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensors has increased significantly. Color filters are used as key devices for displays and optical elements. A color filter usually comprises three primary color pixels of red, green and blue and serves to separate the transmitted light into the three primary colors.
 カラーフィルタの各色の着色画素は、着色剤を含む着色組成物を用いて製造されている。特許文献1には、フタロシアニン系顔料と、アゾメチン銅錯体系顔料とを含有するカラーフィルタ用顔料組成物であって、フタロシアニン系顔料と、アゾメチン銅錯体系顔料との質量比が、99.9/0.1~96.5/3.5であるカラーフィルタ用顔料組成物が記載されている。 The colored pixels of each color of the color filter are manufactured using a coloring composition containing a coloring agent. Patent Document 1 discloses a pigment composition for color filters containing a phthalocyanine-based pigment and an azomethine copper complex-based pigment, wherein the mass ratio of the phthalocyanine-based pigment to the azomethine copper complex-based pigment is 99.9/ A color filter pigment composition is described which is from 0.1 to 96.5/3.5.
国際公開第2019/022051号WO2019/022051
 近年では、着色剤を含む着色組成物を用いて形成される膜について、耐光性の更なる向上が求められている。 In recent years, there has been a demand for further improvement in light resistance of films formed using coloring compositions containing coloring agents.
 ここで、特許文献1では、アゾメチン銅錯体系顔料としてカラーインデックス(C.I.)ピグメントイエロー129が用いられている。C.I.ピグメントイエロー129は、以下に示す構造の化合物である。本発明者の検討によれば、特許文献1の実施例に記載されたアゾメチン銅錯体系顔料を含有する組成物を用いて得られる膜では、耐光性は十分とは言えず、改善の余地があることが分かった。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Here, in Patent Document 1, Color Index (C.I.) Pigment Yellow 129 is used as an azomethine copper complex-based pigment. C. I. Pigment Yellow 129 is a compound having the structure shown below. According to the studies of the present inventors, the film obtained using the composition containing the azomethine copper complex-based pigment described in the examples of Patent Document 1 cannot be said to have sufficient light resistance, and there is room for improvement. It turns out there is.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 よって、本発明の目的は、耐光性に優れた膜を形成できる着色組成物を提供することにある。また、本発明は膜、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置および色素多量体を提供することにある。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a coloring composition capable of forming a film with excellent light resistance. Another object of the present invention is to provide a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a dye multimer.
 本発明者の検討によれば、後述する着色組成物により上記目的を達成できることを見出し、本発明を完成するに至った。よって、本発明は以下を提供する。 According to the studies of the present inventors, the inventors have found that the above-mentioned objects can be achieved with the coloring composition described later, and have completed the present invention. Accordingly, the present invention provides the following.
 <1> 色素多量体と、硬化性化合物とを含む着色組成物であって、
 上記色素多量体は、ヒドロキシ基を置換基として有する芳香族環同士がアゾメチン基を介して結合した構造a1、または、金属原子に上記構造a1が配位した構造a2を有する色素構造を含む、
 着色組成物。
 <2> 上記色素多量体は、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位、式(B)で表される繰り返し単位、および、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を含む色素多量体であるか、または、
 式(D)で表される色素多量体である、
 <1>に記載の着色組成物;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 式(A)中、Aは3価の連結基を表し、
 Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
 DyeIは、上記色素構造を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 式(B)中、Aは3価の連結基を表し、
 Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
 DyeIIは、Yとイオン結合または配位結合可能な基を有する上記色素構造を表し、
 Yは、DyeIIとイオン結合または配位結合可能な基を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 式(C)中、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
 DyeIIIは、上記色素構造を表し、
 mは0または1を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 式(D)中、Lは(n+k)価の連結基を表し、
 nは2~20の整数を表し、
 kは0~20の整数を表し、
 DyeIVは、上記色素構造を表し、
 Pは、置換基を表し、
 n個のDyeIVはそれぞれ異なっていても良く、
 kが2以上の場合、複数のPはそれぞれ異なっていても良く、
 n+kは、2~20の整数を表す。
 <3> 上記式(A)のDyeIが表す色素構造は、式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造であり、
 上記式(B)のDyeIIが表す色素構造は、式(1)で表される構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造であり、
 上記式(C)のDyeIIIが表す色素構造は、式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を2個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を2個取り除いた構造であり、
 上記式(D)のDyeIVが表す色素構造は、式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造である、
 <2>に記載の着色組成物;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 式(1)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 X~Xはそれぞれ独立して窒素原子、CHまたはCRを表し、
 Rは置換基を表し、
 X~Xのうち、隣接する2つがCRである場合、隣接する2つのCRのR同士は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 式(B)のDyeIIの場合は、X~Xの少なくとも1つは、置換基として上記Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する。
 <4> 上記式(1)で表される構造が、式(1-1)で表される構造または式(1-2)で表される構造である、<3>に記載の着色組成物;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 式(1-1)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 X~Xはそれぞれ独立して窒素原子、CHまたはCRを表し、
 Rは置換基を表し、
 X~Xのうち、隣接する2つがCRである場合、隣接する2つのCRのR同士は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 式(B)のDyeIIの場合は、X~Xの少なくとも1つは、置換基として上記Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する;
 ただし、式(1-1)は、以下の要件1~4のいずれかの要件を満たしている;
 要件1 X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRであり、かつ、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成している;
 要件2 XとXがCRであり、かつ、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合してヘテロ環を形成している;
 要件3 X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRであり、かつ、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成している;
 要件4 XおよびXの少なくとも一方がCHであり、かつ、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つがCRである;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 式(1-2)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 R~R11はそれぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、
 R~R11のうち、隣接する2つは結合して環を形成していてもよく、R~R11の少なくとも1つは置換基である;
 ただし、式(B)のDyeIIの場合は、R~R11の少なくとも1つは、置換基として上記Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する。
 <5> 更に、上記色素多量体以外の着色剤を含み、
 上記着色剤は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料を含む、<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <6> <1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物から得られる膜。
 <7> <6>に記載の膜を有する光学フィルタ。
 <8> <6>に記載の膜を有する固体撮像素子。
 <9> <6>に記載の膜を有する画像表示装置。
 <10> ヒドロキシ基を置換基として有する芳香族環同士がアゾメチン基を介して結合した構造a1、または、金属原子に上記構造a1が配位した構造a2を有する色素構造を含む色素多量体であって、
 式(A)で表される繰り返し単位、式(B)で表される繰り返し単位、および、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を含む色素多量体、または、式(D)で表される色素多量体である、色素多量体;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 式(A)中、Aは3価の連結基を表し、
 Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
 DyeIは、式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造の色素構造を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 式(B)中、Aは3価の連結基を表し、
 Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
 DyeIIは、Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する、上記色素構造であって、式(1)で表される構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造の色素構造を表し、
 Yは、DyeIIとイオン結合または配位結合可能な基を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 式(C)中、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
 DyeIIIは、式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を2個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を2個取り除いた構造の色素構造を表し、
 mは0または1を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 式(D)中、Lは(n+k)価の連結基を表し、
 nは2~20の整数を表し、
 kは0~20の整数を表し、
 DyeIVは、式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造の色素構造を表し、
 Pは、置換基を表し、
 n個のDyeIVはそれぞれ異なっていても良く、
 kが2以上の場合、複数のPはそれぞれ異なっていても良く、
 n+kは、2~20の整数を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 式(1)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 X~Xはそれぞれ独立して窒素原子、CHまたはCRを表し、
 Rは置換基を表し、
 X~Xのうち、隣接する2つがCRである場合、隣接する2つのCRのR同士は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 式(B)のDyeIIの場合は、X~Xの少なくとも1つは、置換基として上記Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する。
 <11> 上記式(1)で表される構造が、式(1-1)で表される構造または式(1-2)で表される構造である、<10>に記載の色素多量体;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 式(1-1)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 X~Xはそれぞれ独立して窒素原子、CHまたはCRを表し、
 Rは置換基を表し、
 X~Xのうち、隣接する2つがCRである場合、隣接する2つのCRのR同士は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 式(B)のDyeIIの場合は、X~Xの少なくとも1つは、置換基として上記Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する;
 ただし、式(1-1)は、以下の要件1~4のいずれかの要件を満たしている;
 要件1 X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRであり、かつ、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成している;
 要件2 XとXがCRであり、かつ、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合してヘテロ環を形成している;
 要件3 X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRであり、かつ、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成している;
 要件4 XおよびXの少なくとも一方がCHであり、かつ、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つがCRである;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 式(1-2)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 R~R11はそれぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、
 R~R11のうち、隣接する2つは結合して環を形成していてもよく、R~R11の少なくとも1つは置換基である;
 ただし、式(B)のDyeIIの場合は、R~R11の少なくとも1つは、置換基として上記Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する。
<1> A coloring composition containing a pigment multimer and a curable compound,
The dye multimer has a structure a1 in which aromatic rings having hydroxy groups as substituents are bonded via an azomethine group, or a dye structure having a structure a2 in which the structure a1 is coordinated to a metal atom.
coloring composition.
<2> The dye multimer contains at least one repeating unit selected from repeating units represented by formula (A), repeating units represented by formula (B), and repeating units represented by formula (C). is a dye multimer containing repeating units, or
A dye multimer represented by formula (D),
The coloring composition according to <1>;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
In formula (A), A 1 represents a trivalent linking group,
L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
DyeI represents the above dye structure;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
In formula (B), A 2 represents a trivalent linking group,
L2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
DyeII represents the above dye structure having a group capable of forming an ionic bond or a coordinate bond with Y2,
Y 2 represents a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with DyeII;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
In formula (C), L3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
DyeIII represents the above dye structure,
m represents 0 or 1;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
In formula (D), L 4 represents an (n+k)-valent linking group,
n represents an integer from 2 to 20,
k represents an integer from 0 to 20,
DyeIV represents the above dye structure,
P4 represents a substituent,
Each of n DyeIV may be different,
When k is 2 or more, the plurality of P 4 may be different,
n+k represents an integer from 2 to 20;
<3> The dye structure represented by DyeI of formula (A) is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure represented by formula (1) in a metal atom. A structure in which one hydrogen atom is removed from the coordinated structure,
The dye structure represented by DyeII of the above formula (B) is a structure represented by formula (1) or a structure in which the structure represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom,
The dye structure represented by DyeIII of the above formula (C) is a structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure represented by formula (1) coordinated to a metal atom. A structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the structure,
The dye structure represented by DyeIV of formula (D) is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure represented by formula (1) coordinated to a metal atom. A structure in which one hydrogen atom is removed from the structure,
The coloring composition according to <2>;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
In formula (1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x ,
R x represents a substituent,
When adjacent two of X 2 to X 9 are CR x , R x of two adjacent CR x may combine to form a ring,
In the case of DyeII of formula (B), at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent.
<4> The structure represented by the formula (1) is a structure represented by the formula (1-1) or a structure represented by the formula (1-2), <3> The colored composition according to ;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
In formula (1-1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x ,
R x represents a substituent,
When adjacent two of X 2 to X 9 are CR x , R x of two adjacent CR x may combine to form a ring,
In the case of DyeII of formula (B), at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent;
However, formula (1-1) satisfies any of the following requirements 1 to 4;
Requirement 1 Adjacent two of X 3 to X 5 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring;
Requirement 2 X 2 and X 3 are CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 2 and R x of CR x represented by X 3 combine to form a heterocyclic ring;
Requirement 3 Adjacent two of X 6 to X 9 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring;
Requirement 4 at least one of X 2 and X 3 is CH and at least one of X 2 to X 9 is CR x ;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
In formula (1-2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
R 2 to R 11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent;
Adjacent two of R 2 to R 11 may combine to form a ring, and at least one of R 2 to R 11 is a substituent;
However, in the case of DyeII of formula (B), at least one of R 2 to R 11 has a group capable of ionic or coordinate bonding with Y 2 as a substituent.
<5> Further, including a coloring agent other than the above-mentioned dye multimer,
The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the coloring agent contains a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment.
<6> A film obtained from the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <5>.
<7> An optical filter having the film according to <6>.
<8> A solid-state imaging device having the film according to <6>.
<9> An image display device comprising the film according to <6>.
<10> A dye polymer comprising a dye structure having a structure a1 in which aromatic rings having a hydroxy group as a substituent are bonded to each other through an azomethine group, or a structure a2 in which the structure a1 is coordinated to a metal atom. hand,
A dye multimer containing at least one repeating unit selected from repeating units represented by formula (A), repeating units represented by formula (B), and repeating units represented by formula (C), or , a dye multimer which is a dye multimer represented by the formula (D);
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
In formula (A), A 1 represents a trivalent linking group,
L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
DyeI is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a structure in which the structure represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom represents the dye structure of;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
In formula (B), A 2 represents a trivalent linking group,
L2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
DyeII is the above dye structure having a group capable of forming an ionic bond or a coordinate bond with Y 2 , the structure represented by formula (1), or the structure represented by formula (1) on a metal atom represents the dye structure of the coordinated structure,
Y 2 represents a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with DyeII;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
In formula (C), L3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
DyeIII is a structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a structure in which the structure represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom represents the pigment structure of
m represents 0 or 1;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
In formula (D), L 4 represents an (n+k)-valent linking group,
n represents an integer from 2 to 20,
k represents an integer from 0 to 20,
DyeIV is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a structure in which the structure represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom represents the pigment structure of
P4 represents a substituent,
Each of n DyeIV may be different,
When k is 2 or more, the plurality of P 4 may be different,
n+k represents an integer from 2 to 20;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
In formula (1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x ,
R x represents a substituent,
When adjacent two of X 2 to X 9 are CR x , R x of two adjacent CR x may combine to form a ring,
In the case of DyeII of formula (B), at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent.
<11> The dye multimer according to <10>, wherein the structure represented by formula (1) is a structure represented by formula (1-1) or a structure represented by formula (1-2) ;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
In formula (1-1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x ,
R x represents a substituent,
When adjacent two of X 2 to X 9 are CR x , R x of two adjacent CR x may combine to form a ring,
In the case of DyeII of formula (B), at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent;
However, formula (1-1) satisfies any of the following requirements 1 to 4;
Requirement 1 Adjacent two of X 3 to X 5 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring;
Requirement 2 X 2 and X 3 are CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 2 and R x of CR x represented by X 3 combine to form a heterocyclic ring;
Requirement 3 Adjacent two of X 6 to X 9 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring;
Requirement 4 at least one of X 2 and X 3 is CH and at least one of X 2 to X 9 is CR x ;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
In formula (1-2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
R 2 to R 11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent;
Adjacent two of R 2 to R 11 may combine to form a ring, and at least one of R 2 to R 11 is a substituent;
However, in the case of DyeII of formula (B), at least one of R 2 to R 11 has a group capable of ionic or coordinate bonding with Y 2 as a substituent.
 本発明によれば、耐光性に優れた膜を形成できる着色組成物を提供することができる。また、膜、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置および色素多量体を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a colored composition capable of forming a film with excellent light resistance. Also, a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a dye multimer can be provided.
 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。
 本明細書において、「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基(原子団)と共に置換基を有する基(原子団)をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も露光に含める。また、露光に用いられる光としては、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線または放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
 本明細書において、構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表す。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ)法により測定したポリスチレン換算値である。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、組成物の全成分から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。
 本明細書において、顔料とは、溶剤に対して溶解しにくい化合物を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
The contents of the present invention will be described in detail below.
In the present specification, the term "~" is used to include the numerical values before and after it as lower and upper limits.
In the description of a group (atomic group) in the present specification, a description that does not describe substitution or unsubstituted includes a group (atomic group) having no substituent as well as a group (atomic group) having a substituent. For example, an "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
As used herein, the term "exposure" includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified. Light used for exposure includes actinic rays or radiation such as emission line spectra of mercury lamps, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
In the present specification, "(meth)acrylate" represents both or either acrylate and methacrylate, "(meth)acryl" represents both or either acrylic and methacrylic, and "(meth) ) acryloyl” refers to acryloyl and/or methacryloyl.
In this specification, Me in the structural formulas represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
As used herein, the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight are polystyrene equivalent values measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
As used herein, the term "total solid content" refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent.
As used herein, a pigment means a compound that is difficult to dissolve in a solvent.
As used herein, the term "process" includes not only an independent process, but also when the intended action of the process is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
<着色組成物>
 本発明の着色組成物は、色素多量体と、硬化性化合物とを含む着色組成物であって、
 上記色素多量体は、ヒドロキシ基を置換基として有する芳香族環同士がアゾメチン基を介して結合した構造a1、または、金属原子に前述の構造a1が配位した構造a2を有する色素構造を含むことを特徴とする。
<Coloring composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention is a coloring composition comprising a dye multimer and a curable compound,
The dye multimer contains a dye structure having a structure a1 in which aromatic rings having hydroxyl groups as substituents are bonded to each other via an azomethine group, or a structure a2 in which the structure a1 is coordinated to a metal atom. characterized by
 本発明の着色組成物によれば、耐光性に優れた膜を形成することができる。このような効果が得られる詳細な理由は不明であるが、次によるものであると推測される。本発明の着色組成物に含まれる色素多量体は、ヒドロキシ基を置換基として有する芳香族環同士がアゾメチン基を介して結合した化合物である色素、または、金属原子に前述の化合物(ヒドロキシ基を置換基として有する芳香族環同士がアゾメチン基を介して結合した化合物)が配位した化合物である色素を、多量体化したものである。このような色素を多量体化することによって、ある程度の運動性を有しているため、熱失活しやすくなると推測される。熱失活しやすいほど、励起状態での寿命が短くなるため、耐光性が向上したものと推測される。 According to the coloring composition of the present invention, a film with excellent light resistance can be formed. Although the detailed reason why such an effect is obtained is unknown, it is presumed to be due to the following. The dye multimer contained in the coloring composition of the present invention is a dye that is a compound in which aromatic rings having a hydroxy group as a substituent are bonded via an azomethine group, or the above-mentioned compound (hydroxy group is attached to a metal atom A compound in which aromatic rings having substituents are bonded via an azomethine group) is coordinated to polymerize a dye. It is presumed that by polymerizing such a dye, it has a certain degree of motility, and thus becomes more susceptible to heat inactivation. It is presumed that the easier the thermal deactivation, the shorter the lifetime in the excited state, and thus the improved light resistance.
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、フォトリソグラフィ法でパターン形成して画素を形成した際において、現像残渣の発生を抑制することもできる。 In addition, the coloring composition of the present invention can also suppress the generation of development residues when pixels are formed by patterning by photolithography.
 また、本発明の着色組成物に含まれる色素多量体は、着色組成物中での分散性に優れており、着色組成物中での凝集を抑制することができ、着色組成物の粘度の経時変化などを抑制することもできる。このため、本発明の着色組成物は、保存安定性にも優れている。 Further, the dye multimer contained in the coloring composition of the present invention has excellent dispersibility in the coloring composition, can suppress aggregation in the coloring composition, and the viscosity of the coloring composition changes over time. Change can also be suppressed. Therefore, the coloring composition of the present invention is also excellent in storage stability.
 本発明の着色組成物は、カラーフィルタ用または赤外線透過フィルタ用の着色組成物として好ましく用いられる。より詳しくは、カラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物や、赤外線透過フィルタ形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができ、カラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いられる。画素の種類としては、赤色画素、緑色画素、青色画素、マゼンタ色画素、シアン色画素、黄色画素などが挙げられ、赤色画素、緑色画素および黄色画素であることが好ましく、赤色画素または緑色画素であることがより好ましく、緑色画素であることが更に好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention is preferably used as a coloring composition for color filters or infrared transmission filters. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming color filter pixels or as a coloring composition for forming infrared transmission filters, and is more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming color filter pixels. Pixel types include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and yellow pixels. Red pixels, green pixels, and yellow pixels are preferred. More preferably, it is a green pixel.
 赤外線透過フィルタとしては、波長400~640nmの範囲における透過率の最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)であり、波長1100~1300nmの範囲における透過率の最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)である分光特性を満たしているフィルタなどが好ましく挙げられる。赤外線透過フィルタは、以下の(1)~(5)のいずれかの分光特性を満たしているフィルタであることが好ましい。
 (1):波長400~640nmの範囲における透過率の最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)であり、波長800~1500nmの範囲における透過率の最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)であるフィルタ。
 (2):波長400~750nmの範囲における透過率の最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)であり、波長900~1500nmの範囲における透過率の最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)であるフィルタ。
 (3):波長400~830nmの範囲における透過率の最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)であり、波長1000~1500nmの範囲における透過率の最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)であるフィルタ。
 (4):波長400~950nmの範囲における透過率の最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)であり、波長1100~1500nmの範囲における透過率の最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)であるフィルタ。
 (5):波長400~1050nmの範囲における透過率の最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)であり、波長1200~1500nmの範囲における透過率の最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)であるフィルタ。
As an infrared transmission filter, the maximum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 1100 to 1300 nm. Filters satisfying spectral characteristics with a value of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) are preferred. The infrared transmission filter is preferably a filter that satisfies any one of the following spectral characteristics (1) to (5).
(1): The maximum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 800 to 1500 nm is A filter that is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more).
(2): The maximum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 750 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 900 to 1500 nm is A filter that is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more).
(3): The maximum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 830 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 1000 to 1500 nm is A filter that is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more).
(4): The maximum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 950 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 1100 to 1500 nm is A filter that is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more).
(5): The maximum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 1050 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 1200 to 1500 nm is A filter that is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more).
 本発明の着色組成物を用いて厚さ0.65μmの膜を形成した際に、膜の光透過率が50%となる波長が、470~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、475~520nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましく、480~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが更に好ましい。なかでも、光透過率が50%となる波長が、470~520nmの波長範囲と、575~625nmの波長範囲のそれぞれに存在することが好ましい。この態様において、光透過率が50%となる短波長側の波長は、475~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、480~520nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましい。また、光透過率が50%となる長波長側の波長は、580~620nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、585~615nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましい。このような分光特性を有する膜を形成できる着色組成物は、カラーフィルタの緑色画素形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いられる。 When a film having a thickness of 0.65 μm is formed using the coloring composition of the present invention, the wavelength at which the light transmittance of the film is 50% is preferably present in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm. More preferably in the wavelength range of 520 nm, even more preferably in the wavelength range of 480-520 nm. In particular, it is preferable that the wavelengths at which the light transmittance is 50% exist in both the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm and the wavelength range of 575 to 625 nm. In this embodiment, the wavelength on the short wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% preferably exists in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm. Further, the wavelength on the long wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% preferably exists in the wavelength range of 580 to 620 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 585 to 615 nm. A coloring composition capable of forming a film having such spectral characteristics is preferably used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter.
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、固体撮像素子用として好ましく用いられる。より詳しくは、固体撮像素子に用いられる光学フィルタ用の着色組成物として好ましく用いられ、固体撮像素子に用いられるカラーフィルタ用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いられる。 In addition, the colored composition of the present invention is preferably used for solid-state imaging devices. More specifically, it is preferably used as a coloring composition for optical filters used in solid-state imaging devices, and more preferably used as a coloring composition for color filters used in solid-state imaging devices.
 本発明の着色組成物の固形分濃度は、5~30質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、7.5質量%以上が好ましく、10質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、25質量%以下が好ましく、20質量%以下がより好ましい。 The solid content concentration of the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 30% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 7.5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 25% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less.
 以下、本発明の着色組成物に用いられる各成分について説明する。 Each component used in the coloring composition of the present invention will be described below.
<<色素多量体(特定色素多量体)>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、後述する色素構造(以下、特定色素構造ともいう)を含む色素多量体を含有する。以下、特定色素構造を含む色素多量体のことを、特定色素多量体ともいう。
<<Dye multimer (specific dye multimer)>>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a dye multimer containing a dye structure (hereinafter also referred to as a specific dye structure), which will be described later. Hereinafter, a dye multimer containing a specific dye structure is also referred to as a specific dye multimer.
 なお、本明細書において、色素多量体とは、一分子中に色素構造を2個以上有する化合物のことを意味する。特定色素多量体は、一分子中に、特定色素構造を2個以上有するものであり、3個以上有するものであることが好ましく、4個以上有するものであることが更に好ましい。上限は、特に限定されないが、100以下とすることもできる。 In this specification, the dye multimer means a compound having two or more dye structures in one molecule. The specific dye multimer has two or more specific dye structures in one molecule, preferably three or more, and more preferably four or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but may be 100 or less.
 次に、特定色素多量体が有する特定色素構造について説明する。特定色素多量体は、ヒドロキシ基を置換基として有する芳香族環同士がアゾメチン基を介して結合した構造a1、または、金属原子に前述の構造a1が配位した構造a2を有する色素構造(特定色素構造)を含む。 Next, the specific dye structure possessed by the specific dye multimer will be explained. The specific dye multimer has a structure a1 in which aromatic rings having hydroxyl groups as substituents are bonded to each other through an azomethine group, or a structure a2 in which the structure a1 described above is coordinated to a metal atom (specific dye structure structure).
 上記芳香族環は、芳香族炭化水素環であってもよく、芳香族複素環であってもよい。耐光性、残渣抑制および保存安定性をより向上できるという理由から芳香族炭化水素環であることが好ましい。また、各芳香族環は、ヒドロキシ基以外の置換基をさらに含んでいてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。 The aromatic ring may be an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic heterocyclic ring. An aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferable because it can further improve light resistance, residue suppression and storage stability. Moreover, each aromatic ring may further contain a substituent other than a hydroxy group. Substituents include the substituent T described later.
 上記構造a2において、上記構造a1が配位する金属原子としては、銅原子、亜鉛原子、鉄原子、チタン原子、アルミニウム原子、スズ原子、マグネシウム原子およびクロム原子が挙げられ、銅原子および亜鉛原子であることが好ましく、銅原子であることがより好ましい。金属原子には、配位子が更に配位していてもよい。配位子としてはヘテロ環化合物(例えば、ピリジン、ピリミジン、イミダゾール、ピラゾール、トリアゾール、テトラゾール、キノリン、1,10-フェナントロリン等)、プロトン性化合物(例えば、水、メタノール、エタノール等)、アミン化合物(例えばトリエチルアミン、N,N,N’、N’-テトラメチレンジアミン、エチレンジアミン四酢酸N,N,N’,N’’,N’’-ペンタメチルジエチレントリアミンなど)、アミド化合物(例えば、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチルピロリドン等)、ジメチルスルホキシド、スルホラン、ニトリル化合物(例えばアセトニトリル等)などが挙げられる。 In the above structure a2, the metal atom coordinated by the above structure a1 includes a copper atom, a zinc atom, an iron atom, a titanium atom, an aluminum atom, a tin atom, a magnesium atom and a chromium atom. It is preferably a copper atom, more preferably a copper atom. A ligand may be further coordinated to the metal atom. Ligands include heterocyclic compounds (e.g., pyridine, pyrimidine, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, tetrazole, quinoline, 1,10-phenanthroline, etc.), protic compounds (e.g., water, methanol, ethanol, etc.), amine compounds ( For example, triethylamine, N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenediamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid N,N,N',N'',N''-pentamethyldiethylenetriamine, etc.), amide compounds (for example, N,N- dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, etc.), dimethylsulfoxide, sulfolane, nitrile compounds (eg, acetonitrile, etc.), and the like.
 特定色素構造は、耐光性、残渣抑制および保存安定性をより向上でき、更には、耐熱性も向上させることができるという理由から、上記構造a2を有するものであることが好ましい。 The specific dye structure preferably has the above structure a2 because it can further improve light resistance, residue suppression and storage stability, and further improve heat resistance.
 特定色素構造は、式(1)で表される構造の化合物(以下、化合物A1ともいう)に由来する構造、または、金属原子に化合物A1が配位した化合物(以下、化合物A2ともいう)に由来する構造であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 式(1)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 X~Xはそれぞれ独立して窒素原子、CHまたはCRを表し、
 Rは置換基を表し、
 X~Xのうち、隣接する2つがCRである場合、隣接する2つのCRのR同士は結合して環を形成していてもよい。
The specific dye structure is a structure derived from a compound having a structure represented by formula (1) (hereinafter, also referred to as compound A1), or a compound in which compound A1 is coordinated to a metal atom (hereinafter, also referred to as compound A2). It is preferably a structure derived from
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
In formula (1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x ,
R x represents a substituent,
When two adjacent CR x 's among X 2 to X 9 are CR x's, the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's may combine to form a ring.
 式(1)のRが表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~8が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましく、直鎖状がより好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。
 式(1)のRが表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。
 式(1)のRは水素原子またはアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子であることがより好ましい。
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 1 in formula (1) is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-15, and even more preferably 1-8. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear. The alkyl group may have a substituent. Substituents include the substituent T described later.
The aryl group represented by R 1 in formula (1) preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The aryl group may have a substituent. Substituents include the substituent T described later.
R 1 in formula (1) is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 式(1)のX~Xはそれぞれ独立して窒素原子、CHまたはCRを表し、Rは置換基を表す。Rが表す置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。Rが表す置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、後述する特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。式(1)のX~Xはそれぞれ独立してCHまたはCRであることが好ましい。また、より耐光性に優れた膜を形成することができるという理由から、式(1)のX~Xのうち少なくとも1つはCRであり、Rがヘテロ原子を含む基(好ましくは、後述する特定官能基A)であることも好ましい。 X 2 to X 9 in formula (1) each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x , and R x represents a substituent. Substituents represented by R x include substituents T described later. The substituent represented by R x is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably a specific functional group A described later. Preferably, X 2 to X 9 in formula (1) are each independently CH or CR x . Further, at least one of X 2 to X 9 in formula (1) is CR x , and R x is a group containing a heteroatom (preferably is also preferably a specific functional group A) described later.
 特定官能基Aとしては、ニトロ基、シアノ基、-NR101102、-OR103、-SR104、-COOR105、-OCOR106、-SO107、-SONR108109、-SOOR110、-CONR111112および-NR113COR114が挙げられ、ニトロ基、シアノ基、-NR101102、-OR103、-SR104および-COOR105であることが好ましく、-NR101102および-OR103であることがより好ましい。R101およびR102はそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、R101とR102は結合して環を形成していてもよく、R103~R114はそれぞれ独立して、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。 Specific functional groups A include a nitro group, a cyano group, -NR 101 R 102 , -OR 103 , -SR 104 , -COOR 105 , -OCOR 106 , -SO 2 R 107 , -SO 2 NR 108 R 109 , - SO 2 OR 110 , —CONR 111 R 112 and —NR 113 COR 114 , preferably a nitro group, a cyano group, —NR 101 R 102 , —OR 103 , —SR 104 and —COOR 105 , — NR 101 R 102 and -OR 103 are more preferred. R 101 and R 102 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, R 101 and R 102 may combine to form a ring, and R 103 to R 114 each independently , represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
 R101~R114が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましく、1または2であることが特に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましく、直鎖状がより好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。R101~R114が表すアルキル基は、メチル基またはエチル基であることが好ましい。
 R101~R114が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 101 to R 114 is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, still more preferably 1-3, and particularly preferably 1 or 2. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear. The alkyl group may have a substituent. Substituents include the substituent T described later. The alkyl groups represented by R 101 to R 114 are preferably methyl groups or ethyl groups.
The aryl group represented by R 101 to R 114 preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The aryl group may have a substituent. Substituents include the substituent T described later.
 R101およびR102はそれぞれ独立して、水素原子またはアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子、メチル基またはエチル基であることがより好ましい。R103~R114はそれぞれ独立して、アルキル基であることが好ましく、メチル基またはエチル基であることがより好ましい。 R 101 and R 102 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or an ethyl group. R 103 to R 114 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, more preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.
 式(1)のX~Xのうち、隣接する2つがCRである場合、隣接する2つのCRのR同士は結合して環を形成していてもよい。形成される環は、炭化水素環であってもよく、ヘテロ環であってもよい。また、炭化水素環は脂肪族炭化水素環であってもよく、芳香族炭化水素環であってもよい。ヘテロ環に含まれるヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、硫黄原子および酸素原子が挙げられる。ヘテロ環は5員環または6員環であることが好ましい。形成される環の具体例としては、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環などの炭化水素環、ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、ピリジン環、イミダゾール環、ピラゾ―ル環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、イミダゾリン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環、インドール環、イソインドール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ベンゾオキサゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、ベンゾトリアゾール環、プリン環、キノリン環、イソキノリン環、キナゾリン環、キノキサリン環、シンノリン環、プテリジン環、ピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、テトラヒドロフラン環、テトラヒドロピラン環、テトラヒドロチオフェン環、テトラヒドロチオピラン環などのヘテロ環が挙げられる。上記形成される環は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 When adjacent two of X 2 to X 9 in formula (1) are CR x , the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's may combine to form a ring. The ring formed may be a hydrocarbon ring or a hetero ring. Further, the hydrocarbon ring may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic hydrocarbon ring. Heteroatoms contained in the heterocycle include nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen atoms. The heterocycle is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. Specific examples of the ring to be formed include a benzene ring, a hydrocarbon ring such as a naphthalene ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a pyridine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, an imidazoline ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, indole ring, isoindole ring, benzimidazole ring, benzoxazole ring, benzothiazole ring, benzotriazole ring, purine ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, quinazoline ring, quinoxaline ring, cinnoline ring, Heterocycles such as pteridine ring, pyrrolidine ring, piperidine ring, tetrahydrofuran ring, tetrahydropyran ring, tetrahydrothiophene ring, and tetrahydrothiopyran ring are included. The ring thus formed may further have a substituent. Substituents include the substituent T described later. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 上述した置換基Tとして、次の基が挙げられる。ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子)、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキル基)、アルケニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルケニル基)、アルキニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルキニル基)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリール基)、ヘテロ環基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロ環基)、アミノ基(好ましくは炭素数0~30のアミノ基)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルコキシ基)、アリールオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールオキシ基)、ヘテロ環オキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロ環オキシ基)、アシル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアシル基)、アルコキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルコキシカルボニル基)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数7~30のアリールオキシカルボニル基)、ヘテロ環オキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のヘテロ環オキシカルボニル基)、アシルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアシルオキシ基)、アシルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアシルアミノ基)、アミノカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアミノカルボニルアミノ基)、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルコキシカルボニルアミノ基)、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数7~30のアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基)、スルファモイル基(好ましくは炭素数0~30のスルファモイル基)、スルファモイルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数0~30のスルファモイルアミノ基)、カルバモイル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のカルバモイル基)、アルキルチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキルチオ基)、アリールチオ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールチオ基)、ヘテロ環チオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロ環チオ基)、アルキルスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキルスルホニル基)、アルキルスルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキルスルホニルアミノ基)、アリールスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールスルホニル基)、アリールスルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールスルホニルアミノ基)、ヘテロ環スルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロ環スルホニル基)、ヘテロ環スルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロ環スルホニルアミノ基)、アルキルスルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキルスルフィニル基)、アリールスルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールスルフィニル基)、ヘテロ環スルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロ環スルフィニル基)、ウレイド基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のウレイド基)、ヒドロキシ基、ニトロ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基、カルボン酸アミド基、スルホン酸アミド基、イミド基、ホスフィノ基、メルカプト基、シアノ基、アルキルスルフィノ基、アリールスルフィノ基、アリールアゾ基、ヘテロ環アゾ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基、シリル基、ヒドラジノ基、イミノ基。これらの基は、更に置換可能な基である場合、更に置換基を有してもよい。 Examples of the above-mentioned substituent T include the following groups. Halogen atom (e.g., fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom), alkyl group (preferably alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), alkenyl group (preferably alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), alkynyl group (preferably an alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), a heterocyclic group (preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), an amino group (preferably amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms), alkoxy group (preferably alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), aryloxy group (preferably aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), heterocyclic oxy group (preferably carbon 1 to 30 heterocyclic oxy groups), acyl groups (preferably acyl groups having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), alkoxycarbonyl groups (preferably alkoxycarbonyl groups having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), aryloxycarbonyl groups (preferably aryloxycarbonyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms), heterocyclicoxycarbonyl group (preferably heterocyclicoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), acyloxy group (preferably acyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), acylamino group (preferably acylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), aminocarbonylamino group (preferably aminocarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), alkoxycarbonylamino group (preferably alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms) , aryloxycarbonylamino group (preferably aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms), sulfamoyl group (preferably sulfamoyl group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms), sulfamoylamino group (preferably 0 to 30 carbon atoms sulfamoylamino group), carbamoyl group (preferably carbamoyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), alkylthio group (preferably alkylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), arylthio group (preferably arylthio group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms) group), heterocyclicthio group (preferably heterocyclicthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), alkylsulfonyl group (preferably alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), alkylsulfonylamino group (preferably having 1 to 30 alkylsulfonylamino groups), arylsulfonyl groups (preferably arylsulfonyl groups having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), arylsulfonylamino groups (preferably arylsulfonylamino groups having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), heterocyclic sulfonyl groups (preferably is a C1-C30 heterocyclic sulfonyl group), a heterocyclic sulfonylamino group (preferably a heterocyclic sulfonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), an alkylsulfinyl group (preferably an alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), an arylsulfinyl group (preferably a arylsulfinyl group of 6 to 30), heterocyclic sulfinyl group (preferably heterocyclic sulfinyl group of 1 to 30 carbon atoms), ureido group (preferably ureido group of 1 to 30 carbon atoms), hydroxy group, nitro group, carboxy group, sulfo group, phosphoric acid group, carboxylic acid amide group, sulfonic acid amide group, imide group, phosphino group, mercapto group, cyano group, alkylsulfino group, arylsulfino group, arylazo group, heterocyclic azo group, phosphinyl group, phosphinyloxy group, phosphinylamino group, silyl group, hydrazino group, imino group. These groups may further have substituents if they are substitutable groups.
 化合物A1は、式(1-1)で表される化合物または式(1-2)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 式(1-1)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 X~Xはそれぞれ独立して窒素原子、CHまたはCRを表し、
 Rは置換基を表し、
 X~Xのうち、隣接する2つがCRである場合、隣接する2つのCRのR同士は結合して環を形成していてもよい。
 ただし、式(1-1)は、以下の要件1~4のいずれかの要件を満たしている。
 要件1 X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRであり、かつ、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成している;
 要件2 XとXがCRであり、かつ、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合してヘテロ環を形成している;
 要件3 X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRであり、かつ、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成している;
 要件4 XおよびXの少なくとも一方がCHであり、かつ、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つがCRである。
Compound A1 is preferably a compound represented by formula (1-1) or a compound represented by formula (1-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
In formula (1-1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x ,
R x represents a substituent,
When two adjacent CR x 's among X 2 to X 9 are CR x's, the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's may combine to form a ring.
However, formula (1-1) satisfies any one of requirements 1 to 4 below.
Requirement 1 Adjacent two of X 3 to X 5 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring;
Requirement 2 X 2 and X 3 are CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 2 and R x of CR x represented by X 3 combine to form a heterocyclic ring;
Requirement 3 Adjacent two of X 6 to X 9 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring;
Requirement 4 At least one of X 2 and X 3 is CH, and at least one of X 2 to X 9 is CR x .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 式(1-2)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 R~R11はそれぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、
 R~R11のうち、隣接する2つは結合して環を形成していてもよく、R~R11の少なくとも1つは置換基である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
In formula (1-2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
R 2 to R 11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent;
Adjacent two of R 2 to R 11 may combine to form a ring, and at least one of R 2 to R 11 is a substituent.
 まず、式(1-1)で表される化合物について説明する。
 式(1-1)のRは、式(1)のRと同義である。また、式(1-1)のX~Xの詳細は、式(1)のX~Xと同様である。ただし、式(1-1)は、上述した要件1~4のいずれかの要件を満たしている。
First, the compound represented by formula (1-1) will be described.
R 1 in formula (1-1) has the same definition as R 1 in formula (1). Further, details of X 2 to X 9 in formula (1-1) are the same as X 2 to X 9 in formula (1). However, formula (1-1) satisfies any one of requirements 1 to 4 described above.
 要件1は、X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRであり、かつ、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成していることである。R同士が結合して形成される環としては、上述した環が挙げられ、ベンゼン環またはナフタレン環であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環であることがより好ましい。R同士が結合して形成される環は更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 Requirement 1 is that adjacent two of X 3 to X 5 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed by bonding R x together include the rings described above, preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring. The ring formed by combining R x may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 要件1の具体例としては、XとXがそれぞれ独立してCRで、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合して環を形成している態様、XとXがそれぞれ独立してCRで、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合して環を形成している態様が挙げられる。 As a specific example of Requirement 1, X 3 and X 4 are each independently CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 3 and R x of CR x represented by X 4 combine to form a ring and X 4 and X 5 are each independently CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 4 and R x of CR x represented by X 5 combine to form a ring. aspects.
 要件1において、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つがCRで、Rがヘテロ原子を含む基(好ましくは、上述した特定官能基A)であることも好ましい。 In Requirement 1, it is also preferred that at least one of X 6 to X 9 is CR x and R x is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably, the specific functional group A described above).
 要件2は、XとXがCRであり、かつ、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合してヘテロ環を形成していることである。R同士が結合して形成されるヘテロ環としては、上述したヘテロ環が挙げられる。R同士が結合して形成されるヘテロ環は更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 Requirement 2 is that X 2 and X 3 are CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 2 and R x of CR x represented by X 3 combine to form a heterocyclic ring. is. The heterocycles formed by combining R x include the heterocycles described above. The hetero ring formed by combining R x may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 要件2において、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つがCRで、Rがヘテロ原子を含む基(好ましくは上述した特定官能基A)であることも好ましい。 In Requirement 2, it is also preferred that at least one of X 6 to X 9 is CR x and R x is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably the specific functional group A described above).
 要件3は、X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRであり、かつ、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成していることである。R同士が結合して形成される環としては、上述した環が挙げられ、ベンゼン環またはナフタレン環であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環であることがより好ましい。R同士が結合して形成される環は更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 Requirement 3 is that adjacent two of X 6 to X 9 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed by bonding R x together include the rings described above, preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring. The ring formed by combining R x may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 要件3の具体例としては、XとXがそれぞれ独立してCRで、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合して環を形成している態様、XとXがそれぞれ独立してCRで、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合して環を形成している態様、XとXがそれぞれ独立してCRで、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合して環を形成している態様が挙げられ、より耐光性に優れた膜を形成できるという理由から、XとXがそれぞれ独立してCRで、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合して環を形成している態様、または、XとXがそれぞれ独立してCRで、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合して環を形成している態様であることが好ましく、XとXがそれぞれ独立してCRで、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合して環を形成している態様であることがより好ましい。 As a specific example of requirement 3, X 6 and X 7 are each independently CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 6 and R x of CR x represented by X 7 combine to form a ring and X 7 and X 8 are each independently CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 7 and R x of CR x represented by X 8 combine to form a ring. Examples include embodiments in which X 8 and X 9 are each independently CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 8 and R x of CR x represented by X 9 combine to form a ring. X 6 and X 7 are each independently CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 6 and R x of CR x represented by X 7 can be formed. are combined to form a ring, or X 7 and X 8 are each independently CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 7 and R x of CR x represented by X 8 are preferably bonded to form a ring, X 7 and X 8 are each independently CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 7 and R of CR x represented by X 8 It is more preferable that x is bonded to form a ring.
 要件3において、X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRである場合、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成していてもよい。R同士が結合して形成される環としては、上述した環が挙げられ、ベンゼン環またはナフタレン環であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環であることがより好ましい。R同士が結合して形成される環は更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 In Requirement 3, when adjacent two of X 2 to X 5 are CR x , the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's may combine to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed by bonding R x together include the rings described above, preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring. The ring formed by combining R x may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 要件3において、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つがCRで、Rがヘテロ原子を含む基(好ましくは上述した特定官能基A)であることも好ましい。 In Requirement 3, it is also preferred that at least one of X 2 to X 5 is CR x and R x is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably the specific functional group A described above).
 要件4は、XおよびXの少なくとも一方がCHであり、かつ、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つがCRであることである。Rは置換基を表す。要件4においては、X~Xの1~4個がCRであることが好ましく、1または2個がCRであることがより好ましい。Rが表す置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 Requirement 4 is that at least one of X 2 and X 3 is CH, and at least one of X 2 to X 9 is CR x . R x represents a substituent. In Requirement 4, 1 to 4 of X 2 to X 9 are preferably CR x , more preferably 1 or 2 are CR x . Examples of the substituent represented by R x include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 式(1-1)で表される化合物は、上述した要件1、要件3または要件4のいずれかの要件を満たしていることが好ましく、要件3または要件4を満たしていることがより好ましく、要件3を満たしていることが更に好ましい。 The compound represented by formula (1-1) preferably satisfies any one of requirements 1, 3 or 4 described above, more preferably satisfies requirement 3 or requirement 4, It is more preferable that Requirement 3 is satisfied.
 式(1-1)で表される化合物は、式(1-1-1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
 式(1-1-1)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 Rx2~Rx9はそれぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、
 Rx2~Rx9のうち、隣接する2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 ただし、式(1-1-1)は、以下の要件1a~4aのいずれかの要件を満たしている;
 要件1a Rx3~Rx5のうち隣接する2つが結合して環を形成している;
 要件2a Rx2とRx3とが結合してヘテロ環を形成している;
 要件3a Rx6~Rx9のうち隣接する2つが結合して環を形成している;
 要件4a Rx2およびRx3の少なくとも一方が水素原子で、かつ、Rx2~Rx9のうち少なくとも1つが置換基である。
The compound represented by formula (1-1) is preferably a compound represented by formula (1-1-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
In formula (1-1-1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
R x2 to R x9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent;
adjacent two of R x2 to R x9 may combine to form a ring;
However, formula (1-1-1) satisfies any of the following requirements 1a to 4a;
Requirement 1a Adjacent two of R x3 to R x5 are bonded to form a ring;
Requirement 2a R x2 and R x3 combine to form a heterocycle;
Requirement 3a adjacent two of R x6 to R x9 are bonded to form a ring;
Requirement 4a At least one of R x2 and R x3 is a hydrogen atom, and at least one of R x2 to R x9 is a substituent.
 式(1-1-1)のRは、式(1)のRと同義である。 R 1 in formula (1-1-1) has the same definition as R 1 in formula (1).
 式(1-1-1)のRx2~Rx9が表す置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられ、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 Examples of substituents represented by R x2 to R x9 in formula (1-1-1) include the above-described substituent T, preferably a group containing a hetero atom, and the above-described specific functional group A. is more preferred.
 式(1-1-1)において、Rx2~Rx9のうち、隣接する2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい。形成される環としては、上述した環が挙げられる。上記形成される環は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 In formula (1-1-1), adjacent two of R x2 to R x9 may combine to form a ring. The ring to be formed includes the rings described above. The ring thus formed may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 式(1-1-1)は、上述した要件1a~4aのいずれかの要件を満たしている。 Formula (1-1-1) satisfies any one of the requirements 1a to 4a described above.
 要件1aは、Rx3~Rx5のうち隣接する2つが結合して環を形成していることである。形成される環としては、上述した環が挙げられ、ベンゼン環またはナフタレン環であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環であることがより好ましい。上記形成される環は更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 Requirement 1a is that adjacent two of R x3 to R x5 are bonded to form a ring. The ring to be formed includes the rings described above, preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring. The ring formed above may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 要件1aの具体例としては、Rx3とRx4とが結合して環を形成している態様、Rx4とRx5とが結合して環を形成している態様が挙げられる。 Specific examples of requirement 1a include an embodiment in which R x3 and R x4 are bonded to form a ring, and an embodiment in which R x4 and R x5 are bonded to form a ring.
 要件1aにおいて、Rx6~Rx9のうち少なくとも1つがヘテロ原子を含む基(好ましくは、上述した特定官能基A)であることも好ましい。 In Requirement 1a, it is also preferred that at least one of R x6 to R x9 is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably the specific functional group A described above).
 要件2aは、Rx2とRx3とが結合してヘテロ環を形成していることである。形成されるヘテロ環としては、上述したヘテロ環が挙げられる。上記形成されるヘテロ環は更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 Requirement 2a is that R x2 and R x3 combine to form a heterocyclic ring. The heterocycles formed include the heterocycles described above. The hetero ring formed above may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 要件2aにおいて、Rx6~Rx9のうち少なくとも1つがヘテロ原子を含む基(好ましくは、上述した特定官能基A)であることも好ましい。 In Requirement 2a, it is also preferred that at least one of R x6 to R x9 is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably the specific functional group A described above).
 要件3aは、Rx6~Rx9のうち隣接する2つが結合して環を形成していることである。形成される環としては、上述した環が挙げられ、ベンゼン環またはナフタレン環であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環であることがより好ましい。上記形成される環は更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 Requirement 3a is that adjacent two of R x6 to R x9 are bonded to form a ring. The ring to be formed includes the rings described above, preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring. The ring formed above may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 要件3aの具体例としては、Rx6とRx7とが結合して環を形成している態様、Rx7とRx8とが結合して環を形成している態様、Rx8とRx9とが結合して環を形成している態様が挙げられ、より耐光性に優れた膜を形成できるという理由から、Rx6とRx7とが結合して環を形成している態様、または、Rx7とRx8とが結合して環を形成している態様であることが好ましく、Rx7とRx8とが結合して環を形成している態様であることがより好ましい。 Specific examples of requirement 3a include an aspect in which R x6 and R x7 are bonded to form a ring, an aspect in which R x7 and R x8 are bonded to form a ring, and R x8 and R x9 is bonded to form a ring, and since it is possible to form a film with more excellent light resistance, an embodiment in which R x6 and R x7 are bonded to form a ring, or R The embodiment in which x7 and R x8 are bonded to form a ring is preferable, and the embodiment in which R x7 and R x8 are bonded to form a ring is more preferable.
 要件3aにおいて、Rx2~Rx5のうち隣接する2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい。上記形成される環としては、上述した環が挙げられ、ベンゼン環またはナフタレン環であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環であることがより好ましい。上記形成される環は更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 In requirement 3a, adjacent two of R x2 to R x5 may combine to form a ring. The ring to be formed includes the rings described above, preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring. The ring formed above may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 要件3aにおいて、Rx2~Rx5のうち少なくとも1つがヘテロ原子を含む基(好ましくは、上述した特定官能基A)であることも好ましい。 In Requirement 3a, it is also preferred that at least one of R x2 to R x5 is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably the specific functional group A described above).
 要件4aは、Rx2およびRx3の少なくとも一方が水素原子で、かつ、Rx2~Rx9のうち少なくとも1つが置換基であることである。要件4aにおいては、Rx2~Rx9の1~4個が置換基であることが好ましく、1または2個が置換基であることがより好ましい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 Requirement 4a is that at least one of R x2 and R x3 is a hydrogen atom, and at least one of R x2 to R x9 is a substituent. In Requirement 4a, 1 to 4 of R x2 to R x9 are preferably substituents, and more preferably 1 or 2 are substituents. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 式(1-1-1)は、上述した要件1a、要件3aまたは要件4aのいずれかの要件を満たしていることが好ましく、要件3aまたは要件4aを満たしていることがより好ましく、要件3aを満たしていることが更に好ましい。 Formula (1-1-1) preferably satisfies any of the requirements 1a, 3a or 4a described above, more preferably satisfies requirement 3a or requirement 4a, and satisfies requirement 3a More preferably.
 次に、式(1-2)で表される化合物について説明する。
 式(1-2)のRは、式(1)のRと同義である。
 式(1-2)のR~R11が表す置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。
Next, the compound represented by formula (1-2) will be described.
R 1 in formula (1-2) has the same definition as R 1 in formula (1).
Examples of the substituent represented by R 2 to R 11 in formula (1-2) include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 式(1-2)において、R~R11のうち、隣接する2つは結合して環を形成していてもよい。形成される環としては、上述した環が挙げられる。上記形成される環は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tが挙げられる。置換基は、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。 In formula (1-2), adjacent two of R 2 to R 11 may combine to form a ring. The ring to be formed includes the rings described above. The ring thus formed may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described above. The substituent is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, more preferably the specific functional group A described above.
 式(1-2)のR~R11の少なくとも1つは置換基であり、より耐光性に優れた膜を形成することができるという理由から、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。
 また、式(1-2)のR~R11のうち1~4個(より好ましくは1または2つ、更に好ましくは1つ)が置換基であることが好ましく、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。
 また、より耐光性に優れた膜を形成することができるという理由から、式(1-2)のR、R、R、R、RおよびR10の少なくとも1つ(好ましくは、RおよびR10の少なくとも1つ、より好ましくはR)は置換基であることが好ましく、ヘテロ原子を含む基であることが好ましく、上述した特定官能基Aであることがより好ましい。なかでも、より耐光性に優れた膜を形成することができるという理由から、式(1-2)のR、R、R、R、RおよびR10の少なくとも1つ(好ましくは、RおよびR10の少なくとも1つ、より好ましくはR)がヘテロ原子を含む基(好ましくは上述した特定官能基A)であり、残りが水素原子であることが好ましい。
At least one of R 2 to R 11 in formula (1-2) is a substituent, and is preferably a group containing a heteroatom, since a film having more excellent light resistance can be formed. More preferably, it is the specific functional group A described above.
Further, 1 to 4 (more preferably 1 or 2, still more preferably 1) of R 2 to R 11 in formula (1-2) are preferably substituents, and are groups containing heteroatoms. It is preferable that there is, and it is more preferable that it is the specific functional group A described above.
In addition, at least one of R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 9 and R 10 in formula (1-2) (preferably , R 9 and R 10 , more preferably R 9 ) is preferably a substituent, preferably a group containing a heteroatom, and more preferably a specific functional group A described above. Among them, at least one of R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 9 and R 10 in formula (1-2) (preferably It is preferred that at least one of R 9 and R 10 , more preferably R 9 ) is a heteroatom-containing group (preferably the above-described specific functional group A), and the rest are hydrogen atoms.
 化合物A2において、化合物A1が配位する金属原子としては、銅原子、亜鉛原子、鉄原子、チタン原子、アルミニウム原子、錫原子、マグネシウム原子、クロム原子、カルシウム原子およびケイ素原子が挙げられ、銅原子および亜鉛原子であることが好ましく、銅原子であることがより好ましい。また、金属原子には配位子が更に配位していてもよい。配位子としてはヘテロ環化合物(例えば、ピリジン、ピリミジン、イミダゾール、ピラゾール、トリアゾール、テトラゾール、キノリン、1,10-フェナントロリン等)、プロトン性化合物(例えば、水、メタノール、エタノール等)、アミン化合物(例えばトリエチルアミン、N,N,N’、N’-テトラメチレンジアミン、エチレンジアミン四酢酸N,N,N’,N’’,N’’-ペンタメチルジエチレントリアミンなど)、アミド化合物(例えば、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチルピロリドン等)、ジメチルスルホキシド、スルホラン、ニトリル化合物(例えばアセトニトリル等)などが挙げられる。化合物A2の一例としては、式(A2-1)で表される化合物、式(A2-2)で表される化合物、式(A2-3)で表される化合物および式(A2-4)で表される化合物などが挙げられる。以下の式中、M~Mは、それぞれ独立して金属原子を表す。また、化合物A2は、金属原子に対し配位子が1:3の比で配位している化合物、金属原子に対し配位子が1:4の比で配位している化合物、金属原子に対し配位子が2:3の比で配位している化合物、金属原子に対し配位子が3:3の比で配位している化合物であってもよい。また、金属原子から配位子の一部が解離していたり、配位子以外の化合物が金属原子に配位していてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
In compound A2, the metal atom to which compound A1 is coordinated includes a copper atom, a zinc atom, an iron atom, a titanium atom, an aluminum atom, a tin atom, a magnesium atom, a chromium atom, a calcium atom and a silicon atom. and a zinc atom, more preferably a copper atom. In addition, a ligand may be further coordinated to the metal atom. Ligands include heterocyclic compounds (e.g., pyridine, pyrimidine, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, tetrazole, quinoline, 1,10-phenanthroline, etc.), protic compounds (e.g., water, methanol, ethanol, etc.), amine compounds ( For example, triethylamine, N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenediamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid N,N,N',N'',N''-pentamethyldiethylenetriamine, etc.), amide compounds (for example, N,N- dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, etc.), dimethylsulfoxide, sulfolane, nitrile compounds (eg, acetonitrile, etc.), and the like. Examples of compound A2 include a compound represented by formula (A2-1), a compound represented by formula (A2-2), a compound represented by formula (A2-3), and a compound represented by formula (A2-4). and the compounds represented. In the following formulas, M 1 to M 5 each independently represent a metal atom. Compound A2 is a compound in which a ligand is coordinated to a metal atom at a ratio of 1:3, a compound in which a ligand is coordinated to a metal atom at a ratio of 1:4, a metal atom A compound in which the ligand is coordinated to the metal atom in a ratio of 2:3 and a compound in which the ligand is coordinated to the metal atom in a ratio of 3:3 may be used. Also, a part of the ligand may be dissociated from the metal atom, or a compound other than the ligand may be coordinated to the metal atom.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 特定色素多量体は、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位、式(B)で表される繰り返し単位、および、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を含む色素多量体であるか、または、式(D)で表される色素多量体であることが好ましい。 The specific dye multimer has at least one repeating unit selected from repeating units represented by the formula (A), repeating units represented by the formula (B), and repeating units represented by the formula (C). or a dye multimer represented by the formula (D).
 以下、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位を有する色素多量体を、色素多量体(A)ともいう。また、式(B)で表される繰り返し単位を有する色素多量体を、色素多量体(B)ともいう。式(C)で表される繰り返し単位を有する色素多量体を、色素多量体(C)ともいう。また、式(D)で表される色素多量体を色素多量体(D)ともいう。 Hereinafter, a dye multimer having a repeating unit represented by formula (A) is also referred to as a dye multimer (A). A dye multimer having a repeating unit represented by formula (B) is also referred to as a dye multimer (B). A dye multimer having a repeating unit represented by formula (C) is also referred to as a dye multimer (C). Moreover, the dye multimer represented by Formula (D) is also called dye multimer (D).
(色素多量体(A))
 色素多量体(A)は、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位を含む。色素多量体(A)は、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位の割合が、特定色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の20~100質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、25質量%以上が好ましく、30質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、90質量%以下が好ましく、80質量%以下がより好ましい。
(Pigment multimer (A))
Pigment multimer (A) contains a repeating unit represented by Formula (A). In the dye multimer (A), the proportion of repeating units represented by formula (A) is preferably 20 to 100% by mass of all repeating units constituting the specific dye multimer. The lower limit is preferably 25% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 90% by mass or less, more preferably 80% by mass or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
 式(A)中、Aは3価の連結基を表し、
 Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
 DyeIは、色素構造を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
In formula (A), A 1 represents a trivalent linking group,
L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
DyeI represents the dye structure.
 式(A)のAが表す3価の連結基としては、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリアルキレンイミン系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ポリウレタン系連結基、ポリウレア系連結基、ポリアミド系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリスチレン系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基、ノボラック系連結基などが挙げられ、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基であることが好ましい。 The trivalent linking group represented by A 1 of the formula (A) includes a poly(meth)acrylic linking group, a polyalkyleneimine linking group, a polyester linking group, a polyurethane linking group, a polyurea linking group, and a polyamide linking group. A linking group, a polyether-based linking group, a polystyrene-based linking group, a bisphenol-based linking group, a novolak-based linking group and the like can be mentioned, and a poly(meth)acrylic-based linking group is preferred.
 式(A)のLは単結合または2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、ヘテロ環基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-COO-、-NR-、-CONR-、-OCO-、-SO-、-SO-およびこれらを2個以上連結して形成される連結基が挙げられる。ここで、Rは、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を表す。 L1 in formula (A) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group, -CH=CH-, -O-, -S-, -C(=O)-, -COO-, -NR-, -CONR -, -OCO-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, and linking groups formed by linking two or more of these. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
 アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましい。上限は、25以下がより好ましく、20以下が更に好ましい。下限は、2以上がより好ましく、3以上が更に好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。
 アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。アリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。
 ヘテロ環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロ環基が有するヘテロ原子は、酸素原子、窒素原子および硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロ環基が有するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3個が好ましい。ヘテロ環基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。
The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 1-30. The upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, even more preferably 20 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
The arylene group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The arylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. The heteroatom possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3. The heterocyclic group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
 式(A)のDyeIが表す色素構造は、上述した化合物A1から水素原子を1個取り除いた残基、または、上述した化合物A2から水素原子を1個取り除いた残基であることが好ましい。より具体的には、上述した式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に上述した式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造であることが好ましい。また、式(1)で表される構造は、上述した式(1-1)で表される構造または上述した式(1-2)で表される構造であることが好ましい。なお、DyeIが表す色素構造が上述した式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に上述した式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造である場合の特定色素多量体は、本発明の色素多量体でもある。 The dye structure represented by DyeI of formula (A) is preferably a residue obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from compound A1 described above, or a residue obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from compound A2 described above. More specifically, hydrogen A structure in which one atom is removed is preferable. The structure represented by formula (1) is preferably the structure represented by formula (1-1) described above or the structure represented by formula (1-2) described above. The dye structure represented by DyeI is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by the above formula (1), or a structure in which the structure represented by the above formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom. The specific dye multimer having a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from is also the dye multimer of the present invention.
 式(A)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、以下が挙げられる。以下に示す構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Acはアセチル基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (A) include the following. In the structural formulas shown below, Me represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, and Ac represents an acetyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 色素多量体(A)は、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位の他に、他の繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。他の繰り返し単位は、架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位、酸基を有する繰り返し単位等が挙げられる。架橋性基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などのエチレン性不飽和結合含有基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基等の環状エーテル基などが挙げられる。酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基などが挙げられる。 The dye multimer (A) may contain other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit represented by formula (A). Other repeating units include repeating units having a crosslinkable group, repeating units having an acid group, and the like. Examples of crosslinkable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups such as vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups and (meth)acryloyl groups, and cyclic ether groups such as epoxy groups and oxetanyl groups. A carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, etc. are mentioned as an acid group.
 架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、色素多量体(A)を構成する全繰り返し単位の35質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、25質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、3質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。 The proportion of repeating units having a crosslinkable group is preferably 35% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less, and 25% by mass or less of all repeating units constituting the dye multimer (A). It is even more preferable to have The lower limit is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more.
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、色素多量体(A)を構成する全繰り返し単位の25質量%以下であることが好ましく、20質量%以下であることがより好ましく、15質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、3質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。 The proportion of repeating units having an acid group is preferably 25% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and 15% by mass or less of all repeating units constituting the dye multimer (A). is more preferred. The lower limit is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more.
 色素多量体(A)の具体例としては、後述する実施例に記載の色素多量体(S-1)、(S-2)、(S-5)、(S-9)~(S-14)、(S-16)などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the dye multimer (A) include dye multimers (S-1), (S-2), (S-5), (S-9) to (S-14) described in the examples below. ), (S-16) and the like.
(色素多量体(B))
 色素多量体(B)は、式(B)で表される繰り返し単位を含む。色素多量体(B)は、式(B)で表される繰り返し単位の割合が、特定色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の20~100質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、25質量%以上が好ましく、30質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、95質量%以下が好ましく、90質量%以下がより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 式(B)中、Aは3価の連結基を表し、
 Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
 DyeIIは、Yとイオン結合または結合可能な基を有する色素構造を表し、
 Yは、DyeIIとイオン結合または配位結合可能な基を表す。
(Pigment multimer (B))
Pigment multimer (B) contains a repeating unit represented by Formula (B). In the dye multimer (B), the proportion of the repeating unit represented by formula (B) is preferably 20 to 100% by mass of the total repeating units constituting the specific dye multimer. The lower limit is preferably 25% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 95% by mass or less, more preferably 90% by mass or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
In formula (B), A 2 represents a trivalent linking group,
L2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
DyeII represents a dye structure having a group capable of ionic bonding or bonding with Y2,
Y2 represents a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with DyeII .
 式(B)のAは、式(A)のAと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 A 2 in formula (B) has the same definition as A 1 in formula (A), and the preferred range is also the same.
 式(B)のLは、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、ヘテロ環基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-COO-、-NR-、-CONR-、-OCO-、-SO-、-SO-およびこれらを2個以上連結して形成される連結基が挙げられる。ここで、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表す。2価の連結基の詳細については、式(A)のLと同じである。Lは、単結合、または、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、-NH-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-およびこれらを2以上組み合わせた2価の連結基が好ましい。 L2 in formula (B) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group, -CH=CH-, -O-, -S-, -C(=O)-, -COO-, -NR-, -CONR -, -OCO-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, and linking groups formed by linking two or more of these. Here, each R independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group. The details of the divalent linking group are the same as for L1 in formula ( A ). L 2 is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, an arylene group, -NH-, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, or a divalent linking group in which two or more of these are combined.
 式(B)のYが表すDyeIIとイオン結合または配位結合可能な基としては、アニオン性基およびカチオン性基などが挙げられる。 Examples of groups capable of ionic bonding or coordinative bonding with DyeII represented by Y 2 of formula (B) include anionic groups and cationic groups.
 アニオン性基としては、-SO 、-COO、-PO 2-、-PO、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン構造を含む基およびトリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオン構造を含む基などが挙げられる。具体的には、式(AN-1)で表される基、および、式(AN-2)で表される基が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Examples of the anionic group include -SO 3 - , -COO - , -PO 4 2- , -PO 4 H - , a group containing a bis(sulfonyl)imide anion structure and a group containing a tris(sulfonyl)methide anion structure. be done. Specific examples include a group represented by formula (AN-1) and a group represented by formula (AN-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 式(AN-1)中、LAN1は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、RAN1は、-SO 、-COO、-PO 2-または-POを表す。
 LAN1が表す2価の連結基としては、-NRAN10-、-O-、-SO-、フッ素原子を含むアルキレン基、フッ素原子を含むアリーレン基またはこれらの組み合わせからなる基であることが好ましい。特に、-NRAN10-と-SOとフッ素原子を含むアルキレン基との組み合わせからなる基、-O-とフッ素原子を含むアリーレン基との組み合わせからなる基、または、-NRAN10-と-SOとフッ素原子を含むアルキレン基との組み合わせからなる基が好ましい。
 -NRAN10-において、RAN10は、水素原子または炭素数1~5のアルキル基を表し、水素原子が好ましい。
 フッ素原子を含むアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましい。これらのアルキレン基は、パーフルオロアルキレン基がより好ましい。フッ素置換アルキレン基の具体例としては、ジフルオロメチレン基、テトラフルオロエチレン基、ヘキサフルオロプロピレン基などが挙げられる。
 フッ素原子を含むアリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~14がより好ましく、6~10がさらに好ましい。フッ素原子を含むアリーレン基の具体例としては、テトラフルオロフェニレン基、ヘキサフルオロ-1-ナフチレン基、ヘキサフルオロ-2-ナフチレン基などが挙げられる。
In formula (AN-1), L AN1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and R AN1 represents -SO 3 - , -COO - , -PO 4 2- or -PO 4 H - .
The divalent linking group represented by L AN1 may be —NR AN10 —, —O—, —SO 2 —, an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom, an arylene group containing a fluorine atom, or a group consisting of a combination thereof. preferable. In particular, a group consisting of a combination of —NR AN10 — and —SO 2 and an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom, a group consisting of a combination of —O— and an arylene group containing a fluorine atom, or —NR AN10 — and —SO A group consisting of a combination of 2 and an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferred.
In -NR AN10 -, R AN10 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, preferably a hydrogen atom.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-6, and even more preferably 1-3. These alkylene groups are more preferably perfluoroalkylene groups. Specific examples of fluorine-substituted alkylene groups include a difluoromethylene group, a tetrafluoroethylene group, and a hexafluoropropylene group.
The number of carbon atoms in the arylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 6-20, more preferably 6-14, even more preferably 6-10. Specific examples of arylene groups containing fluorine atoms include a tetrafluorophenylene group, a hexafluoro-1-naphthylene group and a hexafluoro-2-naphthylene group.
 式(AN-2)中、LAN2は、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、単結合であることが好ましい。LAN2が表す2価の連結基としては、炭素数1~6のアルキレン基、炭素数6~12のアリーレン基、-O-、-S-、またはこれらの組み合わせからなる基等が挙げられる。LAN3は、-SO-または-CO-を表し、-SO-であることが好ましい。Gは、炭素原子または窒素原子を表し、窒素原子であることが好ましい。nは、Gが炭素原子の場合2を表し、Gが窒素原子の場合1を表す。RAN2は、フッ素原子を含むアルキル基またはフッ素原子を含むアリール基を表す。RAN2が表すフッ素原子を含むアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましい。RAN2が表すフッ素原子を含むアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~14がより好ましく、6~10がさらに好ましい。 In formula (AN-2), L AN2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, preferably a single bond. The divalent linking group represented by LAN2 includes an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, —O—, —S—, or a group consisting of a combination thereof. L AN3 represents -SO 2 - or -CO-, preferably -SO 2 -. G represents a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, preferably a nitrogen atom. n represents 2 when G is a carbon atom, and represents 1 when G is a nitrogen atom. RAN2 represents an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom or an aryl group containing a fluorine atom. The fluorine atom-containing alkyl group represented by R AN2 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The fluorine atom-containing aryl group represented by R AN2 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
 カチオン性基としては、置換又は無置換のオニウムカチオン(例えば、アンモニウム、ピリジニウム、イミダゾリウム及びホスホニウム等)が挙げられ、特にアンモニウムカチオンが好ましい。アンモニウムカチオンとしては、-N(R) が挙げられる。Rは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、Rの少なくとも1つは、アルキル基を表す。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖が好ましい。 Cationic groups include substituted or unsubstituted onium cations (eg, ammonium, pyridinium, imidazolium, phosphonium, etc.), with ammonium cations being particularly preferred. Ammonium cations include -N(R) 3 + . Each R independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and at least one of R represents an alkyl group. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear.
 式(B)のDyeIIは、Yとイオン結合または結合可能な基を有する色素構造を表す。Yとイオン結合または結合可能な基としては、アニオン性基およびカチオン性基が挙げられる。アニオン性基およびカチオン性基の具体例としては、上述した基が挙げられる。 DyeII in formula (B) represents a dye structure having a group capable of ionically bonding or bonding with Y2. Groups capable of ionically bonding or bonding to Y2 include anionic groups and cationic groups. Specific examples of anionic groups and cationic groups include the groups described above.
 式(B)のDyeIIが表す色素構造は、上述した式(1)で表される構造、または、金属原子に上述した式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造であって、式(1)のX~Xの少なくとも1つが、置換基としてYとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する構造であることが好ましい。また、式(1)で表される構造は、上述した式(1-1)で表される構造または上述した式(1-2)で表される構造であることが好ましい。ただし、式(1-1)においては、X~Xの少なくとも1つは、置換基としてYとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有し、式(1-2)においては、R~R11の少なくとも1つは、置換基としてYとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する。なお、DyeIIが表す色素構造が上述した式(1)で表される構造、または、金属原子に上述した式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造であって、式(1)のX~Xの少なくとも1つが、置換基としてYとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する構造である場合の特定色素多量体は、本発明の色素多量体でもある。 The dye structure represented by DyeII of formula (B) is a structure represented by the above formula (1) or a structure in which the structure represented by the above formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom, and At least one of X 2 to X 9 in (1) preferably has a structure having a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent. The structure represented by formula (1) is preferably the structure represented by formula (1-1) described above or the structure represented by formula (1-2) described above. However, in formula (1-1), at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent, and in formula (1-2), At least one of R 2 to R 11 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent. The dye structure represented by DyeII is a structure represented by the above formula (1), or a structure in which the structure represented by the above formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom, and The specific dye multimer in which at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent is also the dye multimer of the present invention.
 式(B)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、以下が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (B) include the following.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
 色素多量体(B)は、式(B)で表される繰り返し単位の他に、色素多量体(A)の態様を説明する中で説明した他の繰り返し単位などを含んでいてもよい。 The pigment multimer (B) may contain, in addition to the repeating unit represented by formula (B), other repeating units described in the description of the embodiment of the pigment multimer (A).
 色素多量体(B)の具体例としては、後述する実施例に記載の色素多量体(S-3)、(S-4)、(S-17)などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the pigment multimer (B) include the pigment multimers (S-3), (S-4), (S-17), etc. described in the examples below.
(色素多量体(C))
 色素多量体(C)は、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位を含む。色素多量体(C)は、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位の割合が、特定色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の10~100質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、30質量%以上が好ましく、50質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、95質量%以下が好ましく、90質量%以下がより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
 式(C)中、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
 DyeIIIは、色素構造を表し、
 mは0または1を表す。
(Pigment multimer (C))
Pigment multimer (C) contains a repeating unit represented by Formula (C). In the dye multimer (C), the proportion of repeating units represented by formula (C) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass of all repeating units constituting the specific dye multimer. The lower limit is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 95% by mass or less, more preferably 90% by mass or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
In formula (C), L3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
DyeIII represents the dye structure,
m represents 0 or 1;
 式(C)のLは単結合または2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、ヘテロ環基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-COO-、-NR-、-CONR-、-OCO-、-SO-、-SO-およびこれらを2個以上連結して形成される連結基が挙げられる。ここで、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表す。 L3 in formula ( C) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group, -CH=CH-, -O-, -S-, -C(=O)-, -COO-, -NR-, -CONR -, -OCO-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, and linking groups formed by linking two or more of these. Here, each R independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
 アルキル基およびアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましい。上限は、25以下がより好ましく、20以下が更に好ましい。下限は、2以上がより好ましく、3以上が更に好ましい。アルキル基およびアルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。
 アリール基およびアリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。
 ヘテロ環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロ環基が有するヘテロ原子は、酸素原子、窒素原子および硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロ環基が有するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3個が好ましい。
 アルキレン基、アリーレン基、ヘテロ環基、アルキル基およびアリール基は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有してもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tで挙げた基、架橋性基、酸基が挙げられる。また、現像促進基(2~20個の無置換のアルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しを含む基、ラクトン構造を含む基、酸無水物基、シアノ基等)や親疎水性調整基(長鎖または環状のアルキル基、長鎖または環状のアラルキル基、アリール基、ポリアルキレンオキシド基、ヒドロキシ基、マレイミド基、アミノ基等)等を置換基として有してもよい。
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group and alkylene group is preferably 1-30. The upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, even more preferably 20 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more. Alkyl groups and alkylene groups may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The aryl group and the arylene group preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. The heteroatom possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
An alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyl group and an aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups listed above for the substituent T, the crosslinkable group, and the acid group. In addition, development promoting groups (groups containing repeating unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains of 2 to 20, groups containing lactone structures, acid anhydride groups, cyano groups, etc.) and hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity adjusting groups (long-chain or cyclic alkyl group, long-chain or cyclic aralkyl group, aryl group, polyalkylene oxide group, hydroxy group, maleimide group, amino group, etc.) as a substituent.
 式(C)のLは、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、-NH-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-、-SO-およびこれらを2以上組み合わせた連結基が好ましい。 L 3 of formula (C) is an alkylene group, an arylene group, -NH-, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, -SO 2 -, or a combination of two or more of these Linking groups are preferred.
 式(C)のDyeIIIが表す色素構造は、上述した化合物A1から水素原子を2個取り除いた残基、または、上述した化合物A2から水素原子を2個取り除いた残基であることが好ましい。より具体的には、上述した式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を2個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に上述した式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を2個取り除いた構造であることが好ましい。また、式(1)で表される構造は、上述した式(1-1)で表される構造または上述した式(1-2)で表される構造であることが好ましい。なお、DyeIIIが表す色素構造が上述した式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を2個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に上述した式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を2個取り除いた構造である場合の特定色素多量体は、本発明の色素多量体でもある。 The dye structure represented by DyeIII of formula (C) is preferably a residue obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from compound A1 described above, or a residue obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from compound A2 described above. More specifically, hydrogen A structure in which two atoms are removed is preferable. The structure represented by formula (1) is preferably the structure represented by formula (1-1) described above or the structure represented by formula (1-2) described above. The dye structure represented by DyeIII is a structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the structure represented by the above formula (1), or a structure in which the structure represented by the above formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom. The specific dye multimer having a structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from is also the dye multimer of the present invention.
 式(C)のmは0または1を表し、1が好ましい。 m in formula (C) represents 0 or 1, preferably 1.
 式(C)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、以下が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (C) include the following.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
 色素多量体(C)は、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位の他に、色素多量体(A)の態様を説明する中で説明した他の繰り返し単位などを含んでいてもよい。 The pigment multimer (C) may contain, in addition to the repeating unit represented by formula (C), other repeating units described in the description of the embodiment of the pigment multimer (A).
 色素多量体(C)の具体例としては、後述する実施例に記載の色素多量体(S-6)などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the pigment multimer (C) include the pigment multimer (S-6) described in the examples below.
(色素多量体(D))
 色素多量体(D)は、式(D)で表される化合物である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
 式(D)中、Lは(n+k)価の連結基を表し、
 nは2~20の整数を表し、
 kは0~20の整数を表し、
 DyeIVは、色素構造を表し、
 Pは、置換基を表し、
 n個のDyeIVはそれぞれ異なっていても良く、
 kが2以上の場合、複数のPはそれぞれ異なっていても良く、
 n+kは、2~20の整数を表す。
(Pigment multimer (D))
Dye multimer (D) is a compound represented by Formula (D).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
In formula (D), L 4 represents an (n+k)-valent linking group,
n represents an integer from 2 to 20,
k represents an integer from 0 to 20,
DyeIV stands for dye structure,
P4 represents a substituent,
Each of n DyeIV may be different,
When k is 2 or more, the plurality of P 4 may be different,
n+k represents an integer from 2 to 20;
 式(D)のnは2~14が好ましく、2~8がより好ましく、2~7が特に好ましく、2~6が一層好ましい。kは1~13が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~8がさらにより好ましく、1~7が特に好ましく、1~6が一層好ましい。 n in formula (D) is preferably 2 to 14, more preferably 2 to 8, particularly preferably 2 to 7, and even more preferably 2 to 6. k is preferably 1 to 13, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 8, particularly preferably 1 to 7, and even more preferably 1 to 6.
 式(D)のLが表す(n+k)価の連結基としては、1個から100個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から50個までの酸素原子、1個から200個までの水素原子、および0個から20個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が挙げられる。(n+k)価の連結基としては、下記の構造単位または以下の構造単位が2以上組み合わさって構成される基(環構造を形成していてもよい)であることが好ましい。以下の式中の*は結合手を表す。 The (n+k)-valent linking group represented by L 4 in formula (D) includes 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 Groups consisting of 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms and 0 to 20 sulfur atoms are included. The (n+k)-valent linking group is preferably the following structural unit or a group (which may form a ring structure) formed by combining two or more of the following structural units. * in the following formulas represents a bond.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 Lが表す(n+k)価の連結基は、多官能チオールから誘導される連結基、多官能アルコールから誘導される連結基、または、酸無水物から誘導される連結基であることが好ましく、多官能チオールから誘導される連結基であることがより好ましい。 The (n+k) -valent linking group represented by L4 is preferably a linking group derived from a polyfunctional thiol, a linking group derived from a polyfunctional alcohol, or a linking group derived from an acid anhydride, A linking group derived from a polyfunctional thiol is more preferred.
 Lが表す(n+k)価の連結基は、式(Za-1)~(Za-4)のいずれかで表される基であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
 式(Za-1)中、Laは3価の基を表し、Taは単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、3個存在するTaは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 式(Za-2)中、Laは4価の基を表し、Taは単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、4個存在するTaは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 式(Za-3)中、Laは5価の基を表し、Taは単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、5個存在するTaは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 式(Za-4)中、Laは6価の基を表し、Taは単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、6個存在するTaは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 上記式中、*は結合手を表す。
The (n+k)-valent linking group represented by L 4 is preferably a group represented by any one of formulas (Za-1) to (Za-4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
In formula (Za-1), La 3 represents a trivalent group, Ta 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and the three Ta 3 present may be the same or different. .
In formula (Za-2), La 4 represents a tetravalent group, Ta 4 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and the four Ta 4 present may be the same or different. .
In formula (Za-3), La 5 represents a pentavalent group, Ta 5 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and the five Ta 5 present may be the same or different. .
In formula (Za-4), La 6 represents a hexavalent group, Ta 6 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and the six Ta 6s present may be the same or different. .
In the above formula, * represents a bond.
 Ta~Taが表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、ヘテロ環基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-COO-、-NR-、-CONR-、-OCO-、-SO-、-SO-およびこれらを2個以上連結して形成される連結基が挙げられる。ここで、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表す。Ta~Taが表す2価の連結基は、-S-を含む基であることが好ましく、-S-であることがより好ましい。 The divalent linking groups represented by Ta 3 to Ta 6 include an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group, -CH=CH-, -O-, -S-, -C(=O)-, and -COO- , -NR-, -CONR-, -OCO-, -SO-, -SO 2 - and linking groups formed by linking two or more of these. Here, each R independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group. The divalent linking group represented by Ta 3 to Ta 6 is preferably a group containing -S-, more preferably -S-.
 アルキル基およびアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましい。上限は、25以下がより好ましく、20以下が更に好ましい。下限は、2以上がより好ましく、3以上が更に好ましい。アルキル基およびアルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。
 アリール基およびアリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。
 ヘテロ環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロ環基が有するヘテロ原子は、酸素原子、窒素原子および硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロ環基が有するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3個が好ましい。
 アルキレン基、アリーレン基、ヘテロ環基、アルキル基およびアリール基は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有してもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tで挙げた基、架橋性基、酸基が挙げられる。また、現像促進基(2~20個の無置換のアルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しを含む基、ラクトン構造を含む基、酸無水物基、シアノ基等)や親疎水性調整基(長鎖または環状のアルキル基、長鎖または環状のアラルキル基、アリール基、ポリアルキレンオキシド基、ヒドロキシ基、マレイミド基、アミノ基等)等を置換基として有してもよい。
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group and alkylene group is preferably 1-30. The upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, even more preferably 20 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more. Alkyl groups and alkylene groups may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The aryl group and the arylene group preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. The heteroatom possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
An alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyl group and an aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups listed above for the substituent T, the crosslinkable group, and the acid group. In addition, development promoting groups (groups containing repeating unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains of 2 to 20, groups containing lactone structures, acid anhydride groups, cyano groups, etc.) and hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity adjusting groups (long-chain or cyclic alkyl group, long-chain or cyclic aralkyl group, aryl group, polyalkylene oxide group, hydroxy group, maleimide group, amino group, etc.) as a substituent.
 Laが表す3価の基としては、上記の2価の連結基から水素原子を1個除いた基が挙げられる。Laが表す4価の基としては、上記の2価の連結基から水素原子を2個除いた基が挙げられる。Laが表す5価の基としては、上記の2価の連結基から水素原子を3個除いた基が挙げられる。Laが表す6価の基としては、上記の2価の連結基から水素原子を4個除いた基が挙げられる。La~Laが表す3~6価の基は、上述した置換基を有してもよい。 Examples of the trivalent group represented by La 3 include groups obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the above divalent linking group. Examples of the tetravalent group represented by La 4 include groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the above divalent linking group. Examples of the pentavalent group represented by La 5 include groups obtained by removing three hydrogen atoms from the above divalent linking group. The hexavalent group represented by La 6 includes a group obtained by removing 4 hydrogen atoms from the above divalent linking group. The tri- to hexavalent groups represented by La 3 to La 6 may have the substituents described above.
 (n+k)価の連結基の具体例としては、以下に示す構造の連結基、特開2008-222950号公報の段落番号0071~0072に記載された連結基、特開2013-029760号公報の段落番号0176に記載された連結基、国際公開第2016/031442号の段落番号0022~0024に記載された連結基などが挙げられる。以下の式中の波線は結合手を表す。 Specific examples of the (n+k)-valent linking group include linking groups having the structures shown below, linking groups described in paragraphs 0071 to 0072 of JP-A-2008-222950, and paragraphs of JP-A-2013-029760. Examples include the linking group described in No. 0176, the linking group described in paragraphs 0022 to 0024 of WO 2016/031442, and the like. A wavy line in the following formula represents a bond.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 式(D)のDyeIVが表す色素構造は、上述した化合物A1から水素原子を1個取り除いた残基、または、上述した化合物A2から水素原子を1個取り除いた残基であることが好ましい。より具体的には、上述した式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に上述した式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造であることが好ましい。また、式(1)で表される構造は、上述した式(1-1)で表される構造または上述した式(1-2)で表される構造であることが好ましい。なお、DyeIVが表す色素構造が上述した式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に上述した式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造である場合の特定色素多量体は、本発明の色素多量体でもある。 The dye structure represented by DyeIV of formula (D) is preferably a residue obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from compound A1 described above, or a residue obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from compound A2 described above. More specifically, hydrogen A structure in which one atom is removed is preferable. The structure represented by formula (1) is preferably the structure represented by formula (1-1) described above or the structure represented by formula (1-2) described above. The dye structure represented by DyeIV is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by the above formula (1), or a structure in which the structure represented by the above formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom. The specific dye multimer having a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from is also the dye multimer of the present invention.
 式(D)のPが表す置換基としては、酸基及び架橋性基等が挙げられる。また、Pが表す置換基は、繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖であってもよい。繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖としては、ビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖が好ましい。kが2以上の場合、k個のPは、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。 Examples of substituents represented by P4 in formula ( D) include an acid group and a crosslinkable group. Moreover, the substituent represented by P4 may be a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit. A monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit derived from a vinyl compound is preferable as the monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit. When k is 2 or more, k P4's may be the same or different.
 Pが繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖であり、かつ、kが1の場合、Pはビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位を2~20個(好ましくは、2~15個、さらに好ましくは2~10個)有する1価のポリマー鎖であることが好ましい。また、Pが繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖であり、かつ、kが2以上の場合、k個のPにおけるビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位の個数の平均値は、2~20個(好ましくは、2~15個、さらに好ましくは2~10個)であることが好ましい。
 Pが繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖である場合、繰り返し単位の数、および、繰り返し単位の個数の平均値は、核磁気共鳴(NMR)により求めることができる。
When P 4 is a monovalent polymer chain having repeating units and k is 1, P 4 has 2 to 20 (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10) is preferred. Further, when P 4 is a monovalent polymer chain having repeating units and k is 2 or more, the average number of vinyl compound-derived repeating units in k P 4 is 2 to 20 ( preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10).
When P4 is a monovalent polymer chain having repeating units, the number of repeating units and the average number of repeating units can be determined by nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR).
 Pが繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖である場合、Pを構成する繰り返し単位としては、上述した色素多量体(A)の態様を説明する中で説明した他の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。他の繰り返し単位は、上述した酸基を有する繰り返し単位および架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位から選ばれる1種以上を有することが好ましい。
 Pが、酸基を含む繰り返し単位を含む場合、酸基を含む繰り返し単位の割合は、Pの全繰り返し単位に対して、10~80モル%であることが好ましく、10~65モル%がより好ましい。
 Pが架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、Pの全繰り返し単位に対して、10~80モル%であることが好ましく、10~65モル%がより好ましい。
When P 4 is a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit, the repeating unit constituting P 4 includes other repeating units described in the description of the embodiment of the dye multimer (A) described above. . Other repeating units preferably have one or more selected from repeating units having an acid group and repeating units having a crosslinkable group.
When P4 contains a repeating unit containing an acid group, the proportion of the repeating unit containing an acid group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, preferably 10 to 65 mol%, relative to the total repeating units of P4. is more preferred.
When P 4 contains a repeating unit having a crosslinkable group, the ratio of the repeating unit having a crosslinkable group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, preferably 10 to 65 mol, relative to the total repeating units of P 4 . % is more preferred.
 色素多量体(D)は、式(D-1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
 (DyeIV-L43-L41-(L42-P   ・・・(D-1)
 式(D-1)中、L41は(n+k)価の連結基を表し、
 nは2~20の整数を表し、
 kは0~20の整数を表し、
 DyeIVは、色素構造を表し、
 Pは、置換基を表し、
 L42およびL43は、それぞれ独立して、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
 n個のDyeIVおよびL43はそれぞれ異なっていても良く、
 kが2以上の場合、複数のPおよびL42はそれぞれ異なっていても良く、
 n+kは、2~20の整数を表す。
The dye multimer (D) is preferably a compound represented by formula (D-1).
(DyeIV-L 43 ) n −L 41 −(L 42 −P 4 ) k (D-1)
In formula (D-1), L 41 represents an (n+k)-valent linking group,
n represents an integer from 2 to 20,
k represents an integer from 0 to 20,
DyeIV stands for dye structure,
P4 represents a substituent,
L 42 and L 43 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group,
each of the n DyeIV and L 43 may be different,
When k is 2 or more, the plurality of P 4 and L 42 may be different,
n+k represents an integer from 2 to 20;
 式(D-1)の、DyeIV、P、nおよびkは、式(D)のDyeIV、P、nおよびkと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 DyeIV, P 4 , n and k in formula (D-1) are synonymous with DyeIV, P 4 , n and k in formula (D), and preferred ranges are also the same.
 式(D-1)のL41が表す(n+k)価の連結基としては、1個から100個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から50個までの酸素原子、1個から200個までの水素原子、および0個から20個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が挙げられる。(n+k)価の連結基としては、下記の構造単位または以下の構造単位が2以上組み合わさって構成される基(環構造を形成していてもよい)であることが好ましい。以下の式中の*は結合手を表す。 The (n+k)-valent linking group represented by L 41 of formula (D-1) includes 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, and 0 to 50 oxygen atoms. , from 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and from 0 to 20 sulfur atoms. The (n+k)-valent linking group is preferably the following structural unit or a group (which may form a ring structure) formed by combining two or more of the following structural units. * in the following formulas represents a bond.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
 式(D-1)のL42およびL43が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、ヘテロ環基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-COO-、-NR-、-CONR-、-OCO-、-SO-、-SO-およびこれらを2個以上連結して形成される連結基が挙げられる。ここで、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を表す。L42およびL43は、-S-を含む基であることが好ましく、-S-であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L 42 and L 43 of formula (D-1) include an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group, -CH=CH-, -O-, -S-, and -C (= O)-, -COO-, -NR-, -CONR-, -OCO-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, and linking groups formed by linking two or more of these. Here, each R independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. L 42 and L 43 are preferably groups containing -S-, more preferably -S-.
 アルキル基およびアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましい。上限は、25以下がより好ましく、20以下が更に好ましい。下限は、2以上がより好ましく、3以上が更に好ましい。アルキル基およびアルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。
 アリール基およびアリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。
 ヘテロ環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロ環基が有するヘテロ原子は、酸素原子、窒素原子および硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロ環基が有するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3個が好ましい。
 アルキレン基、アリーレン基、ヘテロ環基、アルキル基およびアリール基は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有してもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tで挙げた基、架橋性基、酸基が挙げられる。また、現像促進基(2~20個の無置換のアルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しを含む基、ラクトン構造を含む基、酸無水物基、シアノ基等)や親疎水性調整基(長鎖または環状のアルキル基、長鎖または環状のアラルキル基、アリール基、ポリアルキレンオキシド基、ヒドロキシ基、マレイミド基、アミノ基等)等を置換基として有してもよい。
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group and alkylene group is preferably 1-30. The upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, even more preferably 20 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more. Alkyl groups and alkylene groups may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The aryl group and the arylene group preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. The heteroatom possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms possessed by the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
An alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyl group and an aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups listed above for the substituent T, the crosslinkable group, and the acid group. In addition, development promoting groups (groups containing repeating unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains of 2 to 20, groups containing lactone structures, acid anhydride groups, cyano groups, etc.) and hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity adjusting groups (long-chain or cyclic alkyl group, long-chain or cyclic aralkyl group, aryl group, polyalkylene oxide group, hydroxy group, maleimide group, amino group, etc.) as a substituent.
 色素多量体(D)の具体例としては、後述する実施例に記載の色素多量体(S-7)、(S-8)、(S-15)などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the dye multimer (D) include the dye multimers (S-7), (S-8), (S-15), etc. described in the examples below.
 特定色素多量体の重量平均分子量は、2000~50000であることが好ましい。特定色素多量体の重量平均分子量が上記範囲であれば、本発明の効果が顕著に奏される。重量平均分子量の下限は、保存安定性の観点から3000以上であることが好ましく、6000以上であることがより好ましい。重量平均分子量の上限は、残渣抑制の観点から30000以下であることが好ましく、20000以下であることがより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the specific dye multimer is preferably 2,000 to 50,000. If the weight-average molecular weight of the specific dye multimer is within the above range, the effects of the present invention are remarkably exhibited. The lower limit of the weight-average molecular weight is preferably 3,000 or more, more preferably 6,000 or more, from the viewpoint of storage stability. The upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 30,000 or less, more preferably 20,000 or less, from the viewpoint of suppressing residue.
 特定色素多量体の酸価は、10~400mgKOH/gであることが好ましい。特定色素多量体の酸価が上記範囲であれば、残渣の発生をより抑制できる。酸価の下限は、パターン形成性の観点から20mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、50mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましい。酸価の上限は、300mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましい。 The acid value of the specific dye multimer is preferably 10-400 mgKOH/g. If the acid value of the specific dye multimer is within the above range, the generation of residue can be further suppressed. The lower limit of the acid value is preferably 20 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, from the viewpoint of pattern formability. The upper limit of the acid value is preferably 300 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less.
 特定色素多量体のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基価は、0.1~2.5mmol/gであることが好ましい。特定色素多量体のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基価が上記範囲であれば、耐光性や耐溶剤性に優れた膜が得られやすい。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基価の下限は、0.2mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、0.3mmol/g以上であることがより好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基価の上限は、耐光性の観点から2.0mmol/g以下であることが好ましく、1.5mmol/g以下であることがより好ましい。なお、特定色素多量体のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基価とは、特定色素多量体の固形分1gあたりのエチレン性不飽和結合含有基のモル量を表した数値である。特定色素多量体のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基価は、特定色素多量体の1分子中に含まれるエチレン性不飽和結合含有基の数を特定色素多量体の分子量で割ることで算出することができる。 The ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value of the specific dye multimer is preferably 0.1 to 2.5 mmol/g. If the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value of the specific dye multimer is within the above range, a film having excellent light resistance and solvent resistance can be easily obtained. The lower limit of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value is preferably 0.2 mmol/g or more, more preferably 0.3 mmol/g or more. The upper limit of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value is preferably 2.0 mmol/g or less, more preferably 1.5 mmol/g or less, from the viewpoint of light resistance. The ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value of the specific dye multimer is a numerical value representing the molar amount of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group per 1 g of the solid content of the specific dye multimer. The ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value of the specific dye multimer can be calculated by dividing the number of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups contained in one molecule of the specific dye multimer by the molecular weight of the specific dye multimer. can.
 特定色素多量体は、染料であってもよいが、耐熱性および耐光性の観点から顔料であることが好ましい。 The specific dye multimer may be a dye, but is preferably a pigment from the viewpoint of heat resistance and light resistance.
 特定色素多量体は、23℃のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルの100gに対する溶解量が1g以下であることが好ましく、0.5g以下であることがより好ましい。 The amount of the specific dye multimer dissolved in 100 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether at 23°C is preferably 1 g or less, more preferably 0.5 g or less.
 特定色素多量体の極大吸収波長は、波長400~700nmの範囲に存在することが好ましく、波長400~600nmの範囲に存在することがより好ましい。また、特定色素多量体は、黄色着色剤であることが好ましい。 The maximum absorption wavelength of the specific dye multimer preferably exists in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 400 to 600 nm. Moreover, the specific dye multimer is preferably a yellow colorant.
 特定色素多量体は、合成する際に使用したカルボン酸と塩を形成していてもよい。 The specific dye multimer may form a salt with the carboxylic acid used during synthesis.
 特定色素多量体の具体例としては、後述する実施例に記載の色素多量体(S-1)~(S-17)が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the specific dye multimer include the dye multimers (S-1) to (S-17) described in the examples below.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における特定色素多量体の含有量は、0.5~80質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、1質量%以上であることが好ましく、2質量%以上であることがより好ましく、5質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、10質量%以上であることがより一層好ましく、15質量%以上であることが更に一層好ましい。上限は、70質量%以下であることが好ましく、60質量%以下であることがより好ましく、50質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、40質量%以下であることがより一層好ましく、35質量%以下であることがさらに一層好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、特定色素多量体を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。特定色素多量体を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the specific dye multimer in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.5 to 80% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 2% by mass or more, still more preferably 5% by mass or more, even more preferably 10% by mass or more, and 15% by mass. The above is even more preferable. The upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, even more preferably 50% by mass or less, even more preferably 40% by mass or less, and 35% by mass. The following are even more preferred. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of specific dye multimer, or may contain two or more types. When two or more specific dye multimers are included, the total amount thereof preferably falls within the above range.
<<硬化性化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は硬化性化合物を含有する。硬化性化合物としては、重合性化合物、樹脂等が挙げられる。樹脂は、非重合性の樹脂(重合性基を有さない樹脂)であってもよく、重合性の樹脂(重合性基を有する樹脂)であってもよい。重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基および環状エーテル基などが挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられる。環状エーテル基としては、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基などが挙げられ、エポキシ基が好ましい。エポキシ基は、脂環式エポキシ基であってもよい。なお、脂環式エポキシ基とは、エポキシ環と飽和炭化水素環とが縮合した環状構造を有する1価の官能基のことを意味する。
<<Curable compound>>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a curable compound. Examples of the curable compound include polymerizable compounds and resins. The resin may be a non-polymerizable resin (a resin having no polymerizable group) or a polymerizable resin (a resin having a polymerizable group). Polymerizable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups. Examples of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups include vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, and (meth)acryloyl groups. Examples of the cyclic ether group include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, with the epoxy group being preferred. The epoxy group may be a cycloaliphatic epoxy group. The alicyclic epoxy group means a monovalent functional group having a cyclic structure in which an epoxy ring and a saturated hydrocarbon ring are condensed.
 硬化性化合物としては、樹脂を少なくとも含むものを用いることが好ましい。また、本発明の着色組成物をフォトリソグラフィ用の着色組成物とする場合には、硬化性化合物として、酸基を有する樹脂と、重合性モノマー(モノマータイプの重合性化合物)とを用いることが好ましく、酸基を有する樹脂と、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する重合性モノマー(モノマータイプの重合性化合物)とを用いることがより好ましい。 As the curable compound, it is preferable to use one containing at least a resin. Further, when the coloring composition of the present invention is used as a coloring composition for photolithography, a resin having an acid group and a polymerizable monomer (monomer type polymerizable compound) can be used as the curable compound. More preferably, a resin having an acid group and a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group (monomer-type polymerizable compound) are used.
(重合性化合物)
 重合性化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物および環状エーテル基を有する化合物等が挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物はラジカル重合性化合物として好ましく用いることができる。また、環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、カチオン重合性化合物として好ましく用いることができる。
(Polymerizable compound)
Examples of the polymerizable compound include compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and compounds having a cyclic ether group. A compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group can be preferably used as a radically polymerizable compound. A compound having a cyclic ether group can also be preferably used as a cationically polymerizable compound.
 樹脂タイプの重合性化合物としては、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂などが挙げられる。 Examples of resin-type polymerizable compounds include resins containing repeating units having polymerizable groups.
 モノマータイプの重合性化合物(重合性モノマー)の分子量は、2000未満であることが好ましく、1500以下であることがより好ましい。重合性モノマーの分子量の下限は100以上であることが好ましく、200以上であることがより好ましい。樹脂タイプの重合性化合物の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2000~2000000であることが好ましい。重量平均分子量の上限は、1000000以下であることが好ましく、500000以下であることがより好ましい。重量平均分子量の下限は、3000以上であることが好ましく、5000以上であることがより好ましい。 The molecular weight of the monomer type polymerizable compound (polymerizable monomer) is preferably less than 2000, more preferably 1500 or less. The lower limit of the molecular weight of the polymerizable monomer is preferably 100 or more, more preferably 200 or more. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin-type polymerizable compound is preferably 2,000 to 2,000,000. The upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 1,000,000 or less, more preferably 500,000 or less. The lower limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 3000 or more, more preferably 5000 or more.
 重合性モノマーとしてのエチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物は、3~15官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが好ましく、3~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることがより好ましい。具体例としては、特開2009-288705号公報の段落番号0095~0108、特開2013-029760号公報の段落0227、特開2008-292970号公報の段落番号0254~0257、特開2013-253224号公報の段落番号0034~0038、特開2012-208494号公報の段落番号0477、特開2017-048367号公報、特許第6057891号公報、特許第6031807号公報、特開2017-194662号公報に記載されている化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group as a polymerizable monomer is preferably a 3- to 15-functional (meth)acrylate compound, more preferably a 3- to 6-functional (meth)acrylate compound. Specific examples include paragraph numbers 0095 to 0108 of JP-A-2009-288705, paragraph 0227 of JP-A-2013-029760, paragraph numbers 0254-0257 of JP-A-2008-292970, and JP-A-2013-253224. Paragraph numbers 0034 to 0038 of the publication, paragraph number 0477 of JP 2012-208494, JP 2017-048367, JP 6057891, JP 6031807, JP 2017-194662 and the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬(株)製、NKエステルA-DPH-12E;新中村化学工業(株)製)、およびこれらの化合物の(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコールおよび/またはプロピレングリコール残基を介して結合している構造の化合物(例えば、サートマー社から市販されている、SR454、SR499)などが挙げられる。また、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物としては、ジグリセリンEO(エチレンオキシド)変性(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはM-460;東亞合成製)、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製、NKエステルA-TMMT)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(日本化薬(株)製、KAYARAD HDDA)、RP-1040(日本化薬(株)製)、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)、NKオリゴUA-7200(新中村化学工業(株)製)、8UH-1006、8UH-1012(大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、ライトアクリレートPOB-A0(共栄社化学(株)製)などを用いることもできる。 Examples of compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include dipentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), and dipentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate (commercially available). KAYARAD D-320; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate ) Acrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., NK Ester A-DPH-12E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and the (meth)acryloyl groups of these compounds are ethylene glycol and / Or a compound having a structure linked via a propylene glycol residue (for example, SR454 and SR499 commercially available from Sartomer). Examples of compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include diglycerin EO (ethylene oxide)-modified (meth)acrylate (commercially available as M-460; manufactured by Toagosei), pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry ( Ltd., NK Ester A-TMMT), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., KAYARAD HDDA), RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Toagosei Co., Ltd.), NK Oligo UA-7200 (Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 8UH-1006, 8UH-1012 (Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), Light acrylate POB-A0 (Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd. ) made) etc. can also be used.
 また、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物としては、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンプロピレンオキシド変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンエチレンオキシド変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸エチレンオキシド変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレートなどの3官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物を用いることも好ましい。3官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物の市販品としては、アロニックスM-309、M-310、M-321、M-350、M-360、M-313、M-315、M-306、M-305、M-303、M-452、M-450(東亞合成(株)製)、NKエステル A9300、A-GLY-9E、A-GLY-20E、A-TMM-3、A-TMM-3L、A-TMM-3LM-N、A-TMPT、TMPT(新中村化学工業(株)製)、KAYARAD GPO-303、TMPTA、THE-330、TPA-330、PET-30(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane propylene oxide-modified tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethylene oxide-modified tri(meth)acrylate, and ethylene oxide isocyanurate. It is also preferable to use trifunctional (meth)acrylate compounds such as modified tri(meth)acrylate and pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate. Commercial products of trifunctional (meth)acrylate compounds include Aronix M-309, M-310, M-321, M-350, M-360, M-313, M-315, M-306 and M-305. , M-303, M-452, M-450 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), NK Ester A9300, A-GLY-9E, A-GLY-20E, A-TMM-3, A-TMM-3L, A -TMM-3LM-N, A-TMPT, TMPT (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), KAYARAD GPO-303, TMPTA, THE-330, TPA-330, PET-30 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) etc.
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物は、更に、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基等の酸基を有していてもよい。このような化合物の市販品としては、アロニックスM-305、M-510、M-520、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)等が挙げられる。 A compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group may further have an acid group such as a carboxy group, a sulfo group, or a phosphoric acid group. Commercially available products of such compounds include Aronix M-305, M-510, M-520 and Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物としては、カプロラクトン構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。カプロラクトン構造を有する化合物については、特開2013-253224号公報の段落0042~0045の記載を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。カプロラクトン構造を有する化合物は、例えば、日本化薬(株)からシリーズとして市販されている、DPCA-20、DPCA-30、DPCA-60、DPCA-120等が挙げられる。 A compound having a caprolactone structure can also be used as the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. For compounds having a caprolactone structure, the descriptions in paragraphs 0042 to 0045 of JP-A-2013-253224 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Compounds having a caprolactone structure include, for example, DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, DPCA-120, etc., which are commercially available as a series from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基とアルキレンオキシ基を有する化合物を用いることもできる。このような化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基と、エチレンオキシ基および/またはプロピレンオキシ基とを有する化合物であることが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基とエチレンオキシ基とを有する化合物であることがより好ましく、エチレンオキシ基を4~20個有する3~6官能(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることがさらに好ましい。市販品としては、例えばサートマー社製のエチレンオキシ基を4個有する4官能(メタ)アクリレートであるSR-494、日本化薬(株)製のイソブチレンオキシ基を3個有する3官能(メタ)アクリレートであるKAYARAD TPA-330などが挙げられる。 A compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an alkyleneoxy group can also be used as the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. Such a compound is preferably a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an ethyleneoxy group and/or a propyleneoxy group, and is a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an ethyleneoxy group. More preferably, it is a tri- to hexa-functional (meth)acrylate compound having 4 to 20 ethyleneoxy groups. Commercially available products include, for example, SR-494, a tetrafunctional (meth)acrylate having four ethyleneoxy groups manufactured by Sartomer Co., Ltd., and a trifunctional (meth)acrylate having three isobutyleneoxy groups manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. KAYARAD TPA-330, etc.
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物としては、フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。市販品としては、オグソールEA-0200、EA-0300(大阪ガスケミカル(株)製、フルオレン骨格を有する(メタ)アクリレートモノマー)などが挙げられる。 A polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used as the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. Commercially available products include Ogsol EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals Co., Ltd., (meth)acrylate monomer having a fluorene skeleton).
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物としては、トルエンなどの環境規制物質を実質的に含まない化合物を用いることも好ましい。このような化合物の市販品としては、KAYARAD DPHA LT、KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 As the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, it is also preferable to use a compound such as toluene that does not substantially contain environmentally regulated substances. Commercially available products of such compounds include KAYARAD DPHA LT and KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物としては、UA-7200(新中村化学工業(株)製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬(株)製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600、LINC-202UA(共栄社化学(株)製)、8UH-1006、8UH-1012(以上、大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、ライトアクリレートPOB-A0(共栄社化学(株)製)などを用いることも好ましい。 Examples of compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA- 306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600, LINC-202UA (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), 8UH-1006, 8UH-1012 (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), light acrylate POB-A0 ( Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like are also preferably used.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物としては、エポキシ基を有する化合物、オキセタニル基を有する化合物などが挙げられ、エポキシ基を有する化合物であることが好ましい。エポキシ基を有する化合物としては、1分子内にエポキシ基を1~100個有する化合物が挙げられる。エポキシ基の数の上限は、例えば、10個以下とすることもでき、5個以下とすることもできる。エポキシ基の数の下限は、2個以上が好ましい。 Compounds having a cyclic ether group include compounds having an epoxy group, compounds having an oxetanyl group, and the like, and compounds having an epoxy group are preferred. Compounds having an epoxy group include compounds having 1 to 100 epoxy groups in one molecule. The upper limit of the number of epoxy groups can be, for example, 10 or less, or 5 or less. The lower limit of the number of epoxy groups is preferably two or more.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、低分子化合物(例えば分子量1000未満)でもよいし、高分子化合物(macromolecule)(例えば、分子量1000以上、ポリマーの場合は、重量平均分子量が1000以上)でもよい。環状エーテル基の重量平均分子量は、200~100000が好ましく、500~50000がより好ましい。重量平均分子量の上限は、10000以下が好ましく、5000以下がより好ましく、3000以下が更に好ましい。 A compound having a cyclic ether group may be a low-molecular compound (for example, a molecular weight of less than 1000) or a macromolecule (for example, a molecular weight of 1000 or more, and in the case of a polymer, a weight-average molecular weight of 1000 or more). The weight average molecular weight of the cyclic ether group is preferably from 200 to 100,000, more preferably from 500 to 50,000. The upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物としては、特開2013-011869号公報の段落番号0034~0036に記載された化合物、特開2014-043556号公報の段落番号0147~0156に記載された化合物、特開2014-089408号公報の段落番号0085~0092に記載された化合物、特開2017-179172号公報に記載された化合物を用いることもできる。 As the compound having a cyclic ether group, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0036 of JP-A-2013-011869, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0147-0156 of JP-A-2014-043556, JP 2014 The compounds described in paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of JP-A-089408 and the compounds described in JP-A-2017-179172 can also be used.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物の市販品としては、デナコール EX-212L、EX-212、EX-214L、EX-214、EX-216L、EX-216、EX-321L、EX-321、EX-850L、EX-850(以上、ナガセケムテックス(株)製)、ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S、EP-4003S、EP-4010S、EP-4011S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、NC-2000、NC-3000、NC-7300、XD-1000、EPPN-501、EPPN-502(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、セロキサイド2021P、セロキサイド2081、セロキサイド2083、セロキサイド2085、EHPE3150、EPOLEAD PB 3600、PB 4700(以上、(株)ダイセル製)、サイクロマーP ACA 200M、ACA 230AA、ACA Z250、ACA Z251、ACA Z300、ACA Z320(以上、(株)ダイセル製)、jER1031S、jER157S65、jER152、jER154、jER157S70(以上、三菱ケミカル(株)製)、アロンオキセタンOXT-121、OXT-221、OX-SQ、PNOX(以上、東亞合成(株)製)、アデカグリシロール ED-505((株)ADEKA製、エポキシ基含有モノマー)、マープルーフG-0150M、G-0105SA、G-0130SP、G-0250SP、G-1005S、G-1005SA、G-1010S、G-2050M、G-01100、G-01758(日油(株)製、エポキシ基含有ポリマー)、OXT-101、OXT-121、OXT-212、OXT-221(以上、東亞合成(株)製、オキセタニル基含有モノマー)、OXE-10、OXE-30(以上、大阪有機化学工業(株)製、オキセタニル基含有モノマー)などが挙げられる。 Commercially available compounds having a cyclic ether group include Denacol EX-212L, EX-212, EX-214L, EX-214, EX-216L, EX-216, EX-321L, EX-321, EX-850L, EX -850 (manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation), ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC -7300, XD-1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), Celoxide 2021P, Celoxide 2081, Celoxide 2083, Celoxide 2085, EHPE3150, EPOLEAD PB 3600, PB 4700 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) Daicel), Cychromer P ACA 200M, ACA 230AA, ACA Z250, ACA Z251, ACA Z300, ACA Z320 (manufactured by Daicel Co., Ltd.), jER1031S, jER157S65, jER152, jER154, jER157S70 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.) ), Aron oxetane OXT-121, OXT-221, OX-SQ, PNOX (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), ADEKA GLYCIROL ED-505 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd., epoxy group-containing monomer), Proof G-0150M, G-0105SA, G-0130SP, G-0250SP, G-1005S, G-1005SA, G-1010S, G-2050M, G-01100, G-01758 (manufactured by NOF Corporation, epoxy group containing polymer), OXT-101, OXT-121, OXT-212, OXT-221 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., oxetanyl group-containing monomer), OXE-10, OXE-30 (above, Osaka Organic Chemical Industry ( Co., Ltd., oxetanyl group-containing monomer), and the like.
(樹脂)
 本発明の着色組成物は、硬化性化合物として樹脂を用いることができる。硬化性化合物は、樹脂を少なくとも含むものを用いることが好ましい。樹脂は、例えば、顔料等を着色組成物中で分散させる用途や、バインダーの用途で配合される。なお、主に顔料等を着色組成物中で分散させるために用いられる樹脂を分散剤ともいう。ただし、樹脂のこのような用途は一例であって、このような用途以外を目的として樹脂を使用することもできる。なお、重合性基を有する樹脂は、重合性化合物にも該当する。
(resin)
A resin can be used as a curable compound in the coloring composition of the present invention. It is preferable to use a curable compound containing at least a resin. The resin is blended, for example, for dispersing a pigment or the like in a coloring composition or as a binder. A resin mainly used for dispersing a pigment or the like in a coloring composition is also called a dispersant. However, such uses of the resin are only examples, and the resin can be used for purposes other than such uses. A resin having a polymerizable group also corresponds to a polymerizable compound.
 樹脂の重量平均分子量は、3000~2000000が好ましい。上限は、1000000以下が好ましく、500000以下がより好ましい。下限は、4000以上が好ましく、5000以上がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the resin is preferably 3,000 to 2,000,000. The upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, more preferably 500,000 or less. The lower limit is preferably 4000 or more, more preferably 5000 or more.
 樹脂としては、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、酢酸ビニル樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール樹脂、ポリビニルアセタール樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリウレア樹脂などが挙げられる。これらの樹脂から1種を単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を混合して使用してもよい。環状オレフィン樹脂としては、耐熱性向上の観点からノルボルネン樹脂が好ましい。ノルボルネン樹脂の市販品としては、例えば、JSR(株)製のARTONシリーズ(例えば、ARTON F4520)などが挙げられる。また、樹脂としては、国際公開第2016/088645号の実施例に記載された樹脂、特開2017-057265号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-032685号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-075248号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-066240号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-167513号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-173787号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-206689号公報の段落番号0041~0060に記載された樹脂、特開2018-010856号公報の段落番号0022~0071に記載された樹脂、特開2016-222891号公報に記載されたブロックポリイソシアネート樹脂、特開2020-122052号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-111656号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-139021号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-138503号公報に記載の主鎖に環構造を有する構成単位と側鎖にビフェニル基を有する構成単位とを含む樹脂を用いることもできる。また、樹脂としては、フルオレン骨格を有する樹脂を好ましく用いることもできる。フルオレン骨格を有する樹脂については、米国特許出願公開第2017/0102610号明細書の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、樹脂としては、特開2020-186373号公報の段落0199~0233に記載の樹脂、特開2020-186325号公報に記載のアルカリ可溶性樹脂、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0078339号公報に記載の式1で表される樹脂を用いることもできる。 Examples of resins include (meth)acrylic resins, epoxy resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, polyimide resins, Polyamide resins, polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, vinyl acetate resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinyl acetal resins, polyurethane resins, polyurea resins, and the like. One of these resins may be used alone, or two or more may be mixed and used. As the cyclic olefin resin, norbornene resin is preferable from the viewpoint of improving heat resistance. Commercially available norbornene resins include, for example, the ARTON series manufactured by JSR Corporation (for example, ARTON F4520). Further, as the resin, the resin described in the examples of International Publication No. 2016/088645, the resin described in JP-A-2017-057265, the resin described in JP-A-2017-032685, JP Resins described in JP-A-2017-075248, resins described in JP-A-2017-066240, resins described in JP-A-2017-167513, resins described in JP-A-2017-173787, Resins described in paragraph numbers 0041 to 0060 of JP-A-2017-206689, resins described in paragraph numbers 0022-0071 of JP-A-2018-010856, blocks described in JP-A-2016-222891 Polyisocyanate resin, resin described in JP-A-2020-122052, resin described in JP-A-2020-111656, resin described in JP-A-2020-139021, JP-A-2017-138503 A resin containing a structural unit having a ring structure in its main chain and a structural unit having a biphenyl group in its side chain as described in 1) can also be used. As the resin, a resin having a fluorene skeleton can also be preferably used. Regarding the resin having a fluorene skeleton, the description of US Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0102610 can be referred to, the content of which is incorporated herein. In addition, as the resin, the resin described in paragraphs 0199 to 0233 of JP-A-2020-186373, the alkali-soluble resin described in JP-A-2020-186325, and the Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0078339. A resin represented by the formula 1 can also be used.
 樹脂として、酸基を有する樹脂を用いることが好ましい。酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、リン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。これら酸基は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。酸基を有する樹脂は、例えば、アルカリ可溶性樹脂として用いることができる。酸基を有する樹脂の酸価は、30~500mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、50mgKOH/g以上が好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上がより好ましい。上限は、400mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、150mgKOH/g以下が更に好ましく、120mgKOH/g以下が最も好ましい。 It is preferable to use a resin having an acid group as the resin. Examples of acid groups include carboxy groups, phosphoric acid groups, sulfo groups, and phenolic hydroxy groups. Only one kind of these acid groups may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used. A resin having an acid group can be used, for example, as an alkali-soluble resin. The acid value of the resin having acid groups is preferably 30-500 mgKOH/g. The lower limit is preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 70 mgKOH/g or more. The upper limit is preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, still more preferably 150 mgKOH/g or less, and most preferably 120 mgKOH/g or less.
 樹脂としては、式(ED1)で示される化合物および/または式(ED2)で表される化合物(以下、これらの化合物を「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。)由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を含むことも好ましい。 As the resin, a resin containing a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the formula (ED1) and/or a compound represented by the formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as an "ether dimer"). It is also preferred to include
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
 式(ED1)中、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
 式(ED2)中、Rは、水素原子または炭素数1~30の有機基を表す。式(ED2)の具体例としては、特開2010-168539号公報の記載を参酌できる。
In formula (ED1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
In formula (ED2), R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. As a specific example of the formula (ED2), the description in JP-A-2010-168539 can be referred to.
 エーテルダイマーの具体例については、特開2013-029760号公報の段落番号0317を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 For specific examples of ether dimers, paragraph number 0317 of JP-A-2013-029760 can be referred to, the content of which is incorporated herein.
 樹脂としては、重合性基を有する樹脂を用いることも好ましい。重合性基は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基および環状エーテル基が挙げられる。 As the resin, it is also preferable to use a resin having a polymerizable group. Polymerizable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups.
 また、樹脂として、式(Ep-1)で表される繰り返し単位および式(Ep-2)で表される繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位(以下、繰り返し単位Epともいう)を有する樹脂(以下、樹脂Epともいう)を用いることもできる。上記樹脂Epは、式(Ep-1)で表される繰り返し単位および式(Ep-2)で表される繰り返し単位のうち、いずれか一方の繰り返し単位のみを含んでいてもよく、式(Ep-1)で表される繰り返し単位と式(Ep-2)で表される繰り返し単位のそれぞれを含んでいてもよい。両方の繰り返し単位を含む場合、式(Ep-1)で表される繰り返し単位と式(Ep-2)で表される繰り返し単位との比率は、モル比で、式(Ep-1)で表される繰り返し単位:式(Ep-2)で表される繰り返し単位=5:95~95:5であることが好ましく、10:90~90:10であることがより好ましく、20:80~80:20であることが更に好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Further, as the resin, at least one type of repeating unit (hereinafter also referred to as repeating unit Ep) selected from repeating units represented by formula (Ep-1) and repeating units represented by formula (Ep-2). A resin (hereinafter also referred to as resin Ep) can also be used. The resin Ep may contain only one of the repeating units represented by the formula (Ep-1) and the repeating unit represented by the formula (Ep-2). -1) and the repeating unit represented by formula (Ep-2) may be included. When both repeating units are included, the ratio of the repeating unit represented by the formula (Ep-1) to the repeating unit represented by the formula (Ep-2) is the molar ratio represented by the formula (Ep-1). Repeating unit: repeating unit represented by formula (Ep-2) = preferably 5:95 to 95:5, more preferably 10:90 to 90:10, 20:80 to 80 :20 is more preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
 式(Ep-1)、(Ep-2)中、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Rは水素原子または置換基を表す。Rが表す置換基としては、アルキル基およびアリール基が挙げられ、アルキル基であることが好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は1~10が好ましく、1~5が良い好ましく、1~3が更に好ましい。Rは、水素原子またはメチル基であることが好ましい。Lが表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。また、アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基などが挙げられる。 In formulas (Ep-1) and (Ep-2), L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. The substituent represented by R 1 includes an alkyl group and an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, more preferably 1-3. R 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. The divalent linking group represented by L 1 includes an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S- and groups formed by combining two or more of these. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched. Moreover, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. A hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, etc. are mentioned as a substituent.
 樹脂Ep中における上記繰り返し単位Epの含有量は、樹脂Epの全繰り返し単位中1~100モル%であることが好ましい。上限は90モル%以下であることが好ましく、80モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上が好ましく、3モル%以上がより好ましい。 The content of the repeating unit Ep in the resin Ep is preferably 1 to 100 mol% of all repeating units in the resin Ep. The upper limit is preferably 90 mol % or less, more preferably 80 mol % or less. The lower limit is preferably 2 mol % or more, more preferably 3 mol % or more.
 樹脂Epは、上記繰り返し単位Epの他に他の繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。他の繰り返し単位としては、酸基を有する繰り返し単位、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する繰り返し単位などが挙げられる。 The resin Ep may have other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit Ep. Other repeating units include a repeating unit having an acid group, a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, and the like.
 酸基としては、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられ、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基またはカルボキシ基であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基であることがより好ましい。 The acid group includes a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group, and a phosphoric acid group, preferably a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group, more preferably a carboxy group.
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、スチレン基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基等が挙げられる。 Examples of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups include vinyl groups, styrene groups, (meth)allyl groups, and (meth)acryloyl groups.
 樹脂Epが酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、樹脂Ep中における酸基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂Epの全繰り返し単位中5~85モル%であることが好ましい。上限は60モル%以下であることが好ましく、40モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、8モル%以上が好ましく、10モル%以上がより好ましい。 When the resin Ep contains a repeating unit having an acid group, the content of the repeating unit having an acid group in the resin Ep is preferably 5 to 85 mol% of all repeating units in the resin Ep. The upper limit is preferably 60 mol % or less, more preferably 40 mol % or less. The lower limit is preferably 8 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more.
 樹脂Epがエチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、樹脂Ep中におけるエチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂Epの全繰り返し単位中1~65モル%であることが好ましい。上限は45モル%以下であることが好ましく、30モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上が好ましく、3モル%以上がより好ましい。 When the resin Ep contains a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, the content of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the resin Ep is 1 to 65 mol% of the total repeating units of the resin Ep. is preferably The upper limit is preferably 45 mol % or less, more preferably 30 mol % or less. The lower limit is preferably 2 mol % or more, more preferably 3 mol % or more.
 樹脂Epは、更に芳香族炭化水素環を有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。芳香族炭化水素環としては、ベンゼン環またはナフタレン環であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環であることが好ましい。芳香族炭化水素環は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、アルキル基などが挙げられる。環状エーテル基を有する樹脂が、芳香族炭化水素環を有す繰り返し単位を含む場合、芳香族炭化水素環を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、環状エーテル基を有する樹脂の全繰り返し単位中1~65モル%であることが好ましい。上限は45モル%以下であることが好ましく、30モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上が好ましく、3モル%以上がより好ましい。芳香族炭化水素環を有す繰り返し単位としては、ビニルトルエン、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレートなどの芳香族炭化水素環を有する単官能の重合性化合物由来の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 The resin Ep preferably further contains a repeating unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring. The aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, more preferably a benzene ring. The aromatic hydrocarbon ring may have a substituent. An alkyl group etc. are mentioned as a substituent. When the resin having a cyclic ether group contains a repeating unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring, the content of the repeating unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring is 1 to 65 in all repeating units of the resin having a cyclic ether group. Mole % is preferred. The upper limit is preferably 45 mol % or less, more preferably 30 mol % or less. The lower limit is preferably 2 mol % or more, more preferably 3 mol % or more. Repeating units having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring include repeating units derived from monofunctional polymerizable compounds having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring, such as vinyl toluene and benzyl (meth)acrylate.
 樹脂としては、式(X)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を用いることも好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
 式中、Rは水素原子またはメチル基を表し、R21およびR22はそれぞれ独立してアルキレン基を表し、nは0~15の整数を表す。R21およびR22が表すアルキレン基の炭素数は1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましく、2または3であることが特に好ましい。nは0~15の整数を表し、0~5の整数であることが好ましく、0~4の整数であることがより好ましく、0~3の整数であることが更に好ましい。
As the resin, it is also preferable to use a resin containing a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by formula (X).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
In the formula, R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an alkylene group, and n represents an integer of 0-15. The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group represented by R 21 and R 22 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, even more preferably 1 to 3, particularly 2 or 3. preferable. n represents an integer of 0 to 15, preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and even more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
 式(X)で表される化合物としては、パラクミルフェノールのエチレンオキサイドまたはプロピレンオキサイド変性(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられる。市販品としては、アロニックスM-110(東亞合成(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by formula (X) include ethylene oxide- or propylene oxide-modified (meth)acrylate of paracumylphenol. Commercially available products include Aronix M-110 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
 樹脂としては、芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂(以下、樹脂Acともいう)を用いることも好ましい。樹脂Acにおいて、芳香族カルボキシ基は繰り返し単位の主鎖に含まれていてもよく、繰り返し単位の側鎖に含まれていてもよい。芳香族カルボキシ基は繰り返し単位の主鎖に含まれていることが好ましい。なお、本明細書において、芳香族カルボキシ基とは、芳香族環にカルボキシ基が1個以上結合した構造の基のことである。芳香族カルボキシ基において、芳香族環に結合したカルボキシ基の数は、1~4個であることが好ましく、1~2個であることがより好ましい。 As the resin, it is also preferable to use a resin having an aromatic carboxy group (hereinafter also referred to as resin Ac). In Resin Ac, the aromatic carboxy group may be contained in the main chain of the repeating unit or may be contained in the side chain of the repeating unit. The aromatic carboxy group is preferably contained in the main chain of the repeating unit. In this specification, an aromatic carboxy group is a group having a structure in which one or more carboxy groups are bonded to an aromatic ring. In the aromatic carboxy group, the number of carboxy groups bonded to the aromatic ring is preferably 1-4, more preferably 1-2.
 樹脂Acは、式(Ac-1)で表される繰り返し単位および式(Ac-2)で表される繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
 式(Ac-1)中、Arは芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基を表し、Lは、-COO-または-CONH-を表し、Lは、2価の連結基を表す。
 式(Ac-2)中、Ar10は芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基を表し、L11は、-COO-または-CONH-を表し、L12は3価の連結基を表し、P10はポリマー鎖を表す。
Resin Ac is preferably a resin containing at least one repeating unit selected from repeating units represented by formula (Ac-1) and repeating units represented by formula (Ac-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
In formula (Ac-1), Ar 1 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxyl group, L 1 represents -COO- or -CONH-, and L 2 represents a divalent linking group.
In formula (Ac-2), Ar 10 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxyl group, L 11 represents -COO- or -CONH-, L 12 represents a trivalent linking group, P 10 represents a polymer represents a chain.
 式(Ac-1)においてArが表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基としては、芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物から由来する構造、芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物から由来する構造などが挙げられる。芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物および芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物としては、下記構造の化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
Examples of the aromatic carboxy group-containing group represented by Ar 1 in formula (Ac-1) include structures derived from aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydrides, structures derived from aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydrides, and the like. Aromatic tricarboxylic anhydrides and aromatic tetracarboxylic anhydrides include compounds having the following structures.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
 上記式中、Qは、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-COOCHCHOCO-、-SO-、-C(CF-、下記式(Q-1)で表される基または下記式(Q-2)で表される基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
In the above formula, Q 1 is a single bond, -O-, -CO-, -COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, represented by the following formula (Q-1) or a group represented by the following formula (Q-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
 Arが表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基は、重合性基を有していてもよい。重合性基は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基および環状エーテル基であることが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基であることがより好ましい。Arが表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基の具体例としては、式(Ar-11)で表される基、式(Ar-12)で表される基、式(Ar-13)で表される基などが挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
The group containing an aromatic carboxyl group represented by Ar 1 may have a polymerizable group. The polymerizable group is preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and a cyclic ether group, more preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. Specific examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 1 include a group represented by formula (Ar-11), a group represented by formula (Ar-12), and a group represented by formula (Ar-13). and the like.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
 式(Ar-11)中、n1は1~4の整数を表し、1または2であることが好ましく、2であることがより好ましい。
 式(Ar-12)中、n2は1~8の整数を表し、1~4の整数であることが好ましく、1または2であることがより好ましく、2であることが更に好ましい。
 式(Ar-13)中、n3およびn4はそれぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、0~2の整数であることが好ましく、1または2であることがより好ましく、1であることが更に好ましい。ただし、n3およびn4の少なくとも一方は1以上の整数である。
 式(Ar-13)中、Qは、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-COOCHCHOCO-、-SO-、-C(CF-、上記式(Q-1)で表される基または上記式(Q-2)で表される基を表す。
 式(Ar-11)~(Ar-13)中、*1はLとの結合位置を表す。
In formula (Ar-11), n1 represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably 1 or 2, more preferably 2.
In formula (Ar-12), n2 represents an integer of 1 to 8, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2, and still more preferably 2.
In formula (Ar-13), n3 and n4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 1 or 2, preferably 1 More preferred. However, at least one of n3 and n4 is an integer of 1 or more.
In formula (Ar-13), Q 1 is a single bond, -O-, -CO-, -COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, the above formula (Q- 1) or a group represented by the above formula (Q-2).
In formulas (Ar-11) to (Ar-13), * 1 represents the bonding position with L1.
 式(Ac-1)においてLは、-COO-または-CONH-を表し、-COO-を表すことが好ましい。 In formula (Ac-1), L 1 represents -COO- or -CONH-, preferably -COO-.
 式(Ac-1)においてLが表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-、-S-およびこれらの2種以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。アルキレン基およびアリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。Lが表す2価の連結基は、-L2a-O-で表される基であることが好ましい。L2aは、アルキレン基;アリーレン基;アルキレン基とアリーレン基とを組み合わせた基;アルキレン基およびアリーレン基から選ばれる少なくとも1種と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-および-S-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせた基などが挙げられ、アルキレン基であることが好ましい。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキレン基およびアリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。 The divalent linking group represented by L 2 in formula (Ac-1) includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S- and these A group obtained by combining two or more of The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-15. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The arylene group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. An alkylene group and an arylene group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent. The divalent linking group represented by L 2 is preferably a group represented by -L 2a -O-. L 2a is an alkylene group; an arylene group; a group in which an alkylene group and an arylene group are combined; at least one selected from an alkylene group and an arylene group; Examples include groups in which at least one selected from —NH— and —S— are combined, and alkylene groups are preferred. The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-15. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. An alkylene group and an arylene group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent.
 式(Ac-2)においてAr10が表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基としては、式(Ac-1)のArと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 The group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 10 in formula (Ac-2) has the same meaning as Ar 1 in formula (Ac-1), and the preferred range is also the same.
 式(Ac-2)においてL11は、-COO-または-CONH-を表し、-COO-を表すことが好ましい。 In formula (Ac-2), L 11 represents -COO- or -CONH-, preferably -COO-.
 式(Ac-2)においてL12が表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-、-S-およびこれらの2種以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。炭化水素基は、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられる。脂肪族炭化水素基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。芳香族炭化水素基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。炭化水素基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。L12が表す3価の連結基は、式(L12-1)で表される基であることが好ましく、式(L12-2)で表される基であることがより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
The trivalent linking group represented by L 12 in formula (Ac-2) includes a hydrocarbon group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S- and 2 of these Groups in which more than one species are combined are included. Hydrocarbon groups include aliphatic hydrocarbon groups and aromatic hydrocarbon groups. The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-15. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The number of carbon atoms in the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 6-30, more preferably 6-20, even more preferably 6-10. The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent. The trivalent linking group represented by L 12 is preferably a group represented by formula (L12-1), more preferably a group represented by formula (L12-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
 式(L12-1)中、L12bは3価の連結基を表し、XはSを表し、*1は式(Ac-2)のL11との結合位置を表し、*2は式(Ac-2)のP10との結合位置を表す。L12bが表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基;炭化水素基と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-および-S-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせた基などが挙げられ、炭化水素基または炭化水素基と-O-とを組み合わせた基であることが好ましい。 In formula (L12-1), L 12b represents a trivalent linking group, X 1 represents S, *1 represents the bonding position with L 11 of formula (Ac-2), *2 represents formula ( The binding position of Ac- 2 ) with P10 is shown. The trivalent linking group represented by L 12b includes a hydrocarbon group; and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH- and -S- and the like, and a hydrocarbon group or a group of a combination of a hydrocarbon group and —O— is preferred.
 式(L12-2)中、L12cは3価の連結基を表し、XはSを表し、*1は式(Ac-2)のL11との結合位置を表し、*2は式(Ac-2)のP10との結合位置を表す。L12cが表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基;炭化水素基と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-および-S-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせた基などが挙げられ、炭化水素基であることが好ましい。 In formula (L12-2), L 12c represents a trivalent linking group, X 1 represents S, *1 represents the bonding position with L 11 of formula (Ac-2), *2 represents formula ( The binding position of Ac- 2 ) with P10 is shown. The trivalent linking group represented by L 12c includes a hydrocarbon group; and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH- and -S- and the like, preferably a hydrocarbon group.
 式(Ac-2)においてP10はポリマー鎖を表す。P10が表すポリマー鎖は、ポリ(メタ)アクリル繰り返し単位、ポリエーテル繰り返し単位、ポリエステル繰り返し単位およびポリオール繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。ポリマー鎖P10の重量平均分子量は500~20000が好ましい。下限は1000以上が好ましい。上限は10000以下が好ましく、5000以下がより好ましく、3000以下が更に好ましい。P10の重量平均分子量が上記範囲であれば組成物中における顔料の分散性が良好である。芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂が式(Ac-2)で表される繰り返し単位を有する樹脂である場合は、この樹脂は分散剤として好ましく用いられる。 P 10 in formula (Ac-2) represents a polymer chain. The polymer chain represented by P10 preferably has at least one repeating unit selected from poly(meth)acrylic repeating units, polyether repeating units, polyester repeating units and polyol repeating units. The weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain P10 is preferably 500-20,000 . The lower limit is preferably 1000 or more. The upper limit is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, even more preferably 3,000 or less. If the weight average molecular weight of P10 is within the above range, the dispersibility of the pigment in the composition is good. When the resin having an aromatic carboxyl group is a resin having repeating units represented by formula (Ac-2), this resin is preferably used as a dispersant.
 P10が表すポリマー鎖は、重合性基を含んでいてもよい。重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基および環状エーテル基が挙げられる。 The polymer chain represented by P10 may contain a polymerizable group. Polymerizable groups include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups.
 本発明の着色組成物は、分散剤としての樹脂を含有することが好ましい。分散剤としては、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)が挙げられる。ここで、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)とは、酸基の量が塩基性基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、酸基の量が70モル%以上である樹脂が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)が有する酸基は、カルボキシ基が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)の酸価は、10~105mgKOH/gが好ましい。また、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)とは、塩基性基の量が酸基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、塩基性基の量が50モル%を超える樹脂が好ましい。塩基性分散剤が有する塩基性基は、アミノ基が好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin as a dispersant. Dispersants include acidic dispersants (acidic resins) and basic dispersants (basic resins). Here, the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is greater than the amount of basic groups. As the acidic dispersant (acidic resin), a resin having an acid group content of 70 mol % or more is preferable when the total amount of the acid group and the basic group is 100 mol %. The acid group possessed by the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxy group. The acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10-105 mgKOH/g. Further, a basic dispersant (basic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups. As the basic dispersant (basic resin), a resin containing more than 50 mol % of basic groups is preferable when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol %. The basic group possessed by the basic dispersant is preferably an amino group.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、グラフト樹脂であることも好ましい。グラフト樹脂の詳細については、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0025~0094の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a graft resin. For details of the graft resin, reference can be made to paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP-A-2012-255128, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に窒素原子を含むポリイミン系分散剤であることも好ましい。ポリイミン系分散剤としては、pKa14以下の官能基を有する部分構造を有する主鎖と、原子数40~10000の側鎖とを有し、かつ主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に塩基性窒素原子を有する樹脂が好ましい。塩基性窒素原子は、塩基性を呈する窒素原子であれば特に制限はない。ポリイミン系分散剤については、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0102~0166の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a polyimine-based dispersant containing nitrogen atoms in at least one of its main chain and side chains. The polyimine-based dispersant has a main chain having a partial structure having a functional group with a pKa of 14 or less and a side chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms, and at least one of the main chain and the side chain has a basic nitrogen atom. A resin having The basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it is a nitrogen atom exhibiting basicity. Regarding the polyimine-based dispersant, the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0166 of JP-A-2012-255128 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、コア部に複数個のポリマー鎖が結合した構造の樹脂であることも好ましい。このような樹脂としては、例えば、デンドリマー(星型ポリマーを含む)が挙げられる。また、デンドリマーの具体例としては、特開2013-043962号公報の段落番号0196~0209に記載された高分子化合物C-1~C-31などが挙げられる。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin having a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core. Such resins include, for example, dendrimers (including star polymers). Further, specific examples of dendrimers include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP-A-2013-043962.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂の全繰り返し単位中10モル%以上であることが好ましく、10~80モル%であることがより好ましく、20~70モル%であることが更に好ましい。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in its side chain. The content of repeating units having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 20 to 70, of the total repeating units of the resin. More preferably, it is mol %.
 また、分散剤として、特開2018-087939号公報に記載された樹脂、特許第6432077号公報の段落番号0219~0221に記載されたブロック共重合体(EB-1)~(EB-9)、国際公開第2016/104803号に記載のポリエステル側鎖を有するポリエチレンイミン、国際公開第2019/125940号に記載のブロック共重合体、特開2020-066687号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマー、特開2020-066688号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマー、国際公開第2016/104803号に記載の分散剤などを用いることもできる。 Further, as a dispersant, resins described in JP-A-2018-087939, block copolymers (EB-1) to (EB-9) described in paragraphs 0219 to 0221 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077, Polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in International Publication No. 2016/104803, a block copolymer described in International Publication No. 2019/125940, a block polymer having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A-2020-066687 , a block polymer having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A-2020-066688, a dispersant described in WO 2016/104803, and the like can also be used.
 分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、ビックケミー社製のDisperbykシリーズ(例えば、Disperbyk-111、161、2001など)、日本ルーブリゾール(株)製のソルスパースシリーズ(例えば、ソルスパース20000、76500など)、味の素ファインテクノ(株)製のアジスパーシリーズ等が挙げられる。また、特開2012-137564号公報の段落番号0129に記載された製品、特開2017-194662号公報の段落番号0235に記載された製品を分散剤として用いることもできる。 Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples thereof include Disperbyk series manufactured by BYK-Chemie (e.g., Disperbyk-111, 161, 2001, etc.), Solsperse manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. series (for example, Solsperse 20000, 76500, etc.), Ajinomoto Fine-Techno Co., Inc. Ajisper series, and the like. In addition, the product described in paragraph number 0129 of JP-A-2012-137564 and the product described in paragraph number 0235 of JP-A-2017-194662 can also be used as a dispersant.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における硬化性化合物の含有量は、1~70質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、2質量%以上であることが好ましく、3質量%以上であることがより好ましく、5質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、65質量%以下であることが好ましく、60質量%以下であることがより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、硬化性化合物を、1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。硬化性化合物を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the curable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 70% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of curable compound, or may contain two or more kinds of curable compounds. When two or more curable compounds are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
 着色組成物が硬化性化合物として重合性化合物を含む場合、重合性化合物の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中1~70質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、2質量%以上であることが好ましく、3質量%以上であることがより好ましく、5質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、65質量%以下であることが好ましく、60質量%以下であることがより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物を、1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。重合性化合物を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 When the coloring composition contains a polymerizable compound as a curable compound, the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 1 to 70% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. The lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one polymerizable compound, or may contain two or more polymerizable compounds. When two or more polymerizable compounds are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
 着色組成物が硬化性化合物として重合性モノマーを含む場合、重合性モノマーの含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中1~50質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、2質量%以上であることが好ましく、3質量%以上であることがより好ましく、5質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、35質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、20質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、重合性モノマーを、1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。重合性モノマーを2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 When the coloring composition contains a polymerizable monomer as a curable compound, the content of the polymerizable monomer is preferably 1 to 50% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. The lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 35% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less, and even more preferably 20% by mass or less. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one polymerizable monomer, or may contain two or more polymerizable monomers. When two or more polymerizable monomers are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
 本発明の着色組成物が硬化性化合物として樹脂を含む場合、樹脂の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中1~70質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、2質量%以上であることが好ましく、3質量%以上であることがより好ましく、5質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、65質量%以下であることが好ましく、60質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
 また、酸基を有する樹脂の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中1~70質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、2質量%以上であることが好ましく、3質量%以上であることがより好ましく、5質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、65質量%以下であることが好ましく、60質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
 また、アルカリ可溶性樹脂の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中1~70質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、2質量%以上であることが好ましく、3質量%以上であることがより好ましく、5質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、65質量%以下であることが好ましく、60質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
 本発明の着色組成物が分散剤としての樹脂を含有する場合、分散剤としての樹脂の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.1~30質量%が好ましい。上限は、25質量%以下が好ましく、20質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上が好ましく、1質量%以上が更に好ましい。また、分散剤としての樹脂の含有量は、顔料100質量部に対して、1~100質量部が好ましい。上限は、80質量部以下であることが好ましく、70質量部以下であることがより好ましく、60質量部以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、5質量部以上であることが好ましく、10質量部以上であることがより好ましく、20質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。
 本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂を、1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。樹脂を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin as a curable compound, the content of the resin is preferably 1 to 70 wt% of the total solid content of the coloring composition. The lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less.
Also, the content of the resin having an acid group is preferably 1 to 70 mass% of the total solid content of the coloring composition. The lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less.
Also, the content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1 to 70% by mass of the total solid content of the coloring composition. The lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less.
When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin as a dispersant, the content of the resin as a dispersant is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. The upper limit is preferably 25% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more. Also, the content of the resin as a dispersant is preferably 1 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. The upper limit is preferably 80 parts by mass or less, more preferably 70 parts by mass or less, and even more preferably 60 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more, and even more preferably 20 parts by mass or more.
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one resin, or may contain two or more resins. When two or more resins are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
 本発明の着色組成物が硬化性化合物として重合性モノマーと樹脂を含む場合、重合性モノマーの含有量は、樹脂100質量部に対して30~150質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、130質量部以下であることが好ましく、110質量部以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、40質量部以上であることが好ましく、50質量部以上であることがより好ましい。 When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable monomer and a resin as curable compounds, the content of the polymerizable monomer is preferably 30 to 150 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin. The upper limit is preferably 130 parts by mass or less, more preferably 110 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 40 parts by mass or more, more preferably 50 parts by mass or more.
<<他の着色剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、上述した特定色素多量体以外の着色剤(他の着色剤)をさらに含有することができる。他の着色剤としては、緑色着色剤、赤色着色剤、黄色着色剤、紫色着色剤、青色着色剤、オレンジ色着色剤などの有彩色着色剤が挙げられる。他の着色剤は、緑色着色剤、赤色着色剤および黄色着色剤から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、緑色着色剤であることがより好ましい。他の着色剤は、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよいが、顔料であることが好ましい。
<<Other coloring agents>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can further contain a coloring agent (another coloring agent) other than the specific dye multimer described above. Other colorants include chromatic colorants such as green colorants, red colorants, yellow colorants, violet colorants, blue colorants, orange colorants, and the like. The other coloring agent is preferably at least one selected from a green coloring agent, a red coloring agent and a yellow coloring agent, more preferably a green coloring agent. Other coloring agents may be pigments or dyes, but are preferably pigments.
 顔料の平均一次粒子径は、1~200nmが好ましい。下限は5nm以上が好ましく、10nm以上がより好ましい。上限は、180nm以下が好ましく、150nm以下がより好ましく、100nm以下が更に好ましい。なお、本明細書において、顔料の一次粒子径は、顔料の一次粒子を透過型電子顕微鏡により観察し、得られた画像写真から求めることができる。具体的には、顔料の一次粒子の投影面積を求め、それに対応する円相当径を顔料の一次粒子径として算出する。また、本明細書における平均一次粒子径は、400個の顔料の一次粒子についての一次粒子径の算術平均値とする。また、顔料の一次粒子とは、凝集のない独立した粒子をいう。 The average primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 1 to 200 nm. The lower limit is preferably 5 nm or more, more preferably 10 nm or more. The upper limit is preferably 180 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, and even more preferably 100 nm or less. In addition, in this specification, the primary particle diameter of the pigment can be determined from the image photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment with a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is obtained, and the corresponding circle equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment. Further, the average primary particle size in this specification is the arithmetic mean value of the primary particle sizes of 400 primary particles of the pigment. Further, the primary particles of the pigment refer to independent particles without agglomeration.
 緑色着色剤としては、フタロシアニン化合物およびスクアリリウム化合物が挙げられ、フタロシアニン化合物であることが好ましい。また、緑色着色剤は顔料であることが好ましく、フタロシアニン顔料であることがより好ましく、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料であることが更に好ましい。緑色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7,10,36,37,58,59,62,63,64,65,66等の緑色顔料が挙げられる。また、緑色着色剤として、1分子中のハロゲン原子数が平均10~14個であり、臭素原子数が平均8~12個であり、塩素原子数が平均2~5個であるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/118720号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。また、緑色着色剤として中国特許出願第106909027号明細書に記載の化合物、国際公開第2012/102395号に記載のリン酸エステルを配位子として有するフタロシアニン化合物、特開2019-008014号公報に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2018-180023号公報に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2019-038958号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-070426号公報に記載のアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物、特開2020-076995号公報に記載のコアシェル型色素、特表2020-504758号公報に記載のジアリールメタン化合物などを用いることもできる。 Examples of green colorants include phthalocyanine compounds and squarylium compounds, with phthalocyanine compounds being preferred. The green colorant is preferably a pigment, more preferably a phthalocyanine pigment, and even more preferably a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment. Specific examples of green colorants include C.I. I. Green pigments such as Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65 and 66 are included. Further, as a green colorant, a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine having an average number of halogen atoms of 10 to 14, an average number of bromine atoms of 8 to 12, and an average number of chlorine atoms of 2 to 5 per molecule. Pigments can also be used. Specific examples include compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720. In addition, as a green colorant, the compound described in Chinese Patent Application No. 106909027, the phthalocyanine compound having a phosphoric acid ester as a ligand described in WO 2012/102395, described in JP 2019-008014. The phthalocyanine compound, the phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A-2018-180023, the compound described in JP-A-2019-038958, the aluminum phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A-2020-070426, JP-A-2020-076995 Core-shell type dyes described in, diarylmethane compounds described in JP-A-2020-504758, and the like can also be used.
 緑色着色剤は、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7,36,58,59,62,63が好ましく、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7,36,58,59がより好ましい。 The green coloring agent is C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, 36, 58, 59, 62 and 63 are preferred, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, 36, 58 and 59 are more preferred.
 赤色着色剤としては、ジケトピロロピロール化合物、アントラキノン化合物、アゾ化合物、ナフトール化合物、アゾメチン化合物、キサンテン化合物、キナクリドン化合物、ペリレン化合物、チオインジゴ化合物などが挙げられる。赤色着色剤は顔料であることが好ましく、ジケトピロロピロール顔料、アントラキノン顔料、アゾ顔料、ナフトール顔料、アゾメチン顔料、キサンテン顔料、キナクリドン顔料、ペリレン顔料、チオインジゴ顔料であることがより好ましく、ジケトピロロピロール顔料、アントラキノン顔料、アゾ顔料であることが更に好ましく、ジケトピロロピロール顔料であることが特に好ましい。赤色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.(カラーインデックス)ピグメントレッド1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,269,270,272,279,291,294,295,296,297等の赤色顔料が挙げられる。また、赤色着色剤として、特開2017-201384号公報に記載の構造中に少なくとも1つの臭素原子が置換したジケトピロロピロール化合物、特許第6248838号の段落番号0016~0022に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、国際公開第2012/102399号に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、国際公開第2012/117965号に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、特開2020-085947号公報に記載の臭素化ジケトピロロピロール化合物、特開2012-229344号公報に記載のナフトールアゾ化合物、特許第6516119号公報に記載の赤色着色剤、特許第6525101号公報に記載の赤色着色剤、特開2020-090632号公報の段落番号0229に記載の臭素化ジケトピロロピロール化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0140741号公報に記載のアントラキノン化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0140744号公報に記載のアントラキノン化合物、特開2020-079396号公報に記載のペリレン化合物、特開2020-083982号公報に記載のペリレン化合物、特開2018-035345号公報に記載のキサンテン化合物、特開2020-066702号公報の段落番号0025~0041に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物などを用いることもできる。また、赤色着色剤として、芳香族環に対して、酸素原子、硫黄原子または窒素原子が結合した基が導入された芳香族環基がジケトピロロピロール骨格に結合した構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。赤色着色剤として、Lumogen F Orange 240(BASF製、赤色顔料、ペリレン顔料)を用いることもできる。 Examples of red colorants include diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, azo compounds, naphthol compounds, azomethine compounds, xanthene compounds, quinacridone compounds, perylene compounds, and thioindigo compounds. The red colorant is preferably a pigment, more preferably a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment, anthraquinone pigment, azo pigment, naphthol pigment, azomethine pigment, xanthene pigment, quinacridone pigment, perylene pigment or thioindigo pigment. Pyrrole pigments, anthraquinone pigments and azo pigments are more preferred, and diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments are particularly preferred. Specific examples of red colorants include C.I. I. (Color Index) Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48:4, 49, 49:1, 49:2, 52:1, 52:2, 53:1, 57:1, 60:1, 63:1, 66, 67, 81:1, 81:2, 81: 3, 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184, 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 269, 270, 272, 279, 291, 294, 295, 296, 297 and other red pigments. Further, as a red colorant, a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound in which at least one bromine atom is substituted in the structure described in JP-A-2017-201384, a diketopyrrolopyrrole described in paragraphs 0016 to 0022 of Japanese Patent No. 6248838 Pyrrole compounds, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds described in WO 2012/102399, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds described in WO 2012/117965, brominated diketopyrrolo described in JP 2020-085947 Pyrrole compound, naphthol azo compound described in JP-A-2012-229344, red coloring agent described in JP-A-6516119, red coloring agent described in JP-A-6525101, paragraph of JP-A-2020-090632 Brominated diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds described in No. 0229, anthraquinone compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0140741, anthraquinone compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0140744, JP 2020 -Perylene compounds described in JP-A-079396, perylene compounds described in JP-A-2020-083982, xanthene compounds described in JP-A-2018-035345, paragraph numbers 0025 to 0041 of JP-A-2020-066702 The described diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds and the like can also be used. Also, as a red colorant, a compound having a structure in which an aromatic ring group in which a group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom is bonded to an aromatic ring is bonded to a diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton is used. can also Lumogen F Orange 240 (manufactured by BASF, red pigment, perylene pigment) can also be used as a red colorant.
 赤色着色剤は、C.I.ピグメントレッド122,177,179,254,255,264,269,272,291が好ましく、C.I.ピグメントレッド254,264,272がより好ましい。 The red coloring agent is C.I. I. Pigment Red 122, 177, 179, 254, 255, 264, 269, 272 and 291 are preferred, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 254, 264, 272 are more preferred.
 黄色着色剤としては、アゾ化合物、アゾメチン化合物、イソインドリン化合物、プテリジン化合物、キノフタロン化合物およびペリレン化合物などが挙げられる。黄色着色剤は、顔料であることが好ましく、アゾ顔料、アゾメチン顔料、イソインドリン顔料、プテリジン顔料、キノフタロン顔料またはペリレン顔料であることがより好ましく、イソインドリン顔料またはアゾ顔料であることが更に好ましい。黄色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントイエロー1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,215,228,231,232,233,234,235,236等の黄色顔料が挙げられる。 Examples of yellow colorants include azo compounds, azomethine compounds, isoindoline compounds, pteridine compounds, quinophthalone compounds and perylene compounds. The yellow colorant is preferably a pigment, more preferably an azo pigment, an azomethine pigment, an isoindoline pigment, a pteridine pigment, a quinophthalone pigment or a perylene pigment, and even more preferably an isoindoline pigment or an azo pigment. Specific examples of yellow colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 179, 180, 181, 182, 185, 187, 188, 193, 194, 199, 213, 214, 215, 228, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236 and other yellow pigments.
 また、黄色着色剤として、下記構造のアゾバルビツール酸ニッケル錯体を用いることもできる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
In addition, as a yellow colorant, an azobarbiturate nickel complex having the following structure can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
 また、黄色着色剤として、特開2017-201003号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-197719号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-171912号公報の段落番号0011~0062、0137~0276に記載の化合物、特開2017-171913号公報の段落番号0010~0062、0138~0295に記載の化合物、特開2017-171914号公報の段落番号0011~0062、0139~0190に記載の化合物、特開2017-171915号公報の段落番号0010~0065、0142~0222に記載の化合物、特開2013-054339号公報の段落番号0011~0034に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-026228号公報の段落番号0013~0058に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-062644号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物、特開2018-203798号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-062578号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特許第6432076号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-155881号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-111757号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-040835号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2017-197640号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2016-145282号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-085565号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-021139号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-209614号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-209435号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-181015号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-061622号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-032486号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2012-226110号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-074987号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-081565号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-074986号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-074985号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-050420号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-031281号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特公昭48-032765号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2019-008014号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特許第6607427号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2014-0034963号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-095706号公報に記載の化合物、台湾特許出願公開第201920495号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6607427号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-033525号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-033524号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-033523号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-033522号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-033521号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2020/045200号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2020/045199号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2020/045197号に記載の化合物、特開2020-093994号公報に記載のアゾ化合物、国際公開第2020/105346号に記載のペリレン化合物、特表2020-517791号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、下記式(QP1)で表される化合物、下記式(QP2)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。また、これらの化合物を多量体化したものも、色価向上の観点から好ましく用いられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Further, as a yellow colorant, compounds described in JP-A-2017-201003, compounds described in JP-A-2017-197719, paragraphs 0011-0062, 0137-0276 of JP-A-2017-171912 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0010 to 0062 and 0138 to 0295 of JP-A-2017-171913, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0011-0062 and 0139-0190 of JP-A-2017-171914, JP 2017 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0010 to 0065 and 0142 to 0222 of JP-A-171915, quinophthalone compounds described in paragraph numbers 0011 to 0034 of JP-A-2013-054339, paragraph numbers 0013- of JP-A-2014-026228 0058, the isoindoline compound described in JP-A-2018-062644, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-203798, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-062578, and the patent No. 6432076. Quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2018-155881, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2018-111757, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2018-040835, JP-A-2017 -Quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-197640, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2016-145282, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2014-085565, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2014-021139, in particular Quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2013-209614, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2013-209435, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2013-181015, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2013-061622 , the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2013-032486, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2012-226110, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-074987, the JP-A-2008-081565. Quinophthalone compounds, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2008-074986, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2008-074985, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2008-050420, JP-A Quinophthalone compounds described in 2008-031281, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-B-48-032765, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2019-008014, quinophthalone compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6607427, published in Korea Compounds described in Patent No. 10-2014-0034963, compounds described in JP 2017-095706, compounds described in Taiwan Patent Application Publication No. 201920495, compounds described in Patent No. 6607427, Compounds described in JP-A-2020-033525, compounds described in JP-A-2020-033524, compounds described in JP-A-2020-033523, compounds described in JP-A-2020-033522, JP-A-2020 - compound described in WO 2020/045200, compound described in WO 2020/045199, compound described in WO 2020/045197, JP 2020-093994 Azo compound described in the publication, a perylene compound described in International Publication No. 2020/105346, a quinophthalone compound described in JP 2020-517791, a compound represented by the following formula (QP1), the following formula (QP2) A compound represented by can also be used. Moreover, those obtained by polymerizing these compounds are also preferably used from the viewpoint of improving the color value.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
 式(QP1)中、X~X16は各々独立に水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、Zは炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表す。式(QP1)で表される化合物の具体例としては、特許第6443711号公報の段落番号0016に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
In formula (QP1), X 1 to X 16 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and Z 1 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (QP1) include compounds described in paragraph 0016 of Japanese Patent No. 6443711.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
 式(QP2)中、Y~Yは、それぞれ独立にハロゲン原子を示す。n、mは0~6の整数、pは0~5の整数を表す。(n+m)は1以上である。式(QP2)で表される化合物の具体例としては、特許6432077号公報の段落番号0047~0048に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。 In formula (QP2), Y 1 to Y 3 each independently represent a halogen atom. n and m are integers from 0 to 6; p is an integer from 0 to 5; (n+m) is 1 or more. Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (QP2) include compounds described in paragraphs 0047 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077.
 黄色着色剤は、C.I.ピグメントイエロー117,129,138,139,150,185が好ましい。 The yellow coloring agent is C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 117, 129, 138, 139, 150 and 185 are preferred.
 オレンジ色着色剤しては、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等のオレンジ色顔料が挙げられる。 As an orange coloring agent, C.I. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. of orange pigments.
 紫色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61等の紫色顔料が挙げられる。 As a purple colorant, C.I. I. Purple pigments such as Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, 60, 61 are included.
 青色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントブルー1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88等が挙げられる。また、青色着色剤として、リン原子を有するアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2012-247591号公報の段落番号0022~0030、特開2011-157478号公報の段落番号0047に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 As a blue colorant, C.I. I. pigment blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 22, 29, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80, 87, 88, etc. be done. An aluminum phthalocyanine compound having a phosphorus atom can also be used as a blue colorant. Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0030 of JP-A-2012-247591 and paragraph number 0047 of JP-A-2011-157478.
 他の着色剤には、染料を用いることもできる。染料としては特に制限はなく、公知の染料が使用できる。例えば、ピラゾールアゾ系、アニリノアゾ系、トリアリールメタン系、アントラキノン系、アントラピリドン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系、キサンテン系、フタロシアニン系、ベンゾピラン系、インジゴ系、ピロメテン系等の染料が挙げられる。 Dyes can also be used as other coloring agents. The dye is not particularly limited, and known dyes can be used. For example, pyrazole azo, anilinoazo, triarylmethane, anthraquinone, anthrapyridone, benzylidene, oxonol, pyrazolotriazole azo, pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine, xanthene, Phthalocyanine-based, benzopyran-based, indigo-based, and pyrromethene-based dyes can be used.
 他の着色剤には、特表2020-504758号公報に記載のジアリールメタン化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0028160号公報に記載されたトリアリールメタン染料ポリマー、特開2020-117638号公報に記載のキサンテン化合物、国際公開第2020/174991号に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2020-160279号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物又はそれらの塩、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069442号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069730号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069070号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069067号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069062号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、特許第6809649号に記載のハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料、特開2020-180176号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物を用いることができる。有彩色着色剤は、ロタキサンであってもよく、色素骨格はロタキサンの環状構造に使用されていてもよく、棒状構造に使用されていてもよく、両方の構造に使用されていてもよい。 Other colorants include diarylmethane compounds described in JP-A-2020-504758, triarylmethane dye polymers described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0028160, and JP-A-2020-117638. Xanthene compounds described, phthalocyanine compounds described in International Publication No. 2020/174991, isoindoline compounds described in JP-A-2020-160279 or salts thereof, Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069442 described Compound represented by Formula 1, compound represented by Formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069730, represented by Formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069070 Compounds, compounds represented by Formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069067, compounds represented by Formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069062, Patent No. 6809649 and the isoindoline compound described in JP-A-2020-180176. The chromatic colorant may be a rotaxane, and the dye skeleton may be used in the cyclic structure of the rotaxane, may be used in the rod-like structure, or may be used in both structures.
 他の着色剤は2種以上組み合わせて用いてもよい。また、他の着色剤を2種以上組み合わせて用いる場合、上述した特定色素多量体と、2種以上の他の着色剤との組み合わせで黒色を形成していてもよい。このような着色組成物は赤外線透過フィルタ形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いられる。上述した特定色素多量体と、2種以上の他の着色剤の組み合わせで黒色を形成する場合の、2種以上の他の着色剤の組み合わせとしては、例えば、以下の(1)~(5)の組み合わせが挙げられる。
 (1)赤色着色剤と青色着色剤とを含有する態様。
 (2)赤色着色剤と青色着色剤と紫色着色剤とを含有する態様。
 (3)赤色着色剤と青色着色剤と紫色着色剤と緑色着色剤とを含有する態様。
 (4)赤色着色剤と青色着色剤と緑色着色剤とを含有する態様。
 (5)(1)~(4)において、更に黄色着色剤を含有する態様。
Other colorants may be used in combination of two or more. Further, when two or more other colorants are used in combination, black color may be formed by the combination of the specific dye multimer and two or more other colorants. Such a colored composition is preferably used as a colored composition for forming an infrared transmission filter. In the case of forming a black color by combining the specific dye multimer described above and two or more other colorants, the combination of two or more other colorants includes, for example, the following (1) to (5) A combination of
(1) A mode containing a red colorant and a blue colorant.
(2) A mode containing a red colorant, a blue colorant, and a purple colorant.
(3) A mode containing a red colorant, a blue colorant, a purple colorant, and a green colorant.
(4) A mode containing a red colorant, a blue colorant, and a green colorant.
(5) In (1) to (4), an embodiment further containing a yellow colorant.
 他の着色剤は、フタロシアニン顔料、ジオキサジン顔料、キナクリドン顔料、アントラキノン顔料、ペリレン顔料、アゾ顔料、アゾメチン顔料、ジケトピロロピロール顔料、ピロロピロール顔料、イソインドリン顔料及びキノフタロン顔料から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むものであることが好ましく、フタロシアニン顔料、ジケトピロロピロール顔料及びピロロピロール顔料から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むものであることがより好ましく、耐光性および耐溶剤性の観点からフタロシアニン顔料を含むものであることが更に好ましい。
 また、フタロシアニン顔料は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料であることが好ましい。すなわち、他の着色剤は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料を含むものであることが好ましい。また、他の着色剤として用いられるハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料は、緑色顔料であることが好ましい。なお、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料とは、ハロゲン原子を置換基として有するフタロシアニン顔料のことである。
 また、フタロシアニン顔料は、中心金属を有するフタロシアニン顔料であることが好ましく、銅原子、亜鉛原子またはアルミニウム原子を中心金属として有するフタロシアニン顔料であることがより好ましく、銅原子または亜鉛原子を中心金属として有するフタロシアニン顔料であることが更に好ましい。上記中心金属にはさらに配位子が配位していてもよい。
Other colorants include at least one selected from phthalocyanine pigments, dioxazine pigments, quinacridone pigments, anthraquinone pigments, perylene pigments, azo pigments, azomethine pigments, diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments, pyrrolopyrrole pigments, isoindoline pigments and quinophthalone pigments. It preferably contains a phthalocyanine pigment, more preferably at least one selected from diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments and pyrrolopyrrole pigments, and more preferably contains a phthalocyanine pigment from the viewpoint of light resistance and solvent resistance. .
Further, the phthalocyanine pigment is preferably a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment. That is, the other coloring agent preferably contains a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment. Further, the halogenated phthalocyanine pigment used as another coloring agent is preferably a green pigment. A halogenated phthalocyanine pigment is a phthalocyanine pigment having a halogen atom as a substituent.
Further, the phthalocyanine pigment is preferably a phthalocyanine pigment having a central metal, more preferably a phthalocyanine pigment having a copper atom, a zinc atom or an aluminum atom as the central metal, and having a copper atom or a zinc atom as the central metal. Phthalocyanine pigments are more preferred. A ligand may be further coordinated to the central metal.
 他の着色剤は、ハロゲン化銅フタロシアニン顔料(銅原子を中心金属として有するハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料)、ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料(亜鉛原子を中心金属として有するハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料)、および、ハロゲン化アルミニウムフタロシアニン顔料(アルミニウム原子を中心金属として有するハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料)から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むものであることが好ましく、ハロゲン化銅フタロシアニン顔料およびハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むものであることがより好ましい。ハロゲン化銅フタロシアニン顔料としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7,36などが挙げられる。ハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン58,59などが挙げられる。ハロゲン化アルミニウムフタロシアニン顔料としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン63などが挙げられる。 Other colorants include halogenated copper phthalocyanine pigments (halogenated phthalocyanine pigments having a copper atom as the central metal), halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments (halogenated phthalocyanine pigments having a zinc atom as the central metal), and halogenated aluminum phthalocyanines. It preferably contains at least one selected from pigments (halogenated phthalocyanine pigments having an aluminum atom as a central metal), and more preferably contains at least one selected from halogenated copper phthalocyanine pigments and halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments. preferable. Halogenated copper phthalocyanine pigments include C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, 36 and the like. Halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments include C.I. I. Pigment Green 58, 59 and the like. Examples of halogenated aluminum phthalocyanine pigments include C.I. I. Pigment Green 63 and the like.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における他の着色剤の含有量は10~80質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、70質量%以下であることが好ましく、60質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は20質量%以上であることが好ましく、30質量%以上であることがより好ましく、35質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、40質量%以上であることがより一層好ましい。
 また、他の着色剤の含有量は、特定色素多量体の100質量部に対して、50~1000質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、900質量部以下であることが好ましく、800質量部以下であることがより好ましい。下限は70質量部以上であることが好ましく、100質量部以上であることがより好ましい。
 また、着色組成物の全固形分中における特定色素多量体と他の着色剤との合計の含有量は20~90質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、85質量%以下であることが好ましく、80質量%以下であることがより好ましく、75質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は30質量%以上であることが好ましく、40質量%以上であることがより好ましく、45質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、50質量%以上であることがより一層好ましい。
The content of other colorants in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 10 to 80% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, still more preferably 35% by mass or more, and even more preferably 40% by mass or more.
Also, the content of the other colorant is preferably 50 to 1000 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the specific dye multimer. The upper limit is preferably 900 parts by mass or less, more preferably 800 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 70 parts by mass or more, more preferably 100 parts by mass or more.
Further, the total content of the specific dye multimer and the other colorant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 20 to 90% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 85% by mass or less, more preferably 80% by mass or less, and even more preferably 75% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 40% by mass or more, still more preferably 45% by mass or more, and even more preferably 50% by mass or more.
 本発明の着色組成物をカラーフィルタの緑色画素形成用の着色組成物として用いる場合、他の着色剤には緑色着色剤を含むものを用いることが好ましい。また、緑色着色剤と黄色着色剤とを併用することも好ましい。また、緑色着色剤は、フタロシアニン顔料であることが好ましく、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料であることがより好ましい。
 この態様において、他の着色剤中における緑色着色剤の含有量は、50質量%以上であることが好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましい。また、緑色着色剤の含有量は、特定色素多量体の100質量部に対して、150~600質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、550質量部以下であることが好ましく、500質量部以下であることがより好ましい。下限は200質量部以上であることが好ましく、250質量部以上であることがより好ましい。
 また、他の着色剤として緑色着色剤と黄色着色剤とを併用する場合、黄色着色剤は、イソインドリン顔料またはアゾ顔料であることが好ましい。
When the coloring composition of the present invention is used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter, the other coloring agent preferably contains a green coloring agent. It is also preferable to use a green coloring agent and a yellow coloring agent together. Also, the green colorant is preferably a phthalocyanine pigment, more preferably a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment.
In this aspect, the content of the green coloring agent in the other coloring agent is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more. Also, the content of the green colorant is preferably 150 to 600 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the specific pigment multimer. The upper limit is preferably 550 parts by mass or less, more preferably 500 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 200 parts by mass or more, more preferably 250 parts by mass or more.
Moreover, when a green coloring agent and a yellow coloring agent are used together as other coloring agents, the yellow coloring agent is preferably an isoindoline pigment or an azo pigment.
 本発明の着色組成物をカラーフィルタの赤色画素形成用の着色組成物として用いる場合、他の着色剤には赤色着色剤を含むものを用いることが好ましい。また、赤色着色剤と黄色着色剤とを併用することも好ましい。また、赤色着色剤は、ジケトピロロピロール顔料であることが好ましい。
 この態様において、他の着色剤中における赤色着色剤の含有量は、40質量%以上であることが好ましく、50質量%以上であることがより好ましい。また、赤色着色剤の含有量は、特定色素多量体の100質量部に対して、50~900質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、850質量部以下であることが好ましく、800質量部以下であることがより好ましい。下限は70質量部以上であることが好ましく、100質量部以上であることがより好ましい。
When the coloring composition of the present invention is used as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter, the other coloring agent preferably contains a red coloring agent. It is also preferable to use a red coloring agent and a yellow coloring agent together. Also, the red colorant is preferably a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment.
In this aspect, the content of the red colorant in the other colorant is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more. Also, the content of the red coloring agent is preferably 50 to 900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the specific pigment multimer. The upper limit is preferably 850 parts by mass or less, more preferably 800 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 70 parts by mass or more, more preferably 100 parts by mass or more.
<光重合開始剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は光重合開始剤を含有することができる。硬化性化合物として重合性モノマーを用いた場合には、本発明の着色組成物は光重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。光重合開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有する化合物が好ましい。光重合開始剤は、光ラジカル重合開始剤であることが好ましい。
<Photoinitiator>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a photopolymerization initiator. When a polymerizable monomer is used as the curable compound, the colored composition of the invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, compounds having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet range to the visible range are preferred. The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
 光重合開始剤としては、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物など)、アシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物などが挙げられる。光重合開始剤は、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、ホスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物および3-アリール置換クマリン化合物であることが好ましく、オキシム化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、および、アシルホスフィン化合物から選ばれる化合物であることがより好ましく、オキシム化合物であることが更に好ましい。また、光重合開始剤としては、特開2014-130173号公報の段落0065~0111に記載された化合物、特許第6301489号公報に記載された化合物、MATERIAL STAGE 37~60p,vol.19,No.3,2019に記載されたパーオキサイド系光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/221177号に記載の光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/110179号に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-043864号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-044030号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-167313号公報に記載の過酸化物系開始剤、特開2020-055992号公報に記載のオキサゾリジン基を有するアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、特開2013-190459号公報に記載のオキシム系光重合開始剤、特開2020-172619号公報に記載の重合体、国際公開第2020/152120号に記載の式1で表される化合物などが挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of photopolymerization initiators include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds and the like. From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, photopolymerization initiators include trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, hexaarylbi imidazole compounds, onium compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes, halomethyloxadiazole compounds and 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds, oxime compounds, α-hydroxyketones compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds, more preferably oxime compounds. Further, as the photopolymerization initiator, compounds described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-130173, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6301489, MATERIAL STAGE 37-60p, vol. 19, No. 3, the peroxide photopolymerization initiator described in 2019, the photopolymerization initiator described in International Publication No. 2018/221177, the photopolymerization initiator described in International Publication No. 2018/110179, JP 2019-043864 The photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2019-044030, the photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2019-167313, the peroxide-based initiator described in JP-A-2020-055992. An aminoacetophenone-based initiator having an oxazolidine group described, an oxime-based photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2013-190459, a polymer described in JP-A-2020-172619, and International Publication No. 2020/152120. and the compounds of Formula 1 described, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物の具体例としては、2,2’,4-トリス(2-クロロフェニル)-5-(3,4-ジメトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニル-1,1’-ビイミダゾールなどが挙げられる。 Specific examples of hexaarylbiimidazole compounds include 2,2′,4-tris(2-chlorophenyl)-5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenyl-1,1′-biimidazole, etc. is mentioned.
 α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 184、Omnirad 1173、Omnirad 2959、Omnirad 127(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 184、Irgacure 1173、Irgacure 2959、Irgacure 127(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。α-アミノケトン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 907、Omnirad 369、Omnirad 369E、Omnirad 379EG(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 907、Irgacure 369、Irgacure 369E、Irgacure 379EG(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。アシルホスフィン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 819、Omnirad TPO(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 819、Irgacure TPO(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Commercially available α-hydroxyketone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 2959, Irgacure 127 (above company) and the like. Commercially available α-aminoketone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 907, Irgacure 369, Irgacure 369E, Irgacure 379EG (manufactured by Irgacure 369E, Irgacure 379EG). made), etc. Commercially available acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819, Omnirad TPO (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 819 and Irgacure TPO (manufactured by BASF).
 オキシム化合物としては、特開2001-233842号公報に記載の化合物、特開2000-080068号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.1653-1660)に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.156-162)に記載の化合物、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年、pp.202-232)に記載の化合物、特開2000-066385号公報に記載の化合物、特表2004-534797号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-019766号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6065596号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/152153号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/051680号に記載の化合物、特開2017-198865号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/164127号の段落番号0025~0038に記載の化合物、国際公開第2013/167515号に記載の化合物、特許第5430746号に記載の化合物、特許第5647738号に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、3-ベンゾイルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)フェニル]-3-シクロヘキシル-プロパン-1,2-ジオン-2-(O-アセチルオキシム)などが挙げられる。市販品としては、Irgacure OXE01、Irgacure OXE02、Irgacure OXE03、Irgacure OXE04(以上、BASF社製)、TR-PBG-304、TR-PBG-327(トロンリー社製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919((株)ADEKA製、特開2012-014052号公報に記載の光重合開始剤2)が挙げられる。また、オキシム化合物としては、着色性が無い化合物や、透明性が高く変色し難い化合物を用いることも好ましい。市販品としては、アデカアークルズNCI-730、NCI-831、NCI-930(以上、(株)ADEKA製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of oxime compounds include compounds described in JP-A-2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A-2000-080068, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, J. Am. C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.1653-1660); C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.156-162), compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp.202-232), compounds described in JP-A-2000-066385, Compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, compounds described in JP-A-2017-019766, compounds described in Patent No. 6065596, International Publication No. 2015 / 152153, compounds described in WO 2017/051680, compounds described in JP 2017-198865, compounds described in paragraphs 0025 to 0038 of WO 2017/164127, Compounds described in International Publication No. 2013/167515, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5430746, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5647738, and the like. Specific examples of oxime compounds include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino -1-phenylpropane-1-one, 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-3-cyclohexyl-propane-1,2-dione-2-(O-acetyloxime) and the like. Commercially available products include Irgacure OXE01, Irgacure OXE02, Irgacure OXE03, Irgacure OXE04 (manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-304, TR-PBG-327 (manufactured by Tronly), and Adeka Optomer N-1919 (manufactured by Tronly). ) manufactured by ADEKA, photopolymerization initiator 2) described in JP-A-2012-014052. As the oxime compound, it is also preferable to use a compound having no coloring property or a compound having high transparency and resistance to discoloration. Commercially available products include ADEKA Arkles NCI-730, NCI-831, and NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
 光重合開始剤としては、フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2014-137466号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6636081号公報に記載の化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2016-0109444号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 An oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include compounds described in JP-A-2014-137466, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6636081, and compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2016-0109444. mentioned.
 光重合開始剤としては、カルバゾール環の少なくとも1つのベンゼン環がナフタレン環となった骨格を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。そのようなオキシム化合物の具体例としては、国際公開第2013/083505号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of the carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring can also be used. Specific examples of such oxime compounds include compounds described in WO2013/083505.
 光重合開始剤としては、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2010-262028号公報に記載の化合物、特表2014-500852号公報に記載の化合物24、36~40、特開2013-164471号公報に記載の化合物(C-3)などが挙げられる。 An oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP-A-2010-262028, compounds 24, 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A-2013-164471. and the compound (C-3) of.
 光重合開始剤としては、ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物を用いることができる。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物は、二量体とすることも好ましい。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2013-114249号公報の段落番号0031~0047、特開2014-137466号公報の段落番号0008~0012、0070~0079に記載されている化合物、特許4223071号公報の段落番号0007~0025に記載されている化合物、アデカアークルズNCI-831((株)ADEKA製)が挙げられる。 An oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as the photopolymerization initiator. The oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably a dimer. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0031 to 0047 of JP-A-2013-114249 and paragraph numbers 0008-0012 and 0070-0079 of JP-A-2014-137466; Compounds described in paragraphs 0007 to 0025 of Japanese Patent No. 4223071 and ADEKA Arkles NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) can be mentioned.
 光重合開始剤としては、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/036910号に記載されているOE-01~OE-75が挙げられる。 An oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples include OE-01 to OE-75 described in WO 2015/036910.
 光重合開始剤としては、カルバゾール骨格にヒドロキシ基を有する置換基が結合したオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。このような光重合開始剤としては国際公開第2019/088055号に記載された化合物などが挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound in which a substituent having a hydroxyl group is bonded to the carbazole skeleton can also be used. Examples of such a photopolymerization initiator include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2019/088055.
 光重合開始剤としては、芳香族環に電子求引性基が導入された芳香族環基ArOX1を有するオキシム化合物(以下、オキシム化合物OXともいう)を用いることもできる。上記芳香族環基ArOX1が有する電子求引性基としては、アシル基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、シアノ基が挙げられ、アシル基およびニトロ基が好ましく、耐光性に優れた膜を形成しやすいという理由からアシル基であることがより好ましく、ベンゾイル基であることが更に好ましい。ベンゾイル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、複素環基、複素環オキシ基、アルケニル基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基、アシル基またはアミノ基であることが好ましく、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基またはアミノ基であることがより好ましく、アルコキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基またはアミノ基であることが更に好ましい。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having an aromatic ring group Ar 2 OX1 in which an electron-withdrawing group is introduced into the aromatic ring (hereinafter also referred to as oxime compound OX) can be used. Examples of the electron-withdrawing group of the aromatic ring group Ar OX1 include an acyl group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, an alkylsulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, and a cyano group. An acyl group and a nitro group are preferred, an acyl group is more preferred, and a benzoyl group is even more preferred because a film having excellent light resistance can be easily formed. A benzoyl group may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, cyano groups, nitro groups, hydroxy groups, alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryl groups, aryloxy groups, heterocyclic groups, heterocyclic oxy groups, alkenyl groups, alkylsulfanyl groups, arylsulfanyl groups, It is preferably an acyl group or an amino group, more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylsulfanyl group, an arylsulfanyl group or an amino group. A sulfanyl group or an amino group is more preferred.
 オキシム化合物OXは、式(OX1)で表される化合物および式(OX2)で表される化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、式(OX2)で表される化合物であることがより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
 式中、RX1は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、複素環基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アシルオキシ基、アミノ基、ホスフィノイル基、カルバモイル基またはスルファモイル基を表し、
 RX2は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、複素環基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシルオキシ基またはアミノ基を表し、
 RX3~RX14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表す;
 ただし、RX10~RX14のうち少なくとも一つは、電子求引性基である。
The oxime compound OX is preferably at least one selected from the compounds represented by the formula (OX1) and the compounds represented by the formula (OX2), more preferably the compound represented by the formula (OX2). preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
In the formula, R X1 is an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkoxy group, aryl group, aryloxy group, heterocyclic group, heterocyclicoxy group, alkylsulfanyl group, arylsulfanyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl a group, an arylsulfonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amino group, a phosphinoyl group, a carbamoyl group or a sulfamoyl group,
R X2 is an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkoxy group, aryl group, aryloxy group, heterocyclic group, heterocyclicoxy group, alkylsulfanyl group, arylsulfanyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, aryl represents a sulfonyl group, an acyloxy group or an amino group,
R X3 to R X14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent;
However, at least one of R X10 to R X14 is an electron-withdrawing group.
 電子求引性基としては、アシル基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、シアノ基が挙げられ、アシル基およびニトロ基が好ましく、耐光性に優れた膜を形成しやすいという理由からアシル基であることがより好ましく、ベンゾイル基であることが更に好ましい。 Examples of electron-withdrawing groups include acyl groups, nitro groups, trifluoromethyl groups, alkylsulfinyl groups, arylsulfinyl groups, alkylsulfonyl groups, arylsulfonyl groups, and cyano groups, with acyl groups and nitro groups being preferred. An acyl group is more preferred, and a benzoyl group is even more preferred, because a film having excellent properties can be easily formed.
 上記式において、RX12が電子求引性基であり、RX10、RX11、RX13、RX14は水素原子であることが好ましい。 In the above formula, R X12 is an electron-withdrawing group, and R X10 , R X11 , R X13 and R X14 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
 オキシム化合物OXの具体例としては、特許第4600600号公報の段落番号0083~0105に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the oxime compound OX include compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0105 of Japanese Patent No. 4600600.
 本発明において好ましく使用されるオキシム化合物の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of oxime compounds preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
 オキシム化合物は、波長350~500nmの範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物が好ましく、波長360~480nmの範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物がより好ましい。また、オキシム化合物の波長365nm又は波長405nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、高いことが好ましく、1000~300000であることがより好ましく、2000~300000であることが更に好ましく、5000~200000であることが特に好ましい。化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いて測定することができる。例えば、分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spectrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶媒を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。 The oxime compound is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm, more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 360 to 480 nm. Further, the molar extinction coefficient of the oxime compound at a wavelength of 365 nm or a wavelength of 405 nm is preferably high from the viewpoint of sensitivity, more preferably 1000 to 300000, further preferably 2000 to 300000, even more preferably 5000 to 200000. It is particularly preferred to have The molar extinction coefficient of a compound can be measured using known methods. For example, it is preferably measured at a concentration of 0.01 g/L using an ethyl acetate solvent with a spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian).
 光重合開始剤としては、Irgacure OXE01(BASF社製)および/またはIrgacure OXE02(BASF社製)と、Omnirad 2959(IGM Resins B.V.社製)とを組み合わせて用いることも好ましい。 As a photopolymerization initiator, it is also preferable to use a combination of Irgacure OXE01 (manufactured by BASF) and/or Irgacure OXE02 (manufactured by BASF) and Omnirad 2959 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.).
 光重合開始剤としては、2官能あるいは3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いてもよい。そのような光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いることにより、光ラジカル重合開始剤の1分子から2つ以上のラジカルが発生するため、良好な感度が得られる。また、非対称構造の化合物を用いた場合においては、結晶性が低下して溶剤などへの溶解性が向上して、経時で析出しにくくなり、着色組成物の経時安定性を向上させることができる。2官能あるいは3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤の具体例としては、特表2010-527339号公報、特表2011-524436号公報、国際公開第2015/004565号、特表2016-532675号公報の段落番号0407~0412、国際公開第2017/033680号の段落番号0039~0055に記載されているオキシム化合物の2量体、特表2013-522445号公報に記載されている化合物(E)および化合物(G)、国際公開第2016/034963号に記載されているCmpd1~7、特表2017-523465号公報の段落番号0007に記載されているオキシムエステル類光開始剤、特開2017-167399号公報の段落番号0020~0033に記載されている光開始剤、特開2017-151342号公報の段落番号0017~0026に記載されている光重合開始剤(A)、特許第6469669号公報に記載されているオキシムエステル光開始剤などが挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, a bifunctional or trifunctional or higher functional photoradical polymerization initiator may be used. By using such a radical photopolymerization initiator, two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the radical photopolymerization initiator, so good sensitivity can be obtained. In addition, when a compound having an asymmetric structure is used, the crystallinity is reduced, the solubility in a solvent or the like is improved, the precipitation becomes difficult over time, and the stability over time of the colored composition can be improved. . Specific examples of bifunctional or trifunctional or higher photoradical polymerization initiators include Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No. 2015/004565, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-532675. Paragraph numbers 0407 to 0412, dimers of oxime compounds described in paragraph numbers 0039 to 0055 of International Publication No. 2017/033680, compound (E) and compounds described in JP-A-2013-522445 ( G), Cmpd1 to 7 described in International Publication No. 2016/034963, oxime ester photoinitiators described in paragraph number 0007 of JP 2017-523465, JP 2017-167399 Photoinitiators described in paragraph numbers 0020 to 0033, photoinitiators (A) described in paragraph numbers 0017 to 0026 of JP-A-2017-151342, described in Japanese Patent No. 6469669 and oxime ester photoinitiators.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における光重合開始剤の含有量は0.1~20質量%が好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上が好ましく、1質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、15質量%以下が好ましく、10質量%以下がより好ましい。
 本発明の着色組成物において、光重合開始剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 15% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or less.
In the coloring composition of the present invention, only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more kinds are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<溶剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、溶剤を含有することが好ましい。溶剤としては、有機溶剤が挙げられる。溶剤の種類は、各成分の溶解性や組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的には特に制限はない。有機溶剤としては、エステル系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、炭化水素系溶剤などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落番号0223を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、環状アルキル基が置換したエステル系溶剤、環状アルキル基が置換したケトン系溶剤も好ましく用いることもできる。有機溶剤の具体例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジクロロメタン、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、2-ペンタノン、3-ペンタノン、4-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、2-メチルシクロヘキサノン、3-メチルシクロヘキサノン、4-メチルシクロヘキサノン、シクロヘプタノン、シクロオクタノン、酢酸シクロヘキシル、シクロペンタノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、3-ブトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、プロピレングリコールジアセテート、3-メトキシブタノール、メチルエチルケトン、ガンマブチロラクトン、スルホラン、アニソール、1,4-ジアセトキシブタン、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセタート、二酢酸ブタン-1,3-ジイル、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセタート、ジアセトンアルコール(別名としてダイアセトンアルコール、4-ヒドロキシ-4-メチル-2-ペンタノン)、2-メトキシプロピルアセテート、2-メトキシ-1-プロパノール、イソプロピルアルコールなどが挙げられる。ただし有機溶剤としての芳香族炭化水素類(ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、エチルベンゼン等)は、環境面等の理由により低減したほうがよい場合がある(例えば、有機溶剤全量に対して、50質量ppm(parts per million)以下とすることもでき、10質量ppm以下とすることもでき、1質量ppm以下とすることもできる)。
<<Solvent>>
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent. An organic solvent is mentioned as a solvent. The type of solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the coatability of the composition. Organic solvents include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, and hydrocarbon-based solvents. For these details, reference can be made to paragraph 0223 of WO2015/166779, the content of which is incorporated herein. Ester-based solvents substituted with cyclic alkyl groups and ketone-based solvents substituted with cyclic alkyl groups can also be preferably used. Specific examples of organic solvents include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2 -heptanone, 2-pentanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethylcarbitol Acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, propylene glycol diacetate, 3-methoxy butanol, methyl ethyl ketone, gamma butyrolactone, sulfolane, anisole, 1,4-diacetoxybutane, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, butane-1,3-diyl diacetate, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, diacetone alcohol diacetone alcohol, 4-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone), 2-methoxypropyl acetate, 2-methoxy-1-propanol, isopropyl alcohol and the like. However, aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as organic solvents may be better reduced for environmental reasons (e.g., 50 mass ppm (parts per million), 10 mass ppm or less, or 1 mass ppm or less).
 本発明においては、金属含有量の少ない有機溶剤を用いることが好ましい。有機溶剤の金属含有量は、例えば、10質量ppb(parts per billion)以下であることが好ましい。必要に応じて質量ppt(parts per trillion)レベルの有機溶剤を用いてもよく、そのような有機溶剤は、例えば、東洋合成社が提供している(化学工業日報、2015年11月13日)。 In the present invention, it is preferable to use an organic solvent with a low metal content. The metal content of the organic solvent is preferably, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less. If necessary, an organic solvent at a ppt (parts per trillion) level by mass may be used, and such an organic solvent is provided, for example, by Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015). .
 有機溶剤から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、蒸留(分子蒸留や薄膜蒸留等)やフィルタを用いたろ過を挙げることができる。ろ過に用いるフィルタのフィルタ孔径としては、10μm以下が好ましく、5μm以下がより好ましく、3μm以下が更に好ましい。フィルタの材質は、ポリテトラフロロエチレン、ポリエチレンまたはナイロンが好ましい。 Examples of methods for removing impurities such as metals from organic solvents include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter. The filter pore size of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 μm or less, more preferably 5 μm or less, and even more preferably 3 μm or less. The material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
 有機溶剤は、異性体(原子数が同じであるが構造が異なる化合物)が含まれていてもよい。また、異性体は、1種のみが含まれていてもよいし、複数種含まれていてもよい。 The organic solvent may contain isomers (compounds with the same number of atoms but different structures). Moreover, only one isomer may be contained, or a plurality of isomers may be contained.
 有機溶剤中の過酸化物の含有率が0.8mmol/L以下であることが好ましく、過酸化物を実質的に含まないことがより好ましい。 The content of peroxide in the organic solvent is preferably 0.8 mmol/L or less, and more preferably substantially free of peroxide.
 着色組成物中における溶剤の含有量は、10~95質量%であることが好ましく、20~90質量%であることがより好ましく、30~90質量%であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the solvent in the coloring composition is preferably 10-95% by mass, more preferably 20-90% by mass, and even more preferably 30-90% by mass.
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、環境規制の観点から環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないことが好ましい。なお、本発明において、環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないとは、着色組成物中における環境規制物質の含有量が50質量ppm以下であることを意味し、30質量ppm以下であることが好ましく、10質量ppm以下であることが更に好ましく、1質量ppm以下であることが特に好ましい。環境規制物質は、例えば、ベンゼン;トルエン、キシレン等のアルキルベンゼン類;クロロベンゼン等のハロゲン化ベンゼン類等が挙げられる。これらは、REACH(Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of CHemicals)規則、PRTR(Pollutant Release and Transfer Register)法、VOC(Volatile Organic Compounds)規制等のもとに環境規制物質として登録されており、使用量や取り扱い方法が厳しく規制されている。これらの化合物は、着色組成物に用いられる各成分などを製造する際に溶媒として用いられることがあり、残留溶媒として着色組成物中に混入することがある。人への安全性、環境への配慮の観点よりこれらの物質は可能な限り低減することが好ましい。環境規制物質を低減する方法としては、系中を加熱や減圧して環境規制物質の沸点以上にして系中から環境規制物質を留去して低減する方法が挙げられる。また、少量の環境規制物質を留去する場合においては、効率を上げる為に該当溶媒と同等の沸点を有する溶媒と共沸させることも有用である。また、ラジカル重合性を有する化合物を含有する場合、減圧留去中にラジカル重合反応が進行して分子間で架橋してしまうことを抑制するために重合禁止剤等を添加して減圧留去してもよい。これらの留去方法は、原料の段階、原料を反応させた生成物(例えば、重合した後の樹脂溶液や多官能モノマー溶液)の段階、またはこれらの化合物を混ぜて作製した着色組成物の段階などのいずれの段階でも可能である。 In addition, from the viewpoint of environmental regulations, it is preferable that the colored composition of the present invention does not substantially contain environmentally regulated substances. In the present invention, "substantially free of environmentally regulated substances" means that the content of environmentally regulated substances in the colored composition is 50 ppm by mass or less, preferably 30 ppm by mass or less. , is more preferably 10 mass ppm or less, and particularly preferably 1 mass ppm or less. Environmental control substances include, for example, benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene. These substances are registered as environmental controlled substances under the REACH (Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals) Regulations, the Pollutant Release and Transfer Register (PRTR) Law, and the VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) Regulations. methods are strictly regulated. These compounds may be used as a solvent when producing each component used in the coloring composition, and may be mixed into the coloring composition as a residual solvent. From the viewpoint of safety to humans and consideration for the environment, it is preferable to reduce these substances as much as possible. As a method for reducing the amount of environmentally regulated substances, there is a method in which the system is heated or decompressed to raise the temperature to the boiling point of the environmentally regulated substances or higher, and the environmentally regulated substances are distilled off from the system. In the case of distilling off a small amount of environmentally regulated substances, it is also useful to azeotrope with a solvent having a boiling point equivalent to that of the solvent in order to increase the efficiency. In addition, when a compound having radical polymerizability is contained, a polymerization inhibitor or the like is added and distilled off under reduced pressure in order to suppress the radical polymerization reaction from progressing during the vacuum distillation and the intermolecular cross-linking. may These distillation methods are the raw material stage, the reaction product of the raw materials (for example, the resin solution or polyfunctional monomer solution after polymerization), or the colored composition stage produced by mixing these compounds. It is possible at any stage such as
<<顔料誘導体>>
 本発明の着色組成物は顔料誘導体を含有することができる。顔料誘導体は例えば分散助剤として用いられる。顔料誘導体としては、色素骨格に酸基または塩基性基が結合した構造を有する化合物が挙げられる。
<<Pigment derivative>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain pigment derivatives. Pigment derivatives are used, for example, as dispersing aids. Pigment derivatives include compounds having a structure in which an acid group or a basic group is bonded to a pigment skeleton.
 顔料誘導体を構成する色素骨格としては、キノリン色素骨格、ベンゾイミダゾロン色素骨格、ベンゾイソインドール色素骨格、ベンゾチアゾール色素骨格、イミニウム色素骨格、スクアリリウム色素骨格、クロコニウム色素骨格、オキソノール色素骨格、ピロロピロール色素骨格、ジケトピロロピロール色素骨格、アゾ色素骨格、アゾメチン色素骨格、フタロシアニン色素骨格、ナフタロシアニン色素骨格、アントラキノン色素骨格、キナクリドン色素骨格、ジオキサジン色素骨格、ペリノン色素骨格、ペリレン色素骨格、チオインジゴ色素骨格、イソインドリン色素骨格、イソインドリノン色素骨格、キノフタロン色素骨格、イミニウム色素骨格、ジチオール色素骨格、トリアリールメタン色素骨格、ピロメテン色素骨格等が挙げられる。 Dye skeletons constituting pigment derivatives include quinoline dye skeletons, benzimidazolone dye skeletons, benzoisoindole dye skeletons, benzothiazole dye skeletons, iminium dye skeletons, squarylium dye skeletons, croconium dye skeletons, oxonol dye skeletons, and pyrrolopyrrole dye skeletons. skeleton, diketopyrrolopyrrole dye skeleton, azo dye skeleton, azomethine dye skeleton, phthalocyanine dye skeleton, naphthalocyanine dye skeleton, anthraquinone dye skeleton, quinacridone dye skeleton, dioxazine dye skeleton, perinone dye skeleton, perylene dye skeleton, thioindigo dye skeleton, Isoindoline dye skeletons, isoindolinone dye skeletons, quinophthalone dye skeletons, iminium dye skeletons, dithiol dye skeletons, triarylmethane dye skeletons, pyrromethene dye skeletons, and the like can be mentioned.
 酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基、ボロン酸基、カルボン酸アミド基、スルホン酸アミド基、イミド酸基及びこれらの塩等が挙げられる。塩を構成する原子または原子団としては、アルカリ金属イオン(Li、Na、Kなど)、アルカリ土類金属イオン(Ca2+、Mg2+など)、アンモニウムイオン、イミダゾリウムイオン、ピリジニウムイオン、ホスホニウムイオンなどが挙げられる。カルボン酸アミド基としては、-NHCORX1で表される基が好ましい。スルホン酸アミド基としては、-NHSOX2で表される基が好ましい。イミド酸基としては、-SONHSOX3、-CONHSOX4、-CONHCORX5または-SONHCORX6で表される基が好ましく、-SONHSOX3がより好ましい。RX1~RX6は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。RX1~RX6が表すアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有してもよい。置換基としてはハロゲン原子であることが好ましく、フッ素原子であることがより好ましい。 The acid group includes a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boronic acid group, a carboxylic acid amide group, a sulfonic acid amide group, an imidic acid group and salts thereof. Atoms or atomic groups constituting the salt include alkali metal ions (Li + , Na + , K + etc.), alkaline earth metal ions (Ca 2+ , Mg 2+ etc.), ammonium ions, imidazolium ions, pyridinium ions, phosphonium ion and the like. As the carboxylic acid amide group, a group represented by —NHCOR X1 is preferable. As the sulfonic acid amide group, a group represented by —NHSO 2 R X2 is preferable. The imidic acid group is preferably a group represented by —SO 2 NHSO 2 R X3 , —CONHSO 2 R X4 , —CONHCOR X5 or —SO 2 NHCOR X6 , more preferably —SO 2 NHSO 2 R X3 . R X1 to R X6 each independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group. The alkyl groups and aryl groups represented by R X1 to R X6 may have substituents. The substituent is preferably a halogen atom, more preferably a fluorine atom.
 塩基性基としては、アミノ基、ピリジニル基およびその塩、アンモニウム基の塩、並びにフタルイミドメチル基が挙げられる。塩を構成する原子または原子団としては、水酸化物イオン、ハロゲンイオン、カルボン酸イオン、スルホン酸イオン、フェノキシドイオンなどが挙げられる。 Basic groups include amino groups, pyridinyl groups and salts thereof, salts of ammonium groups, and phthalimidomethyl groups. Atoms or atomic groups constituting salts include hydroxide ions, halogen ions, carboxylate ions, sulfonate ions, and phenoxide ions.
 顔料誘導体は、可視透明性に優れた顔料誘導体(以下、透明顔料誘導体ともいう)を用いることもできる。透明顔料誘導体の400~700nmの波長領域におけるモル吸光係数の最大値(εmax)は3000L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることが好ましく、1000L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることがより好ましく、100L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることがさらに好ましい。εmaxの下限は、例えば1L・mol-1・cm-1以上であり、10L・mol-1・cm-1以上でもよい。 A pigment derivative having excellent visible transparency (hereinafter also referred to as a transparent pigment derivative) can also be used as the pigment derivative. The maximum value (εmax) of the molar extinction coefficient of the transparent pigment derivative in the wavelength region of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 3000 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 or less, and 1000 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 or less. is more preferable, and 100 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 or less is even more preferable. The lower limit of εmax is, for example, 1 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 or more, and may be 10 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 or more.
 顔料誘導体の具体例としては、特開昭56-118462号公報に記載の化合物、特開昭63-264674号公報に記載の化合物、特開平01-217077号公報に記載の化合物、特開平03-009961号公報に記載の化合物、特開平03-026767号公報に記載の化合物、特開平03-153780号公報に記載の化合物、特開平03-045662号公報に記載の化合物、特開平04-285669号公報に記載の化合物、特開平06-145546号公報に記載の化合物、特開平06-212088号公報に記載の化合物、特開平06-240158号公報に記載の化合物、特開平10-030063号公報に記載の化合物、特開平10-195326号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2011/024896号の段落番号0086~0098に記載の化合物、国際公開第2012/102399号の段落番号0063~0094に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/038252号の段落番号0082に記載の化合物、特開2015-151530号公報の段落番号0171に記載の化合物、特開2011-252065号公報の段落番号0162~0183に記載の化合物、特開2003-081972号公報に記載の化合物、特許第5299151号公報に記載の化合物、特開2015-172732号公報に記載の化合物、特開2014-199308号公報に記載の化合物、特開2014-085562号公報に記載の化合物、特開2014-035351号公報に記載の化合物、特開2008-081565号公報に記載の化合物、特開2019-109512号公報に記載の化合物、特開2019-133154号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2020/002106号に記載のチオール連結基を有するジケトピロロピロール化合物、特開2018-168244号公報に記載のベンゾイミダゾロン化合物又はそれらの塩が挙げられる。 Specific examples of pigment derivatives include compounds described in JP-A-56-118462, compounds described in JP-A-63-264674, compounds described in JP-A-01-217077, JP-A-03- 009961, compounds described in JP-A-03-026767, compounds described in JP-A-03-153780, compounds described in JP-A-03-045662, JP-A-04-285669 Compounds described in publications, compounds described in JP-A-06-145546, compounds described in JP-A-06-212088, compounds described in JP-A-06-240158, JP-A-10-030063 Compounds described, compounds described in JP-A-10-195326, compounds described in paragraphs 0086 to 0098 of WO 2011/024896, WO 2012/102399 described in paragraphs 0063 to 0094 Compounds, compounds described in paragraph number 0082 of WO 2017/038252, compounds described in paragraph number 0171 of JP 2015-151530, JP 2011-252065 described in paragraphs 0162 to 0183 Compounds, compounds described in JP-A-2003-081972, compounds described in Patent No. 5299151, compounds described in JP-A-2015-172732, compounds described in JP-A-2014-199308, JP Compounds described in 2014-085562, compounds described in JP-A-2014-035351, compounds described in JP-A-2008-081565, compounds described in JP-A-2019-109512, JP-A-2019- Compounds described in 133154, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds having a thiol linking group described in WO 2020/002106, benzimidazolone compounds described in JP 2018-168244 or salts thereof. .
 顔料誘導体の含有量は、上述した特定着色剤100質量部に対して1~30質量部が好ましく、3~20質量部が更に好ましい。また、顔料誘導体と着色剤との合計の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中35質量%以上であることが好ましく、40質量%以上がより好ましく、45質量%以上が更に好ましく、50質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、70質量%以下が好ましく、65質量%以下がより好ましい。顔料誘導体は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。 The content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 3 to 20 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the specific coloring agent. In addition, the total content of the pigment derivative and the colorant is preferably 35% by mass or more, more preferably 40% by mass or more, still more preferably 45% by mass or more, and 50% by mass of the total solid content of the coloring composition. More than % by mass is particularly preferred. The upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 65% by mass or less. Only one pigment derivative may be used, or two or more pigment derivatives may be used in combination.
<<ポリアルキレンイミン>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、ポリアルキレンイミンを含有することもできる。ポリアルキレンイミンは例えば顔料の分散助剤として用いられる。分散助剤とは、着色組成物中において顔料の分散性を高めるための素材のことである。ポリアルキレンイミンとは、アルキレンイミンを開環重合したポリマーである。ポリアルキレンイミンは、2級アミノ基を少なくとも有するポリマーであることが好ましい。ポリアルキレンイミンは、2級アミノ基の他に、1級アミノ基や3級アミノ基を含んでいてもよい。ポリアルキレンイミンは、1級アミノ基と、2級アミノ基と、3級アミノ基とをそれぞれ含む分岐構造を有するポリマーであることが好ましい。アルキレンイミンの炭素数は2~6が好ましく、2~4がより好ましく、2または3であることが更に好ましく、2であることが特に好ましい。
<<Polyalkyleneimine>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can also contain a polyalkyleneimine. Polyalkyleneimines are used, for example, as dispersing aids for pigments. A dispersing aid is a material for enhancing dispersibility of a pigment in a coloring composition. Polyalkyleneimine is a polymer obtained by ring-opening polymerization of alkyleneimine. Polyalkyleneimine is preferably a polymer having at least a secondary amino group. The polyalkyleneimine may contain a primary amino group or a tertiary amino group in addition to the secondary amino group. The polyalkyleneimine is preferably a polymer having a branched structure each containing a primary amino group, a secondary amino group and a tertiary amino group. The alkyleneimine preferably has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms, still more preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 carbon atoms.
 ポリアルキレンイミンの分子量は、200以上であることが好ましく、250以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、100000以下であることが好ましく、50000以下であることがより好ましく、10000以下であることが更に好ましく、2000以下であることが特に好ましい。なお、ポリアルキレンイミンの分子量の値について、構造式から分子量が計算できる場合は、ポリアルキレンイミンの分子量は構造式から計算した値である。一方、特定アミン化合物の分子量が構造式から計算できない、あるいは、計算が困難な場合には、沸点上昇法で測定した数平均分子量の値を用いる。また、沸点上昇法でも測定できない、あるいは、測定が困難な場合は、粘度法で測定した数平均分子量の値を用いる。また、粘度法でも測定できない、あるいは、粘度法での測定が困難な場合は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ)法により測定したポリスチレン換算値での数平均分子量の値を用いる。 The molecular weight of the polyalkyleneimine is preferably 200 or more, more preferably 250 or more. The upper limit is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less, even more preferably 10,000 or less, and particularly preferably 2,000 or less. Regarding the value of the molecular weight of the polyalkyleneimine, when the molecular weight can be calculated from the structural formula, the molecular weight of the polyalkyleneimine is the value calculated from the structural formula. On the other hand, when the molecular weight of the specific amine compound cannot be calculated from the structural formula or is difficult to calculate, the value of the number average molecular weight measured by the boiling point elevation method is used. When the boiling point elevation method cannot be used or the measurement is difficult, the value of the number average molecular weight measured by the viscosity method is used. In addition, when measurement by the viscosity method is not possible or measurement by the viscosity method is difficult, the value of the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene measured by the GPC (gel permeation chromatography) method is used.
 ポリアルキレンイミンのアミン価は5mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、10mmol/g以上であることがより好ましく、15mmol/g以上であることが更に好ましい。 The amine value of the polyalkyleneimine is preferably 5 mmol/g or more, more preferably 10 mmol/g or more, and even more preferably 15 mmol/g or more.
 アルキレンイミンの具体例としては、エチレンイミン、プロピレンイミン、1,2-ブチレンイミン、2,3-ブチレンイミンなどが挙げられ、エチレンイミンまたはプロピレンイミンであることが好ましく、エチレンイミンであることがより好ましい。ポリアルキレンイミンは、ポリエチレンイミンであることが特に好ましい。また、ポリエチレンイミンは、1級アミノ基を、1級アミノ基と2級アミノ基と3級アミノ基との合計に対して10モル%以上含むことが好ましく、20モル%以上含むことがより好ましく、30モル%以上含むことが更に好ましい。ポリエチレンイミンの市販品としては、エポミンSP-003、SP-006、SP-012、SP-018、SP-200、P-1000(以上、(株)日本触媒製)などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of alkyleneimine include ethyleneimine, propyleneimine, 1,2-butyleneimine, 2,3-butyleneimine and the like, preferably ethyleneimine or propyleneimine, more preferably ethyleneimine. preferable. It is particularly preferred that the polyalkyleneimine is polyethyleneimine. In addition, the polyethyleneimine preferably contains 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more, of the primary amino group with respect to the total of the primary amino group, the secondary amino group and the tertiary amino group. , more preferably 30 mol % or more. Commercial products of polyethyleneimine include Epomin SP-003, SP-006, SP-012, SP-018, SP-200, P-1000 (manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.).
 着色組成物の全固形分中におけるポリアルキレンイミンの含有量は0.1~5質量%であることが好ましい。下限は0.2質量%以上であることが好ましく、0.5質量%以上であることがより好ましく、1質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は4.5質量%以下であることが好ましく、4質量%以下であることがより好ましく、3質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。また、ポリアルキレンイミンの含有量は、顔料100質量部に対して0.5~20質量部であることが好ましい。下限は0.6質量部以上であることが好ましく、1質量部以上であることがより好ましく、2質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は10質量部以下であることが好ましく、8質量部以下であることがより好ましい。ポリアルキレンイミンは、1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合はそれらの合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The content of polyalkyleneimine in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 0.2% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 4.5% by mass or less, more preferably 4% by mass or less, and even more preferably 3% by mass or less. Also, the content of the polyalkyleneimine is preferably 0.5 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. The lower limit is preferably 0.6 parts by mass or more, more preferably 1 part by mass or more, and even more preferably 2 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 8 parts by mass or less. Only one kind of polyalkyleneimine may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<硬化促進剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、硬化促進剤を含有することができる。硬化促進剤としては、チオール化合物、メチロール化合物、アミン化合物、ホスホニウム塩化合物、アミジン塩化合物、アミド化合物、塩基発生剤、イソシアネート化合物、アルコキシシラン化合物、オニウム塩化合物などが挙げられる。硬化促進剤の具体例としては、国際公開第2018/056189号の段落番号0094~0097に記載の化合物、特開2015-034963号公報の段落番号0246~0253に記載の化合物、特開2013-041165号公報の段落番号0186~0251に記載の化合物、特開2014-055114号公報に記載のイオン性化合物、特開2012-150180号公報の段落番号0071~0080に記載の化合物、特開2011-253054号公報に記載のエポキシ基を有するアルコキシシラン化合物、特許第5765059号公報の段落番号0085~0092に記載の化合物、特開2017-036379号公報に記載のカルボキシ基含有エポキシ硬化剤などが挙げられる。着色組成物の全固形分中における硬化促進剤の含有量は0.3~8.9質量%であることが好ましく、0.8~6.4質量%であることがより好ましい。
<<Curing accelerator>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a curing accelerator. Curing accelerators include thiol compounds, methylol compounds, amine compounds, phosphonium salt compounds, amidine salt compounds, amide compounds, base generators, isocyanate compounds, alkoxysilane compounds, onium salt compounds and the like. Specific examples of the curing accelerator include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0094 to 0097 of WO 2018/056189, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0246 to 0253 of JP 2015-034963, JP 2013-041165 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0186 to 0251 of the publication, ionic compounds described in JP 2014-055114, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0071 to 0080 of JP 2012-150180, JP 2011-253054 Alkoxysilane compounds having an epoxy group described in JP-A-2005-200557, compounds described in paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of Japanese Patent No. 5765059, and carboxy group-containing epoxy curing agents described in JP-A-2017-036379. The content of the curing accelerator in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass, more preferably 0.8 to 6.4% by mass.
<<赤外線吸収剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、赤外線吸収剤をさらに含有することができる。例えば、本発明の着色組成物を用いて赤外線透過フィルタを形成する場合においては、着色組成物中に赤外線吸収剤を含有させることで得られる膜について透過させる光の波長をより長波長側にシフトさせることができる。赤外線吸収剤は、極大吸収波長を波長700nmよりも長波長側に有する化合物であることが好ましい。赤外線吸収剤は波長700nmを超え1800nm以下の範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物であることが好ましい。また、赤外線吸収剤の波長500nmにおける吸光度Aと極大吸収波長における吸光度Aとの比率A/Aは、0.08以下であることが好ましく、0.04以下であることがより好ましい。
<<Infrared Absorber>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can further contain an infrared absorbing agent. For example, in the case of forming an infrared transmission filter using the coloring composition of the present invention, the wavelength of the light transmitted through the film obtained by containing an infrared absorbing agent in the coloring composition is shifted to the longer wavelength side. can be made The infrared absorbing agent is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength on the longer wavelength side than the wavelength of 700 nm. The infrared absorbing agent is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 1800 nm or less. In addition, the ratio A 1 /A 2 between the absorbance A 1 at a wavelength of 500 nm and the absorbance A 2 at the maximum absorption wavelength of the infrared absorbent is preferably 0.08 or less, more preferably 0.04 or less. .
 赤外線吸収剤としては、ピロロピロール化合物、シアニン化合物、スクアリリウム化合物、フタロシアニン化合物、ナフタロシアニン化合物、クアテリレン化合物、メロシアニン化合物、クロコニウム化合物、オキソノール化合物、イミニウム化合物、ジチオール化合物、トリアリールメタン化合物、ピロメテン化合物、アゾメチン化合物、アントラキノン化合物、ジベンゾフラノン化合物、ジチオレン金属錯体、金属酸化物、金属ホウ化物等が挙げられる。ピロロピロール化合物としては、特開2009-263614号公報の段落番号0016~0058に記載の化合物、特開2011-068731号公報の段落番号0037~0052に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/166873号の段落番号0010~0033に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。スクアリリウム化合物としては、特開2011-208101号公報の段落番号0044~0049に記載の化合物、特許第6065169号公報の段落番号0060~0061に記載の化合物、国際公開第2016/181987号の段落番号0040に記載の化合物、特開2015-176046号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2016/190162号の段落番号0072に記載の化合物、特開2016-074649号公報の段落番号0196~0228に記載の化合物、特開2017-067963号公報の段落番号0124に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/135359号に記載の化合物、特開2017-114956号公報に記載の化合物、特許6197940号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2016/120166号に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。シアニン化合物としては、特開2009-108267号公報の段落番号0044~0045に記載の化合物、特開2002-194040号公報の段落番号0026~0030に記載の化合物、特開2015-172004号公報に記載の化合物、特開2015-172102号公報に記載の化合物、特開2008-088426号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2016/190162号の段落番号0090に記載の化合物、特開2017-031394号公報に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。クロコニウム化合物としては、特開2017-082029号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。イミニウム化合物としては、例えば、特表2008-528706号公報に記載の化合物、特開2012-012399号公報に記載の化合物、特開2007-092060号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2018/043564号の段落番号0048~0063に記載の化合物が挙げられる。フタロシアニン化合物としては、特開2012-077153号公報の段落番号0093に記載の化合物、特開2006-343631号公報に記載のオキシチタニウムフタロシアニン、特開2013-195480号公報の段落番号0013~0029に記載の化合物、特許第6081771号公報に記載のバナジウムフタロシアニン化合物、国際公開第2020/071486号に記載のバナジウムフタロシアニン化合物、国際公開第2020/071470号に記載のフタロシアニン化合物が挙げられる。ナフタロシアニン化合物としては、特開2012-077153号公報の段落番号0093に記載の化合物が挙げられる。ジチオレン金属錯体としては、特許第5733804号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。金属酸化物としては、例えば、酸化インジウムスズ、酸化アンチモンスズ、酸化亜鉛、Alドープ酸化亜鉛、フッ素ドープ二酸化スズ、ニオブドープ二酸化チタン、酸化タングステンなどが挙げられる。酸化タングステンの詳細については、特開2016-006476号公報の段落番号0080を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。金属ホウ化物としては、ホウ化ランタンなどが挙げられる。ホウ化ランタンの市販品としては、LaB-F(日本新金属(株)製)などが挙げられる。また、金属ホウ化物としては、国際公開第2017/119394号に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。酸化インジウムスズの市販品としては、F-ITO(DOWAハイテック(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of infrared absorbers include pyrrolopyrrole compounds, cyanine compounds, squarylium compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, quaterrylene compounds, merocyanine compounds, croconium compounds, oxonol compounds, iminium compounds, dithiol compounds, triarylmethane compounds, pyrromethene compounds, and azomethine. compounds, anthraquinone compounds, dibenzofuranone compounds, dithiolene metal complexes, metal oxides, metal borides, and the like. As the pyrrolopyrrole compound, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0016 to 0058 of JP-A-2009-263614, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0037-0052 of JP-A-2011-068731, WO 2015/166873 Compounds described in Paragraph Nos. 0010 to 0033 and the like. Examples of the squarylium compound include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0044 to 0049 of JP-A-2011-208101, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0060 to 0061 of Japanese Patent No. 6065169, and paragraph number 0040 of WO 2016/181987. Compounds described in, compounds described in JP-A-2015-176046, compounds described in paragraph No. 0072 of WO 2016/190162, compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0196 to 0228 of JP-A-2016-074649 , the compound described in paragraph number 0124 of JP 2017-067963, the compound described in WO 2017/135359, the compound described in JP 2017-114956, the compound described in Patent 6197940, Examples include compounds described in International Publication No. 2016/120166. As the cyanine compound, compounds described in paragraphs 0044 to 0045 of JP-A-2009-108267, compounds described in paragraphs 0026-0030 of JP-A-2002-194040, and JP-A-2015-172004. The compound, the compound described in JP-A-2015-172102, the compound described in JP-A-2008-088426, the compound described in paragraph number 0090 of WO 2016/190162, JP-A-2017-031394 and the like compounds described in. Examples of croconium compounds include compounds described in JP-A-2017-082029. As the iminium compound, for example, compounds described in JP-A-2008-528706, compounds described in JP-A-2012-012399, compounds described in JP-A-2007-092060, International Publication No. 2018/043564 and the compounds described in paragraphs 0048 to 0063 of. Examples of the phthalocyanine compound include compounds described in paragraph number 0093 of JP-A-2012-077153, oxytitanium phthalocyanine described in JP-A-2006-343631, and paragraph numbers 0013 to 0029 of JP-A-2013-195480. compounds, vanadium phthalocyanine compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6081771, vanadium phthalocyanine compounds described in International Publication No. 2020/071486, and phthalocyanine compounds described in International Publication No. 2020/071470. Examples of naphthalocyanine compounds include compounds described in paragraph number 0093 of JP-A-2012-077153. Dithiolene metal complexes include compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5733804. Examples of metal oxides include indium tin oxide, antimony tin oxide, zinc oxide, Al-doped zinc oxide, fluorine-doped tin dioxide, niobium-doped titanium dioxide, and tungsten oxide. For details of tungsten oxide, paragraph 0080 of JP-A-2016-006476 can be referred to, the content of which is incorporated herein. Examples of metal borides include lanthanum boride. Commercially available lanthanum boride products include LaB 6 -F (manufactured by Nippon New Metal Co., Ltd.). Moreover, as a metal boride, the compound as described in international publication 2017/119394 can also be used. Commercially available products of indium tin oxide include F-ITO (manufactured by DOWA Hitech Co., Ltd.).
 また、赤外線吸収剤としては、特開2017-197437号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特開2017-025311号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、国際公開第2016/154782号に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特許第5884953号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特許第6036689号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特許第5810604号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、国際公開第2017/213047号の段落番号0090~0107に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特開2018-054760号公報の段落番号0019~0075に記載のピロール環含有化合物、特開2018-040955号公報の段落番号0078~0082に記載のピロール環含有化合物、特開2018-002773号公報の段落番号0043~0069に記載のピロール環含有化合物、特開2018-041047号公報の段落番号0024~0086に記載のアミドα位に芳香環を有するスクアリリウム化合物、特開2017-179131号公報に記載のアミド連結型スクアリリウム化合物、特開2017-141215号公報に記載のピロールビス型スクアリリウム骨格又はクロコニウム骨格を有する化合物、特開2017-082029号公報に記載されたジヒドロカルバゾールビス型のスクアリリウム化合物、特開2017-068120号公報の段落番号0027~0114に記載の非対称型の化合物、特開2017-067963号公報に記載されたピロール環含有化合物(カルバゾール型)、特許第6251530号公報に記載されたフタロシアニン化合物、特開2020-075959号公報に記載されたスクアリリウム化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0135217号公報に記載の銅錯体などを用いることもできる。 Further, as the infrared absorbing agent, the squarylium compound described in JP-A-2017-197437, the squarylium compound described in JP-A-2017-025311, the squarylium compound described in WO 2016/154782, and the patent No. 5884953. No. 6036689, squarylium compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5810604, squarylium compounds described in paragraphs 0090 to 0107 of International Publication No. 2017/213047, Pyrrole ring-containing compounds described in paragraph numbers 0019 to 0075 of JP-A-2018-054760, pyrrole ring-containing compounds described in paragraph numbers 0078 to 0082 of JP-A-2018-040955, paragraphs of JP-A-2018-002773 Pyrrole ring-containing compounds described in numbers 0043 to 0069, squarylium compounds having an aromatic ring at the amide α-position described in paragraph numbers 0024 to 0086 of JP-A-2018-041047, amides described in JP-A-2017-179131 Linked squarylium compounds, compounds having a pyrrole bis-type squarylium skeleton or croconium skeleton described in JP-A-2017-141215, dihydrocarbazole-bis-type squarylium compounds described in JP-A-2017-082029, JP-A-2017-068120 Asymmetric compounds described in paragraphs 0027 to 0114 of the publication, pyrrole ring-containing compounds (carbazole type) described in JP 2017-067963, phthalocyanine compounds described in JP 6251530, JP A squarylium compound described in 2020-075959, a copper complex described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0135217, and the like can also be used.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における赤外線吸収剤の含有量は、1~40質量%であることが好ましい。下限は2質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%以上がより好ましく、10質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は30質量%以下が好ましく、25質量%以下がより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、赤外線吸収剤を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。赤外線吸収剤を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the infrared absorbing agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 40% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of infrared absorbing agent, or may contain two or more types thereof. When two or more kinds of infrared absorbing agents are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<紫外線吸収剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含有することができる。紫外線吸収剤としては、共役ジエン化合物、アミノジエン化合物、サリシレート化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、アクリロニトリル化合物、ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン化合物、インドール化合物、トリアジン化合物などが挙げられる。このような化合物の具体例としては、特開2009-217221号公報の段落番号0038~0052、特開2012-208374号公報の段落番号0052~0072、特開2013-068814号公報の段落番号0317~0334、特開2016-162946号公報の段落番号0061~0080に記載された化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。紫外線吸収剤の市販品としては、例えば、UV-503(大東化学(株)製)、BASF社製のTinuvinシリーズ、Uvinul(ユビナール)シリーズ、住化ケムテックス(株)製のSumisorbシリーズなどが挙げられる。また、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、ミヨシ油脂製のMYUAシリーズ(化学工業日報、2016年2月1日)が挙げられる。また、紫外線吸収剤は、特許第6268967号公報の段落番号0049~0059に記載された化合物、国際公開第2016/181987号の段落番号0059~0076に記載された化合物、国際公開第2020/137819号に記載されたチオアリール基置換ベンゾトリアゾール型紫外線吸収剤を用いることもできる。着色組成物の全固形分中における紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、0.01~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.01~5質量%であることがより好ましい。紫外線吸収剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Ultraviolet absorber>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain an ultraviolet absorber. Examples of ultraviolet absorbers include conjugated diene compounds, aminodiene compounds, salicylate compounds, benzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, acrylonitrile compounds, hydroxyphenyltriazine compounds, indole compounds, and triazine compounds. Specific examples of such compounds include paragraph numbers 0038 to 0052 of JP-A-2009-217221, paragraph numbers 0052-0072 of JP-A-2012-208374, and paragraph numbers 0317-0317 of JP-A-2013-068814. 0334, and compounds described in paragraphs 0061 to 0080 of JP-A-2016-162946, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Examples of commercially available UV absorbers include UV-503 (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd.), Tinuvin series and Uvinul series manufactured by BASF, and Sumisorb series manufactured by Sumika Chemtex Co., Ltd. . Benzotriazole compounds include the MYUA series manufactured by Miyoshi Oil (Kagaku Kogyo Nippo, February 1, 2016). In addition, the ultraviolet absorber is a compound described in paragraph numbers 0049 to 0059 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967, a compound described in paragraph numbers 0059 to 0076 of WO 2016/181987, and WO 2020/137819. A thioaryl group-substituted benzotriazole-type ultraviolet absorber described in can also be used. The content of the ultraviolet absorber in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass. Only one type of ultraviolet absorber may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more kinds are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<重合禁止剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合禁止剤を含有することができる。重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、tert-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン塩(アンモニウム塩、第一セリウム塩等)が挙げられる。中でも、p-メトキシフェノールが好ましい。着色組成物の全固形分中における重合禁止剤の含有量は、0.0001~5質量%であることが好ましい。重合禁止剤は、1種類のみでもよく、2種類以上でもよい。2種類以上の場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<polymerization inhibitor>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a polymerization inhibitor. Polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salts (ammonium salts, cerous salts, etc.). Among them, p-methoxyphenol is preferred. The content of the polymerization inhibitor in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass. Only one kind of polymerization inhibitor may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<シランカップリング剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、シランカップリング剤を含有することができる。本明細書において、シランカップリング剤は、加水分解性基とそれ以外の官能基とを有するシラン化合物を意味する。また、加水分解性基とは、ケイ素原子に直結し、加水分解反応及び縮合反応の少なくともいずれかによってシロキサン結合を生じ得る置換基をいう。加水分解性基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基などが挙げられ、アルコキシ基が好ましい。すなわち、シランカップリング剤は、アルコキシシリル基を有する化合物が好ましい。また、加水分解性基以外の官能基としては、例えば、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、メルカプト基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、アミノ基、ウレイド基、スルフィド基、イソシアネート基、フェニル基などが挙げられ、アミノ基、(メタ)アクリロイル基およびエポキシ基が好ましい。シランカップリング剤の具体例としては、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-602)、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-603)、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBE-602)、γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-903)、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBE-903)、3-メタクリロキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-502)、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-503)等がある。また、シランカップリング剤の具体例については、特開2009-288703号公報の段落番号0018~0036に記載の化合物、特開2009-242604号公報の段落番号0056~0066に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。着色組成物の全固形分中におけるシランカップリング剤の含有量は、0.01~15.0質量%であることが好ましく、0.05~10.0質量%であることがより好ましい。シランカップリング剤は、1種類のみでもよく、2種類以上でもよい。2種類以上の場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Silane coupling agent>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent. As used herein, a silane coupling agent means a silane compound having a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups. Further, the hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and capable of forming a siloxane bond by at least one of hydrolysis reaction and condensation reaction. Hydrolyzable groups include, for example, halogen atoms, alkoxy groups, acyloxy groups and the like, with alkoxy groups being preferred. That is, the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group. Examples of functional groups other than hydrolyzable groups include vinyl group, (meth)allyl group, (meth)acryloyl group, mercapto group, epoxy group, oxetanyl group, amino group, ureido group, sulfide group and isocyanate group. , phenyl group, etc., and amino group, (meth)acryloyl group and epoxy group are preferred. Specific examples of the silane coupling agent include N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-602), N-β-aminoethyl-γ-amino propyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-603), N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBE-602), γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-903), γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBE-903), 3-methacryloxy Propylmethyldimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-502), 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-503), and the like. Further, specific examples of the silane coupling agent include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0018 to 0036 of JP-A-2009-288703 and compounds described in paragraph numbers 0056-0066 of JP-A-2009-242604. , the contents of which are incorporated herein. The content of the silane coupling agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 15.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 10.0% by mass. Only one kind of silane coupling agent may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<界面活性剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、界面活性剤を含有することができる。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用することができる。界面活性剤はシリコーン系界面活性剤またはフッ素系界面活性剤であることが好ましい。界面活性剤については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落番号0238~0245に記載された界面活性剤を参照することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<<Surfactant>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a surfactant. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as fluorine surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, anionic surfactants, and silicone surfactants can be used. The surfactant is preferably a silicone-based surfactant or a fluorine-based surfactant. For surfactants, reference can be made to surfactants described in paragraphs 0238-0245 of WO2015/166779, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3~40質量%が好適であり、より好ましくは5~30質量%であり、特に好ましくは7~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、着色組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorine-based surfactant is preferably 3-40% by mass, more preferably 5-30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7-25% by mass. A fluorosurfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of the thickness of the coating film and saving liquid, and has good solubility in the coloring composition.
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、特開2014-041318号公報の段落番号0060~0064(対応する国際公開第2014/017669号の段落番号0060~0064)等に記載の界面活性剤、特開2011-132503号公報の段落番号0117~0132に記載の界面活性剤、特開2020-008634号公報に記載の界面活性剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。フッ素系界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、メガファックF-171、F-172、F-173、F-176、F-177、F-141、F-142、F-143、F-144、F-437、F-475、F-477、F-479、F-482、F-554、F-555-A、F-556、F-557、F-558、F-559、F-560、F-561、F-565、F-563、F-568、F-575、F-780、EXP、MFS-330、R-01、R-40、R-40-LM、R-41、R-41-LM、RS-43、R-43、TF-1956、RS-90、R-94、RS-72-K、DS-21(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、FC431、FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、SC-101、SC-103、SC-104、SC-105、SC-1068、SC-381、SC-383、S-393、KH-40(以上、AGC(株)製)、PolyFox PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、PF7002(以上、OMNOVA社製)、フタージェント208G、215M、245F、601AD、601ADH2、602A、610FM、710FL、710FM、710FS、FTX-218(以上、(株)NEOS製)等が挙げられる。 As the fluorine-based surfactant, JP 2014-041318 Paragraph Nos. 0060 to 0064 (corresponding International Publication No. 2014/017669 Paragraph Nos. 0060 to 0064) surfactants described in, JP 2011- Examples include surfactants described in paragraphs 0117 to 0132 of JP-A-132503 and surfactants described in JP-A-2020-008634, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Commercially available fluorosurfactants include Megafac F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143 and F-144. , F-437, F-475, F-477, F-479, F-482, F-554, F-555-A, F-556, F-557, F-558, F-559, F-560 , F-561, F-565, F-563, F-568, F-575, F-780, EXP, MFS-330, R-01, R-40, R-40-LM, R-41, R -41-LM, RS-43, R-43, TF-1956, RS-90, R-94, RS-72-K, DS-21 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.), Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC-1068, SC-381, SC-383, S-393, KH- 40 (manufactured by AGC), PolyFox PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (manufactured by OMNOVA), Futergent 208G, 215M, 245F, 601AD, 601ADH2, 602A, 610FM, 710FL, 710FM, 710FS , FTX-218 (manufactured by NEOS Corporation) and the like.
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を含有する官能基を持つ分子構造を有し、熱を加えるとフッ素原子を含有する官能基の部分が切断されてフッ素原子が揮発するアクリル系化合物も好適に使用できる。このようなフッ素系界面活性剤としては、DIC(株)製のメガファックDSシリーズ(化学工業日報(2016年2月22日)、日経産業新聞(2016年2月23日))、例えば、メガファックDS-21が挙げられる。 The fluorosurfactant has a molecular structure with a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and an acrylic compound in which the functional group containing a fluorine atom is cleaved and the fluorine atom volatilizes when heat is applied is also suitable. Available. Examples of such fluorine-based surfactants include MegaFac DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)), for example, Mega Fac DS-21.
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素化アルキル基またはフッ素化アルキレンエーテル基を有するフッ素原子含有ビニルエーテル化合物と、親水性のビニルエーテル化合物との重合体を用いることも好ましい。このようなフッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2016-216602号公報に記載されたフッ素系界面活性剤が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 It is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound as the fluorosurfactant. Such fluorosurfactants include fluorosurfactants described in JP-A-2016-216602, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、ブロックポリマーを用いることもできる。フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができる。また、特開2010-032698号公報の段落番号0016~0037に記載されたフッ素含有界面活性剤や、下記化合物も本発明で用いられるフッ素系界面活性剤として例示される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
 上記の化合物の重量平均分子量は、好ましくは3000~50000であり、例えば、14000である。上記の化合物中、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%はモル%である。
A block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant. The fluorosurfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meta) A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used. In addition, the fluorine-containing surfactants described in paragraphs 0016 to 0037 of JP-A-2010-032698 and the following compounds are also exemplified as fluorine-based surfactants used in the present invention.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
The weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3000-50000, for example 14000. In the above compounds, % indicating the ratio of repeating units is mol%.
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2010-164965号公報の段落番号0050~0090および段落番号0289~0295に記載された化合物、DIC(株)製のメガファックRS-101、RS-102、RS-718K、RS-72-K等が挙げられる。また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2015-117327号公報の段落番号0015~0158に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。 A fluoropolymer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in a side chain can also be used as the fluorosurfactant. Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0050 to 0090 and paragraph numbers 0289 to 0295 of JP-A-2010-164965, MEGAFACE RS-101, RS-102 and RS-718K manufactured by DIC Corporation, and RS-72-K. Further, as the fluorosurfactant, compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A-2015-117327 can also be used.
 また、国際公開第2020/084854号に記載の界面活性剤を、炭素数6以上のパーフルオロアルキル基を有する界面活性剤の代替として用いることも、環境規制の観点から好ましい。 It is also preferable from the viewpoint of environmental regulations to use the surfactant described in International Publication No. 2020/084854 as a substitute for the surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group with 6 or more carbon atoms.
 また、式(fi-1)で表される含フッ素イミド塩化合物を界面活性剤として用いることも好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
 式(fi-1)中、mは1または2を表し、nは1~4の整数を表し、aは1または2を表し、Xa+はa価の金属イオン、第1級アンモニウムイオン、第2級アンモニウムイオン、第3級アンモニウムイオン、第4級アンモニウムイオンまたはNH を表す。
It is also preferable to use a fluorine-containing imide salt compound represented by formula (fi-1) as a surfactant.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
In the formula (fi-1), m represents 1 or 2, n represents an integer of 1 to 4, a represents 1 or 2, X a + is a valent metal ion, primary ammonium ion, Represents secondary ammonium ion, tertiary ammonium ion, quaternary ammonium ion or NH4 + .
 ノニオン系界面活性剤としては、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタン並びにそれらのエトキシレート及びプロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセロールエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル、プルロニックL10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2(BASF社製)、テトロニック304、701、704、901、904、150R1(BASF社製)、ソルスパース20000(日本ルーブリゾール(株)製)、NCW-101、NCW-1001、NCW-1002(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)、パイオニンD-6112、D-6112-W、D-6315(竹本油脂(株)製)、オルフィンE1010、サーフィノール104、400、440(日信化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and their ethoxylates and propoxylates (e.g., glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, Polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2 (BASF company), Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1 (manufactured by BASF), Solsperse 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.), NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 (Fujifilm Wa Kojunyaku Co., Ltd.), Pionin D-6112, D-6112-W, D-6315 (Takemoto Oil Co., Ltd.), Olfine E1010, Surfynol 104, 400, 440 (Nissin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) ) and the like.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、DOWSIL SH8400、SH8400 FLUID、FZ-2122、67 Additive、74 Additive、M Additive、SF 8419 OIL(以上、ダウ・東レ(株)製)、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製)、KP-341、KF-6000、KF-6001、KF-6002、KF-6003(以上、信越化学工業(株)製)、BYK-307、BYK-322、BYK-323、BYK-330、BYK-333、BYK-3760、BYK-UV3510(以上、ビックケミー社製)等が挙げられる。 Silicone surfactants include DOWSIL SH8400, SH8400 FLUID, FZ-2122, 67 Additive, 74 Additive, M Additive, SF 8419 OIL (manufactured by Dow Toray Industries, Inc.), TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP-341, KF-6000, KF-6001, KF-6002, KF-6003 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) , BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-333, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie) and the like.
 また、シリコーン系界面活性剤には下記構造の化合物を用いることもできる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
A compound having the following structure can also be used as the silicone-based surfactant.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
 着色組成物の全固形分中における界面活性剤の含有量は、0.001質量%~5.0質量%であることが好ましく、0.005~3.0質量%であることがより好ましい。界面活性剤は、1種類のみでもよく、2種類以上でもよい。2種類以上の場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3.0% by mass. Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<酸化防止剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、酸化防止剤を含有することができる。酸化防止剤としては、フェノール化合物、亜リン酸エステル化合物、チオエーテル化合物などが挙げられる。フェノール化合物としては、フェノール系酸化防止剤として知られる任意のフェノール化合物を使用することができる。好ましいフェノール化合物としては、ヒンダードフェノール化合物が挙げられる。フェノール性ヒドロキシ基に隣接する部位(オルト位)に置換基を有する化合物が好ましい。前述の置換基としては炭素数1~22の置換又は無置換のアルキル基が好ましい。また、酸化防止剤は、同一分子内にフェノール基と亜リン酸エステル基を有する化合物も好ましい。また、酸化防止剤は、リン系酸化防止剤も好適に使用することができる。リン系酸化防止剤としてはトリス[2-[[2,4,8,10-テトラキス(1,1-ジメチルエチル)ジベンゾ[d,f][1,3,2]ジオキサホスフェピン-6-イル]オキシ]エチル]アミン、トリス[2-[(4,6,9,11-テトラ-tert-ブチルジベンゾ[d,f][1,3,2]ジオキサホスフェピン-2-イル)オキシ]エチル]アミン、亜リン酸エチルビス(2,4-ジ-tert-ブチル-6-メチルフェニル)などが挙げられる。酸化防止剤の市販品としては、例えば、アデカスタブ AO-20、アデカスタブ AO-30、アデカスタブ AO-40、アデカスタブ AO-50、アデカスタブ AO-50F、アデカスタブ AO-60、アデカスタブ AO-60G、アデカスタブ AO-80、アデカスタブ AO-330(以上、(株)ADEKA製)などが挙げられる。また、酸化防止剤は、特許第6268967号公報の段落番号0023~0048に記載された化合物、国際公開第2017/006600号に記載された化合物、国際公開第2017/164024号に記載された化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0059371号公報に記載された化合物を使用することもできる。着色組成物の全固形分中における酸化防止剤の含有量は、0.01~20質量%であることが好ましく、0.3~15質量%であることがより好ましい。酸化防止剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Antioxidant>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain an antioxidant. Antioxidants include phenol compounds, phosphite ester compounds, thioether compounds and the like. Any phenolic compound known as a phenolic antioxidant can be used as the phenolic compound. Preferred phenolic compounds include hindered phenolic compounds. A compound having a substituent at a site adjacent to the phenolic hydroxy group (ortho position) is preferred. As the aforementioned substituent, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms is preferred. The antioxidant is also preferably a compound having a phenol group and a phosphite ester group in the same molecule. Phosphorus-based antioxidants can also be suitably used as antioxidants. As a phosphorus antioxidant, tris[2-[[2,4,8,10-tetrakis(1,1-dimethylethyl)dibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-6 -yl]oxy]ethyl]amine, tris[2-[(4,6,9,11-tetra-tert-butyldibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-2-yl ) oxy]ethyl]amine, ethyl bis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl) phosphite, and the like. Examples of commercially available antioxidants include Adekastab AO-20, Adekastab AO-30, Adekastab AO-40, Adekastab AO-50, Adekastab AO-50F, Adekastab AO-60, Adekastab AO-60G, Adekastab AO-80. , ADEKA STAB AO-330 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) and the like. In addition, antioxidants are compounds described in paragraph numbers 0023 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967, compounds described in WO 2017/006600, compounds described in WO 2017/164024, Compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0059371 can also be used. The content of the antioxidant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.3 to 15% by mass. Only one kind of antioxidant may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used. When two or more kinds are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<その他成分>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、必要に応じて、増感剤、硬化促進剤、フィラー、熱硬化促進剤、可塑剤及びその他の助剤類(例えば、導電性粒子、消泡剤、難燃剤、レベリング剤、剥離促進剤、香料、表面張力調整剤、連鎖移動剤など)を含有してもよい。これらの成分を適宜含有させることにより、膜物性などの性質を調整することができる。これらの成分は、例えば、特開2012-003225号公報の段落番号0183以降(対応する米国特許出願公開第2013/0034812号明細書の段落番号0237)の記載、特開2008-250074号公報の段落番号0101~0104、0107~0109等の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、本発明の着色組成物は、必要に応じて、潜在酸化防止剤を含有してもよい。潜在酸化防止剤としては、酸化防止剤として機能する部位が保護基で保護された化合物であって、100~250℃で加熱するか、又は酸/塩基触媒存在下で80~200℃で加熱することにより保護基が脱離して酸化防止剤として機能する化合物が挙げられる。潜在酸化防止剤としては、国際公開第2014/021023号、国際公開第2017/030005号、特開2017-008219号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。潜在酸化防止剤の市販品としては、アデカアークルズGPA-5001((株)ADEKA製)等が挙げられる。
<<Other Ingredients>>
The coloring composition of the present invention may optionally contain sensitizers, curing accelerators, fillers, thermosetting accelerators, plasticizers and other auxiliaries (e.g., conductive particles, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, release accelerators, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.). Properties such as film physical properties can be adjusted by appropriately containing these components. These components are, for example, described in JP 2012-003225, paragraph number 0183 and later (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812, paragraph number 0237), JP 2008-250074 paragraph The descriptions of numbers 0101 to 0104, 0107 to 0109, etc. can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein. In addition, the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a latent antioxidant, if desired. The latent antioxidant is a compound in which the site functioning as an antioxidant is protected with a protective group, and is heated at 100 to 250°C, or heated at 80 to 200°C in the presence of an acid/base catalyst. A compound that functions as an antioxidant by removing the protective group by the reaction is exemplified. Examples of latent antioxidants include compounds described in International Publication No. 2014/021023, International Publication No. 2017/030005, and JP-A-2017-008219. Commercially available latent antioxidants include ADEKA Arkles GPA-5001 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.).
 本発明の着色組成物は、得られる膜の屈折率を調整するために金属酸化物を含有させてもよい。金属酸化物としては、TiO、ZrO、Al、SiO等が挙げられる。金属酸化物の一次粒子径は1~100nmが好ましく、3~70nmがより好ましく、5~50nmが更に好ましい。金属酸化物はコア-シェル構造を有していてもよい。また、この場合、コア部は中空状であってもよい。 The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a metal oxide in order to adjust the refractive index of the resulting film. Examples of metal oxides include TiO 2 , ZrO 2 , Al 2 O 3 and SiO 2 . The primary particle size of the metal oxide is preferably 1 to 100 nm, more preferably 3 to 70 nm, even more preferably 5 to 50 nm. Metal oxides may have a core-shell structure. Moreover, in this case, the core portion may be hollow.
 本発明の着色組成物は、耐光性改良剤を含んでもよい。耐光性改良剤としては、特開2017-198787号公報の段落番号0036~0037に記載の化合物、特開2017-146350号公報の段落番号0029~0034に記載の化合物、特開2017-129774号公報の段落番号0036~0037、0049~0052に記載の化合物、特開2017-129674号公報の段落番号0031~0034、0058~0059に記載の化合物、特開2017-122803号公報の段落番号0036~0037、0051~0054に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/164127号の段落番号0025~0039に記載の化合物、特開2017-186546号公報の段落番号0034~0047に記載の化合物、特開2015-025116号公報の段落番号0019~0041に記載の化合物、特開2012-145604号公報の段落番号0101~0125に記載の化合物、特開2012-103475号公報の段落番号0018~0021に記載の化合物、特開2011-257591号公報の段落番号0015~0018に記載の化合物、特開2011-191483号公報の段落番号0017~0021に記載の化合物、特開2011-145668号公報の段落番号0108~0116に記載の化合物、特開2011-253174号公報の段落番号0103~0153に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。 The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a light resistance improver. As the light resistance improver, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0036 to 0037 of JP-A-2017-198787, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0029-0034 of JP-A-2017-146350, JP-A-2017-129774 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0036 to 0037, 0049 to 0052 of JP 2017-129674 JP 2017-129674 paragraph numbers 0031 to 0034, 0058 to 0059 compounds described in JP 2017-122803 paragraph numbers 0036 to 0037 , compounds described in 0051 to 0054, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0025 to 0039 of WO 2017/164127, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0047 of JP 2017-186546, JP 2015-025116 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0019 to 0041 of JP-A-2012-145604, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0101-0125 of JP-A-2012-103475, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0018-0021 of JP-A-2012-103475, in particular Compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0018 of JP 2011-257591, compounds described in paragraphs 0017 to 0021 of JP 2011-191483, described in paragraphs 0108 to 0116 of JP 2011-145668 and compounds described in paragraph numbers 0103 to 0153 of JP-A-2011-253174.
 本発明の着色組成物は、テレフタル酸エステルを実質的に含まないことも好ましい。ここで、「実質的に含まない」とは、テレフタル酸エステルの含有量が、着色組成物の全量中、1000質量ppb以下であることを意味し、100質量ppb以下であることがより好ましく、ゼロであることが特に好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention preferably does not substantially contain terephthalic acid ester. Here, "substantially free" means that the content of terephthalic acid ester is 1000 mass ppb or less in the total amount of the coloring composition, and more preferably 100 mass ppb or less, Zero is particularly preferred.
 環境規制の観点から、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用が規制されることがある。本発明の着色組成物において、上記した化合物の含有率を小さくする場合、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸)及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸)及びその塩の含有率は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01ppb~1,000ppbの範囲であることが好ましく、0.05ppb~500ppbの範囲であることがより好ましく、0.1ppb~300ppbの範囲であることが更に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まなくてもよい。例えば、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物を用いることで、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まない着色組成物を選択してもよい。規制化合物の代替となりうる化合物としては、例えば、パーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数の違いによって規制対象から除外された化合物が挙げられる。ただし、上記した内容は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用を妨げるものではない。本発明の着色組成物は、許容される最大の範囲内で、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を含んでもよい。 From the perspective of environmental regulations, the use of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts may be regulated. In the coloring composition of the present invention, when the content of the above compounds is reduced, perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid (especially perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group) and salts thereof, and per The content of fluoroalkylcarboxylic acid (especially perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group) and its salt is 0.01ppb to 1,000ppb with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition. is preferably in the range of , more preferably in the range of 0.05 ppb to 500 ppb, even more preferably in the range of 0.1 ppb to 300 ppb. The coloring composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts. For example, by using a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salt, perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and salts thereof may be selected. Examples of compounds that can substitute for regulated compounds include compounds that are excluded from the scope of regulation due to differences in the number of carbon atoms in perfluoroalkyl groups. However, the above content does not prevent the use of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts within the maximum permissible range.
 本発明の着色組成物の含水率は、通常3質量%以下であり、0.01~1.5質量%が好ましく、0.1~1.0質量%の範囲であることがより好ましい。含水率は、カールフィッシャー法にて測定することができる。 The water content of the coloring composition of the present invention is usually 3% by mass or less, preferably 0.01 to 1.5% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass. The water content can be measured by the Karl Fischer method.
 本発明の着色組成物は、膜面状(平坦性など)の調整、膜厚の調整などを目的として粘度を調整して用いることができる。粘度の値は必要に応じて適宜選択することができるが、例えば、25℃において0.3mPa・s~50mPa・sが好ましく、0.5mPa・s~20mPa・sがより好ましい。粘度の測定方法としては、例えば、コーンプレートタイプの粘度計を使用し、25℃に温度調整を施した状態で測定することができる。
 本発明の着色組成物は、環境対応、異物発生の抑制、装置汚染の抑制などの観点から、着色組成物中の塩化物イオン量が10000ppm以下であることが好ましく、1000ppm以下であることがより好ましい。着色組成物中の塩化物イオンを上記範囲とするためには、塩化物イオン含有量が少ない原料を使用すること、水洗、イオン交換樹脂、フィルタろ過などで塩化物イオンを除去する方法などが挙げられる。塩化物イオンの測定方法としては公知の方法を使用でき、例えば、イオンクロマトグラフィー、燃焼イオンクロマトグラフィーなどが挙げられる。
The coloring composition of the present invention can be used by adjusting the viscosity for the purpose of adjusting the film surface state (such as flatness) and adjusting the film thickness. The viscosity value can be appropriately selected as necessary, and is preferably, for example, 0.3 mPa·s to 50 mPa·s, more preferably 0.5 mPa·s to 20 mPa·s at 25°C. As a method for measuring the viscosity, for example, a cone-plate type viscometer can be used, and the viscosity can be measured in a state where the temperature is adjusted to 25°C.
The colored composition of the present invention preferably has a chloride ion content of 10000 ppm or less, more preferably 1000 ppm or less, from the viewpoint of environmental friendliness, suppression of foreign matter generation, suppression of equipment contamination, etc. preferable. In order to make the chloride ion in the coloring composition within the above range, the use of raw materials with a low chloride ion content, washing with water, ion exchange resin, a method of removing chloride ions by filter filtration, etc. be done. A known method can be used as a method for measuring chloride ions, and examples thereof include ion chromatography and combustion ion chromatography.
<<収容容器>>
 着色組成物の収容容器としては、特に限定はなく、公知の収容容器を用いることができる。また、収容容器として、原材料や着色組成物中への不純物混入を抑制することを目的に、容器内壁を6種6層の樹脂で構成する多層ボトルや6種の樹脂を7層構造にしたボトルを使用することも好ましい。このような容器としては例えば特開2015-123351号公報に記載の容器が挙げられる。また、容器内壁は、容器内壁からの金属溶出を防ぎ、着色組成物の保存安定性を高めたり、成分変質を抑制するなど目的で、ガラス製やステンレス製などにすることも好ましい。
<<Container>>
The container for the coloring composition is not particularly limited, and known containers can be used. In addition, as a storage container, a multi-layer bottle whose inner wall is composed of 6 types and 6 layers of resins and a bottle with a 7-layer structure of 6 types of resins for the purpose of suppressing contamination of raw materials and coloring compositions. It is also preferred to use Examples of such a container include the container described in JP-A-2015-123351. In addition, the inner wall of the container is preferably made of glass or stainless steel for the purpose of preventing metal elution from the inner wall of the container, enhancing the storage stability of the coloring composition, and suppressing deterioration of components.
<着色組成物の調製方法>
 本発明の着色組成物は、前述の成分を混合して調製できる。着色組成物の調製に際しては、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解および/または分散して着色組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じて、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液または分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して着色組成物を調製してもよい。
<Method for preparing coloring composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the aforementioned ingredients. In preparing the colored composition, all components may be simultaneously dissolved and / or dispersed in a solvent to prepare a colored composition, and if necessary, each component may be appropriately mixed into two or more solutions or dispersions. , these may be mixed at the time of use (at the time of coating) to prepare a colored composition.
 また、着色組成物の調製に際して、顔料を分散させるプロセスを含むことが好ましい。顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいて、顔料の分散に用いる機械力としては、圧縮、圧搾、衝撃、剪断、キャビテーションなどが挙げられる。これらプロセスの具体例としては、ビーズミル、サンドミル、ロールミル、ボールミル、ペイントシェーカー、マイクロフルイダイザー、高速インペラー、サンドグラインダー、フロージェットミキサー、高圧湿式微粒化、超音波分散などが挙げられる。またサンドミル(ビーズミル)における顔料の粉砕においては、径の小さいビーズを使用する、ビーズの充填率を大きくする事等により粉砕効率を高めた条件で処理することが好ましい。また、粉砕処理後にろ過、遠心分離などで粗粒子を除去することが好ましい。また、顔料を分散させるプロセスおよび分散機は、「分散技術大全集、株式会社情報機構発行、2005年7月15日」や「サスペンション(固/液分散系)を中心とした分散技術と工業的応用の実際 総合資料集、経営開発センター出版部発行、1978年10月10日」、特開2015-157893号公報の段落番号0022に記載のプロセス及び分散機を好適に使用出来る。また顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいては、ソルトミリング工程にて粒子の微細化処理を行ってもよい。ソルトミリング工程に用いられる素材、機器、処理条件等は、例えば、特開2015-194521号公報、特開2012-046629号公報の記載を参酌できる。 In addition, it is preferable to include a process of dispersing the pigment when preparing the coloring composition. In the process of dispersing pigments, mechanical forces used for dispersing pigments include compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation, and the like. Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high pressure wet atomization, ultrasonic dispersion, and the like. In pulverizing the pigment in a sand mill (bead mill), it is preferable to use beads with a small diameter or to increase the filling rate of the beads so as to increase the pulverization efficiency. Moreover, it is preferable to remove coarse particles by filtration, centrifugation, or the like after the pulverization treatment. In addition, the process and dispersing machine for dispersing pigments are described in "Dispersion Technology Complete Works, Information Organization Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005" and "Dispersion technology centered on suspension (solid / liquid dispersion system) and industrial Practical Application General Documents, Published by Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978", the process and dispersing machine described in paragraph number 0022 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-157893 can be suitably used. In the process of dispersing the pigment, the particles may be made finer in the salt milling process. Materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc. used in the salt milling step can be referred to, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2015-194521 and 2012-046629.
 着色組成物の調製にあたり、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、着色組成物をフィルタでろ過することが好ましい。フィルタとしては、従来からろ過用途等に用いられているフィルタであれば特に限定されることなく用いることができる。例えば、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン(PTFE)、ポリフッ化ビニリデン(PVDF)等のフッ素樹脂、ナイロン(例えばナイロン-6、ナイロン-6,6)等のポリアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン樹脂(高密度、超高分子量のポリオレフィン樹脂を含む)等の素材を用いたフィルタが挙げられる。これら素材の中でもポリプロピレン(高密度ポリプロピレンを含む)およびナイロンが好ましい。 In preparing the colored composition, it is preferable to filter the colored composition with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances and reducing defects. As the filter, any filter that has been conventionally used for filtration or the like can be used without particular limitation. For example, fluororesins such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyamide resins such as nylon (eg nylon-6, nylon-6,6), polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (including high-density, ultra-high-molecular-weight polyolefin resin) and other materials. Among these materials, polypropylene (including high density polypropylene) and nylon are preferred.
 フィルタの孔径は、0.01~7.0μmが好ましく、0.01~3.0μmがより好ましく、0.05~0.5μmが更に好ましい。フィルタの孔径が上記範囲であれば、微細な異物をより確実に除去できる。フィルタの孔径値については、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照することができる。フィルタは、日本ポール株式会社(DFA4201NXEY、DFA4201NAEY、DFA4201J006Pなど)、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)および株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルタを用いることができる。 The pore size of the filter is preferably 0.01-7.0 μm, more preferably 0.01-3.0 μm, and even more preferably 0.05-0.5 μm. If the pore diameter of the filter is within the above range, fine foreign matter can be removed more reliably. For the pore size value of the filter, reference can be made to the filter manufacturer's nominal value. Various filters provided by Nippon Pall Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NXEY, DFA4201NAEY, DFA4201J006P, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Nihon Entegris Co., Ltd. (former Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.), Kitz Micro Filter Co., Ltd., etc. can be used as filters. .
 また、フィルタとしてファイバ状のろ材を用いることも好ましい。ファイバ状のろ材としては、例えばポリプロピレンファイバ、ナイロンファイバ、グラスファイバ等が挙げられる。市販品としては、ロキテクノ社製のSBPタイプシリーズ(SBP008など)、TPRタイプシリーズ(TPR002、TPR005など)、SHPXタイプシリーズ(SHPX003など)が挙げられる。 It is also preferable to use a fiber-like filter medium as the filter. Examples of fibrous filter media include polypropylene fibers, nylon fibers, and glass fibers. Commercially available products include SBP type series (SBP008, etc.), TPR type series (TPR002, TPR005, etc.), and SHPX type series (SHPX003, etc.) manufactured by Roki Techno.
 フィルタを使用する際、異なるフィルタ(例えば、第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタなど)を組み合わせてもよい。その際、各フィルタでのろ過は、1回のみでもよいし、2回以上行ってもよい。また、上述した範囲内で異なる孔径のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。また、第1のフィルタでのろ過は、分散液のみに対して行い、他の成分を混合した後で、第2のフィルタでろ過を行ってもよい。また組成物の親疎水性に合わせて、適宜フィルタを選択することができる。 When using filters, different filters (eg, a first filter and a second filter, etc.) may be combined. At that time, filtration with each filter may be performed only once, or may be performed twice or more. Also, filters with different pore sizes within the range described above may be combined. Further, the filtration with the first filter may be performed only on the dispersion liquid, and after mixing other components, the filtration with the second filter may be performed. In addition, the filter can be appropriately selected according to the hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity of the composition.
<膜>
 本発明の膜は、上述した本発明の着色組成物から得られる膜である。本発明の膜は、カラーフィルタや赤外線透過フィルタなどの光学フィルタなどに用いることができる。特にカラーフィルタの着色画素として好ましく用いることができる。着色画素としては、赤色画素、緑色画素、青色画素、マゼンタ色画素、シアン色画素、黄色画素などが挙げられ、緑色画素、黄色画素または赤色画素であることが好ましく、緑色画素であることが更に好ましい。
<Membrane>
The film of the present invention is a film obtained from the colored composition of the present invention described above. The film of the present invention can be used for optical filters such as color filters and infrared transmission filters. In particular, it can be preferably used as a colored pixel of a color filter. Examples of colored pixels include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and yellow pixels. Green pixels, yellow pixels, or red pixels are preferred, and green pixels are more preferred. preferable.
 本発明の膜の膜厚は、目的に応じて適宜調整できるが、0.1~20μmであることが好ましい。膜厚の上限は10μm以下であることが好ましく、5μm以下であることがより好ましく、3μm以下であることが更に好ましく、1.5μm以下であることが特に好ましい。膜厚の下限は、0.2μm以上が好ましく、0.3μm以上がより好ましい。 The film thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose, but is preferably 0.1 to 20 μm. The upper limit of the film thickness is preferably 10 µm or less, more preferably 5 µm or less, still more preferably 3 µm or less, and particularly preferably 1.5 µm or less. The lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.2 μm or more, more preferably 0.3 μm or more.
<膜の製造方法>
 本発明の膜は、本発明の着色組成物を支持体に塗布する工程を経て製造できる。膜の製造方法においては、更にパターン(画素)を形成する工程を含むことが好ましい。パターン(画素)の形成方法としては、フォトリソグラフィ法、ドライエッチング法が挙げられ、フォトリソグラフィ法が好ましい。
<Method for producing membrane>
The film of the invention can be produced through a step of applying the coloring composition of the invention onto a support. Preferably, the film manufacturing method further includes a step of forming a pattern (pixels). A method for forming the pattern (pixels) includes a photolithography method and a dry etching method, and the photolithography method is preferable.
 フォトリソグラフィ法によるパターン形成は、本発明の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、着色組成物層の未露光部を現像除去してパターン(画素)を形成する工程と、を含むことが好ましい。必要に応じて、着色組成物層をベークする工程(プリベーク工程)、および、現像されたパターン(画素)をベークする工程(ポストベーク工程)を設けてもよい。 Pattern formation by photolithography includes the steps of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, a step of patternwise exposing the colored composition layer, and a step of exposing the colored composition layer. forming a pattern (pixels) by developing and removing the exposed portion. If necessary, a step of baking the coloring composition layer (pre-baking step) and a step of baking the developed pattern (pixels) (post-baking step) may be provided.
 着色組成物層を形成する工程では、本発明の着色組成物を用いて、支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する。支持体としては、特に限定は無く、用途に応じて適宜選択できる。例えば、ガラス基板、シリコン基板などが挙げられ、シリコン基板であることが好ましい。また、シリコン基板には、電荷結合素子(CCD)、相補型金属酸化膜半導体(CMOS)、透明導電膜などが形成されていてもよい。また、シリコン基板には、各画素を隔離するブラックマトリクスが形成されている場合もある。また、シリコン基板には、上部の層との密着性改良、物質の拡散防止或いは基板表面の平坦化のために下地層が設けられていてもよい。下地層は、本明細書に記載の着色組成物から着色剤を除いた組成物や、本明細書記載の樹脂、重合性化合物、界面活性剤などを含む組成物などを用いて形成してもよい。下地層の表面接触角は、ジヨードメタンで測定した際に20~70°であることが好ましい。また、水で測定した際に30~80°であることが好ましい。 In the step of forming the colored composition layer, the colored composition layer of the present invention is used to form the colored composition layer on the support. The support is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected depending on the application. Examples thereof include glass substrates and silicon substrates, and silicon substrates are preferred. Also, a charge-coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film, or the like may be formed on the silicon substrate. In some cases, the silicon substrate is formed with a black matrix that isolates each pixel. In addition, the silicon substrate may be provided with an underlying layer for improving adhesion with the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface. The underlayer may be formed using a composition obtained by removing the coloring agent from the colored composition described herein, or a composition containing the resin, polymerizable compound, surfactant, etc. described herein. good. The surface contact angle of the underlayer is preferably 20 to 70° when measured with diiodomethane. Further, it is preferably 30 to 80° when measured with water.
 着色組成物の塗布方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、滴下法(ドロップキャスト);スリットコート法;スプレー法;ロールコート法;回転塗布法(スピンコーティング);流延塗布法;スリットアンドスピン法;プリウェット法(例えば、特開2009-145395号公報に記載されている方法);インクジェット(例えば、オンデマンド方式、ピエゾ方式、サーマル方式)、ノズルジェット等の吐出系印刷、フレキソ印刷、スクリーン印刷、グラビア印刷、反転オフセット印刷、メタルマスク印刷などの各種印刷法;金型等を用いた転写法;ナノインプリント法などが挙げられる。インクジェットでの適用方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば「広がる・使えるインクジェット-特許に見る無限の可能性-、2005年2月発行、住ベテクノリサーチ」に示された方法(特に115ページ~133ページ)や、特開2003-262716号公報、特開2003-185831号公報、特開2003-261827号公報、特開2012-126830号公報、特開2006-169325号公報などに記載の方法が挙げられる。また、着色組成物の塗布方法については、国際公開第2017/030174号、国際公開第2017/018419号の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 A known method can be used as a method for applying the coloring composition. For example, dropping method (drop cast); slit coating method; spray method; roll coating method; spin coating method (spin coating); methods described in publications); inkjet (e.g., on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method), ejection system printing such as nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, metal mask printing, etc. Examples include various printing methods; transfer methods using molds and the like; nanoimprinting methods and the like. The application method for inkjet is not particularly limited. 133 page), and methods described in JP-A-2003-262716, JP-A-2003-185831, JP-A-2003-261827, JP-A-2012-126830, JP-A-2006-169325, etc. mentioned. In addition, regarding the method of applying the coloring composition, the descriptions of WO2017/030174 and WO2017/018419 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
 支持体上に形成した着色組成物層は、乾燥(プリベーク)してもよい。低温プロセスにより膜を製造する場合は、プリベークを行わなくてもよい。プリベークを行う場合、プリベーク温度は、150℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましく、110℃以下が更に好ましい。下限は、例えば、50℃以上とすることができ、80℃以上とすることもできる。プリベーク時間は、10~300秒が好ましく、40~250秒がより好ましく、80~220秒がさらに好ましい。プリベークは、ホットプレート、オーブン等で行うことができる。 The colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (pre-baked). Pre-baking may not be performed when the film is manufactured by a low-temperature process. When pre-baking is performed, the pre-baking temperature is preferably 150° C. or lower, more preferably 120° C. or lower, and even more preferably 110° C. or lower. The lower limit can be, for example, 50° C. or higher, and can also be 80° C. or higher. The pre-bake time is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, even more preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Pre-baking can be performed using a hot plate, an oven, or the like.
 次に、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する(露光工程)。例えば、着色組成物層に対し、ステッパー露光機やスキャナ露光機などを用いて、所定のマスクパターンを有するマスクを介して露光することで、パターン状に露光することができる。これにより、露光部分を硬化することができる。 Next, the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure step). For example, the colored composition layer can be exposed in a pattern by exposing through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using a stepper exposure machine, a scanner exposure machine, or the like. Thereby, the exposed portion can be cured.
 露光に際して用いることができる放射線(光)としては、g線、i線等が挙げられる。また、波長300nm以下の光(好ましくは波長180~300nmの光)を用いることもできる。波長300nm以下の光としては、KrF線(波長248nm)、ArF線(波長193nm)などが挙げられ、KrF線(波長248nm)が好ましい。また、300nm以上の長波な光源も利用できる。 Radiation (light) that can be used for exposure includes g-line, i-line, and the like. Light with a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light with a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used. Light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less includes KrF rays (wavelength: 248 nm), ArF rays (wavelength: 193 nm), etc., and KrF rays (wavelength: 248 nm) are preferable. A long-wave light source of 300 nm or more can also be used.
 また、露光に際して、光を連続的に照射して露光してもよく、パルス的に照射して露光(パルス露光)してもよい。なお、パルス露光とは、短時間(例えば、ミリ秒レベル以下)のサイクルで光の照射と休止を繰り返して露光する方式の露光方法のことである。 In addition, when exposing, the light may be continuously irradiated and exposed, or may be irradiated and exposed in pulses (pulse exposure). Note that pulse exposure is an exposure method in which exposure is performed by repeating light irradiation and rest in short-time (for example, millisecond level or less) cycles.
 照射量(露光量)は、例えば、0.03~2.5J/cmが好ましく、0.05~1.0J/cmがより好ましい。露光時における酸素濃度については適宜選択することができ、大気下で行う他に、例えば、酸素濃度が19体積%以下の低酸素雰囲気下(例えば、15体積%、5体積%、または、実質的に無酸素)で露光してもよく、酸素濃度が21体積%を超える高酸素雰囲気下(例えば、22体積%、30体積%、または、50体積%)で露光してもよい。また、露光照度は適宜設定することが可能であり、通常1000W/m~100000W/m(例えば、5000W/m、15000W/m、または、35000W/m)の範囲から選択することができる。酸素濃度と露光照度は適宜条件を組み合わせてよく、例えば、酸素濃度10体積%で照度10000W/m、酸素濃度35体積%で照度20000W/mなどとすることができる。 The dose (exposure dose) is, for example, preferably 0.03 to 2.5 J/cm 2 , more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 J/cm 2 . The oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be selected as appropriate. The exposure may be in an oxygen-free atmosphere, or in a high-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration exceeding 21% by volume (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume, or 50% by volume). In addition, the exposure illuminance can be set as appropriate, and is usually selected from the range of 1000 W/m 2 to 100000 W/m 2 (eg, 5000 W/m 2 , 15000 W/m 2 or 35000 W/m 2 ). can be done. The oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may be appropriately combined. For example, the illuminance may be 10000 W/m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 10% by volume and 20000 W/m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 35% by volume.
 次に、着色組成物層の未露光部を現像除去してパターン(画素)を形成する。着色組成物層の未露光部の現像除去は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。これにより、露光工程における未露光部の着色組成物層が現像液に溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残る。現像液の温度は、例えば、20~30℃が好ましい。現像時間は、20~180秒が好ましい。また、残渣除去性を向上するため、現像液を60秒ごとに振り切り、さらに新たに現像液を供給する工程を数回繰り返してもよい。 Next, the unexposed areas of the colored composition layer are removed by development to form a pattern (pixels). The development and removal of the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer can be performed using a developer. As a result, the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer in the exposure step is eluted into the developer, leaving only the photocured portion. The temperature of the developer is preferably 20 to 30° C., for example. The development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Further, in order to improve the residue removability, the step of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and then supplying new developer may be repeated several times.
 現像液は、有機溶剤、アルカリ現像液などが挙げられ、アルカリ現像液が好ましく用いられる。アルカリ現像液としては、アルカリ剤を純水で希釈したアルカリ性水溶液(アルカリ現像液)が好ましい。アルカリ剤としては、例えば、アンモニア、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、ジグリコールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、ヒドロキシアミン、エチレンジアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、エチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジメチルビス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセンなどの有機アルカリ性化合物や、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、ケイ酸ナトリウム、メタケイ酸ナトリウムなどの無機アルカリ性化合物が挙げられる。アルカリ剤は、分子量が大きい化合物の方が環境面および安全面で好ましい。アルカリ性水溶液のアルカリ剤の濃度は、0.001~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~1質量%がより好ましい。また、現像液は、さらに界面活性剤を含有していてもよい。現像液は、移送や保管の便宜などの観点より、一旦濃縮液として製造し、使用時に必要な濃度に希釈してもよい。希釈倍率は特に限定されないが、例えば1.5~100倍の範囲に設定することができる。また、現像後純水で洗浄(リンス)することも好ましい。また、リンスは、現像後の着色組成物層が形成された支持体を回転させつつ、現像後の着色組成物層へリンス液を供給して行うことが好ましい。また、リンス液を吐出させるノズルを支持体の中心部から支持体の周縁部に移動させて行うことも好ましい。この際、ノズルの支持体中心部から周縁部へ移動させるにあたり、ノズルの移動速度を徐々に低下させながら移動させてもよい。このようにしてリンスを行うことで、リンスの面内ばらつきを抑制できる。また、ノズルを支持体中心部から周縁部へ移動させつつ、支持体の回転速度を徐々に低下させても同様の効果が得られる。 The developer includes an organic solvent, an alkaline developer, etc., and an alkaline developer is preferably used. As the alkaline developer, an alkaline aqueous solution (alkali developer) obtained by diluting an alkaline agent with pure water is preferable. Examples of alkaline agents include ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, diglycolamine, diethanolamine, hydroxylamine, ethylenediamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, and tetrabutylammonium hydroxide. , ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis(2-hydroxyethyl)ammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo-[5.4.0]-7-undecene, etc. Examples include organic alkaline compounds and inorganic alkaline compounds such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium silicate and sodium metasilicate. A compound having a large molecular weight is preferable for the alkaline agent from the standpoint of environment and safety. The concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass. Moreover, the developer may further contain a surfactant. From the viewpoint of transportation and storage convenience, the developer may be produced once as a concentrated solution and then diluted to the required concentration when used. Although the dilution ratio is not particularly limited, it can be set, for example, in the range of 1.5 to 100 times. It is also preferable to wash (rinse) with pure water after development. Rinsing is preferably carried out by supplying a rinse solution to the developed colored composition layer while rotating the support on which the developed colored composition layer is formed. It is also preferable to move the nozzle for discharging the rinsing liquid from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion of the support. At this time, when moving the nozzle from the center of the support to the periphery, the moving speed of the nozzle may be gradually decreased. By performing rinsing in this manner, in-plane variations in rinsing can be suppressed. A similar effect can be obtained by gradually decreasing the rotation speed of the support while moving the nozzle from the center of the support to the periphery.
 現像後、乾燥を施した後に追加露光処理や加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うことが好ましい。追加露光処理やポストベークは、硬化を完全なものとするための現像後の硬化処理である。ポストベークにおける加熱温度は、例えば、100~240℃が好ましく、200~240℃がより好ましい。ポストベークは、現像後の膜を、上記条件になるようにホットプレートやコンベクションオーブン(熱風循環式乾燥機)、高周波加熱機等の加熱手段を用いて、連続式あるいはバッチ式で行うことができる。追加露光処理を行う場合、露光に用いられる光は、波長400nm以下の光であることが好ましい。また、追加露光処理は、韓国公開特許第10-2017-0122130号公報に記載された方法で行ってもよい。 After development, it is preferable to perform additional exposure processing and heat processing (post-baking) after drying. Additional exposure processing and post-baking are post-development curing treatments for complete curing. The heating temperature in post-baking is, for example, preferably 100 to 240.degree. C., more preferably 200 to 240.degree. Post-baking can be performed continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulating dryer), or a high-frequency heater so that the developed film satisfies the above conditions. . When the additional exposure process is performed, the light used for exposure preferably has a wavelength of 400 nm or less. Also, the additional exposure process may be performed by the method described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2017-0122130.
 ドライエッチング法でのパターン形成は、本発明の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成し、この着色組成物層の全体を硬化させて硬化物層を形成する工程と、この硬化物層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程と、フォトレジスト層をパターン状に露光したのち、現像してレジストパターンを形成する工程と、このレジストパターンをマスクとして硬化物層に対してエッチングガスを用いてドライエッチングする工程と、を含むことが好ましい。フォトレジスト層の形成においては、更にプリベーク処理を施すことが好ましい。特に、フォトレジスト層の形成プロセスとしては、露光後の加熱処理、現像後の加熱処理(ポストベーク処理)を実施する形態が望ましい。ドライエッチング法でのパターン形成については、特開2013-064993号公報の段落番号0010~0067の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Pattern formation by a dry etching method is a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, and curing the entire colored composition layer to form a cured product layer; a step of forming a photoresist layer on the cured layer; a step of patternwise exposing the photoresist layer and then developing it to form a resist pattern; and etching the cured layer using the resist pattern as a mask. and dry etching using a gas. In forming the photoresist layer, it is preferable to further perform a pre-baking process. In particular, as the formation process of the photoresist layer, a mode in which heat treatment after exposure and heat treatment (post-baking treatment) after development are performed is desirable. Regarding pattern formation by a dry etching method, descriptions in paragraphs 0010 to 0067 of JP-A-2013-064993 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
<光学フィルタ>
 本発明の光学フィルタは、上述した本発明の膜を有する。光学フィルタの種類としては、カラーフィルタおよび赤外線透過フィルタなどが挙げられ、カラーフィルタであることが好ましい。カラーフィルタは、その着色画素として本発明の膜を有することが好ましい。
<Optical filter>
The optical filter of the present invention has the film of the present invention as described above. Types of optical filters include color filters and infrared transmission filters, and color filters are preferred. A color filter preferably has the film of the present invention as its colored pixels.
 光学フィルタにおいて本発明の膜の膜厚は、目的に応じて適宜調整できる。膜厚は、20μm以下が好ましく、10μm以下がより好ましく、5μm以下がさらに好ましい。膜厚の下限は、0.1μm以上が好ましく、0.2μm以上がより好ましく、0.3μm以上がさらに好ましい。 In the optical filter, the film thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose. The film thickness is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 10 μm or less, even more preferably 5 μm or less. The lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 μm or more, more preferably 0.2 μm or more, and even more preferably 0.3 μm or more.
 光学フィルタに含まれる画素の幅は0.4~10.0μmであることが好ましい。下限は、0.4μm以上であることが好ましく、0.5μm以上であることがより好ましく、0.6μm以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、5.0μm以下であることが好ましく、2.0μm以下であることがより好ましく、1.0μm以下であることが更に好ましく、0.8μm以下であることがより一層好ましい。また、画素のヤング率は0.5~20GPaであることが好ましく、2.5~15GPaがより好ましい。 The width of pixels included in the optical filter is preferably 0.4 to 10.0 μm. The lower limit is preferably 0.4 μm or more, more preferably 0.5 μm or more, and even more preferably 0.6 μm or more. The upper limit is preferably 5.0 μm or less, more preferably 2.0 μm or less, even more preferably 1.0 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.8 μm or less. Also, the Young's modulus of the pixel is preferably 0.5 to 20 GPa, more preferably 2.5 to 15 GPa.
 光学フィルタに含まれる各画素は高い平坦性を有することが好ましい。具体的には、画素の表面粗さRaは、100nm以下であることが好ましく、40nm以下であることがより好ましく、15nm以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は規定されないが、例えば0.1nm以上であることが好ましい。画素の表面粗さは、例えばVeeco社製のAFM(原子間力顕微鏡) Dimension3100を用いて測定することができる。また、画素上の水の接触角は適宜好ましい値に設定することができるが、典型的には、50~110°の範囲である。接触角は、例えば接触角計CV-DT・A型(協和界面科学(株)製)を用いて測定できる。また、画素の体積抵抗値は高いことが好ましい。具体的には、画素の体積抵抗値は10Ω・cm以上であることが好ましく、1011Ω・cm以上であることがより好ましい。上限は規定されないが、例えば1014Ω・cm以下であることが好ましい。画素の体積抵抗値は、超高抵抗計5410(アドバンテスト社製)を用いて測定することができる。 Each pixel included in the optical filter preferably has high flatness. Specifically, the pixel surface roughness Ra is preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 40 nm or less, and even more preferably 15 nm or less. Although the lower limit is not specified, it is preferably 0.1 nm or more, for example. The surface roughness of a pixel can be measured using, for example, AFM (Atomic Force Microscope) Dimension 3100 manufactured by Veeco. Also, the contact angle of water on the pixel can be appropriately set to a preferable value, but is typically in the range of 50 to 110°. The contact angle can be measured using, for example, a contact angle meter CV-DT-A type (manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd.). Moreover, it is preferable that the volume resistance value of the pixel is high. Specifically, the volume resistance value of the pixel is preferably 10 9 Ω·cm or more, more preferably 10 11 Ω·cm or more. Although the upper limit is not specified, it is preferably 10 14 Ω·cm or less, for example. The volume resistance value of the pixel can be measured using an ultra-high resistance meter 5410 (manufactured by Advantest).
 光学フィルタにおいては、本発明の膜の表面に保護層が設けられていてもよい。保護層を設けることで、酸素遮断化、低反射化、親疎水化、特定波長の光(紫外線、近赤外線等)の遮蔽等の種々の機能を付与することができる。保護層の厚さとしては、0.01~10μmが好ましく、0.1~5μmがより好ましい。保護層の形成方法としては、保護層形成用の組成物を塗布して形成する方法、化学気相蒸着法、成型した樹脂を接着材で貼りつける方法等が挙げられる。保護層を構成する成分としては、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、ポリオール樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニリデン樹脂、メラミン樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、アラミド樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、アルキド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、変性シリコーン樹脂、フッ素樹脂、ポリアクリロニトリル樹脂、セルロース樹脂、Si、C、W、Al、Mo、SiO、Siなどが挙げられ、これらの成分を二種以上含有しても良い。例えば、酸素遮断化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層はポリオール樹脂と、SiOと、Siを含むことが好ましい。また、低反射化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層は(メタ)アクリル樹脂とフッ素樹脂を含むことが好ましい。 In the optical filter, a protective layer may be provided on the surface of the film of the present invention. By providing the protective layer, it is possible to impart various functions such as blocking oxygen, reducing reflection, making the film hydrophilic and hydrophobic, and blocking light of a specific wavelength (ultraviolet rays, near-infrared rays, etc.). The thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01-10 μm, more preferably 0.1-5 μm. Examples of the method of forming the protective layer include a method of applying a protective layer-forming composition, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of adhering a molded resin with an adhesive. Components constituting the protective layer include (meth)acrylic resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, and polyimides. Resin, polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin, polyol resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, melamine resin, urethane resin, aramid resin, polyamide resin, alkyd resin, epoxy resin, modified silicone resin, fluorine Resins, polyacrylonitrile resins, cellulose resins, Si, C, W, Al 2 O 3 , Mo, SiO 2 , Si 2 N 4 and the like, and two or more of these components may be contained. For example, in the case of a protective layer intended to block oxygen, the protective layer preferably contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 and Si 2 N 4 . In the case of a protective layer intended to reduce reflection, the protective layer preferably contains a (meth)acrylic resin and a fluororesin.
 保護層は、必要に応じて、有機・無機微粒子、特定波長の光(例えば、紫外線、近赤外線等)の吸収剤、屈折率調整剤、酸化防止剤、密着剤、界面活性剤等の添加剤を含有しても良い。有機・無機微粒子の例としては、例えば、高分子微粒子(例えば、シリコーン樹脂微粒子、ポリスチレン微粒子、メラミン樹脂微粒子)、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化インジウム、酸化アルミニウム、窒化チタン、酸窒化チタン、フッ化マグネシウム、中空シリカ、シリカ、炭酸カルシウム、硫酸バリウム等が挙げられる。特定波長の光の吸収剤は公知の吸収剤を用いることができる。これらの添加剤の含有量は適宜調整できるが、保護層の全質量に対して0.1~70質量%が好ましく、1~60質量%がさらに好ましい。 If necessary, the protective layer contains organic/inorganic fine particles, absorbers for light of specific wavelengths (e.g., ultraviolet rays, near-infrared rays, etc.), refractive index modifiers, antioxidants, adhesion agents, additives such as surfactants. may contain. Examples of organic/inorganic fine particles include polymeric fine particles (eg, silicone resin fine particles, polystyrene fine particles, melamine resin fine particles), titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, aluminum oxide, titanium nitride, and titanium oxynitride. , magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate, and the like. A known absorber can be used as the absorber for light of a specific wavelength. The content of these additives can be appropriately adjusted, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 1 to 60% by mass, based on the total mass of the protective layer.
 また、保護層としては、特開2017-151176号公報の段落番号0073~0092に記載の保護層を用いることもできる。 Further, as the protective layer, the protective layers described in paragraphs 0073 to 0092 of JP-A-2017-151176 can also be used.
 光学フィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。 The optical filter may have a structure in which each pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partition walls, for example, in a grid pattern.
<固体撮像素子>
 本発明の固体撮像素子は、上述した本発明の膜を含む。固体撮像素子の構成としては、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。
<Solid-state image sensor>
The solid-state imaging device of the present invention includes the film of the present invention described above. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device is not particularly limited as long as it functions as a solid-state imaging device.
 基板上に、固体撮像素子(CCD(電荷結合素子)イメージセンサ、CMOS(相補型金属酸化膜半導体)イメージセンサ等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオードおよびポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、フォトダイオードおよび転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口した遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面およびフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護膜を有し、デバイス保護膜上に、カラーフィルタを有する構成である。更に、デバイス保護膜上であってカラーフィルタの下(基板に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。また、カラーフィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各着色画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。この場合の隔壁は各着色画素よりも低屈折率であることが好ましい。このような構造を有する撮像装置の例としては、特開2012-227478号公報、特開2014-179577号公報、国際公開第2018/043654号に記載の装置が挙げられる。また、特開2019-211559号公報の中で示しているように固体撮像素子の構造内に紫外線吸収層を設けて耐光性を改良してもよい。本発明の固体撮像素子を備えた撮像装置は、デジタルカメラや、撮像機能を有する電子機器(携帯電話等)の他、車載カメラや監視カメラ用としても用いることができる。 A plurality of photodiodes and transfer electrodes made of polysilicon or the like are provided on the substrate, forming the light-receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor, CMOS (complementary metal-oxide semiconductor) image sensor, etc.). and a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light shielding film and the photodiode light receiving portion. and a color filter on the device protective film. Furthermore, a configuration having a condensing means (for example, a microlens or the like; the same shall apply hereinafter) on the device protective film and below the color filter (on the side close to the substrate), or a configuration having a condensing means on the color filter, etc. There may be. Moreover, the color filter may have a structure in which each color pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partition walls, for example, in a grid pattern. In this case, the partition wall preferably has a lower refractive index than each color pixel. Examples of imaging devices having such a structure include devices described in JP-A-2012-227478, JP-A-2014-179577, and International Publication No. 2018/043654. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-211559, an ultraviolet absorption layer may be provided in the structure of the solid-state imaging device to improve light resistance. An imaging device equipped with the solid-state imaging device of the present invention can be used not only for digital cameras and electronic devices having an imaging function (mobile phones, etc.), but also for vehicle-mounted cameras and monitoring cameras.
<画像表示装置>
 本発明の画像表示装置は、上述した本発明の膜を含む。画像表示装置としては、液晶表示装置や有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などが挙げられる。画像表示装置の定義や各画像表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木昭夫著、(株)工業調査会、1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田龍男編集、(株)工業調査会、1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。
<Image display device>
The image display device of the present invention includes the film of the present invention described above. Examples of image display devices include liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence display devices. For a definition of an image display device and details of each image display device, see, for example, "Electronic Display Device (by Akio Sasaki, Industrial Research Institute, 1990)", "Display Device (by Junsho Ibuki, Sangyo Tosho ( Co., Ltd.) issued in 1989). Liquid crystal display devices are described, for example, in "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, published by Kogyo Choukai Co., Ltd., 1994)". There is no particular limitation on the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明をさらに具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。なお、以下に示す構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Acはアセチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表す。 The present invention will be described more specifically below with reference to examples. The materials, usage amounts, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. Accordingly, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. In the structural formulas shown below, Me represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Ac represents an acetyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
<色素モノマーの合成>
 下記スキームに従い、色素モノマー(X-1)~(X-6)をそれぞれ合成した。以下のスキーム中、DMFはN,N-ジメチルホルムアミドであり、THFはテトラヒドロフランである。
<Synthesis of dye monomer>
Dye monomers (X-1) to (X-6) were synthesized according to the following scheme. In the schemes below, DMF is N,N-dimethylformamide and THF is tetrahydrofuran.
 色素モノマー(X-1)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
Synthetic scheme of dye monomer (X-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
 色素モノマー(X-2)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
Synthetic scheme of dye monomer (X-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
 色素モノマー(X-3)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
Synthetic scheme of dye monomer (X-3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
 色素モノマー(X-4)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
Synthetic scheme of dye monomer (X-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
 色素モノマー(X-5)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
Synthetic scheme of dye monomer (X-5)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
 色素モノマー(X-6)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077
Synthetic scheme of dye monomer (X-6)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077
<色素多量体の合成>
 下記スキームに従い、色素多量体(S-1)~(S-17)をそれぞれ合成した。
<Synthesis of dye multimer>
Dye multimers (S-1) to (S-17) were synthesized according to the scheme below.
 色素多量体(S-1)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000078
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000078
 色素多量体(S-2)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079
 色素多量体(S-3)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000080
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000080
 色素多量体(S-4)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000081
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000081
 色素多量体(S-5)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-5)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
 色素多量体(S-6)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000083
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-6)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000083
 色素多量体(S-7)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000084
 式(S-7)中、RおよびRの一方が水素原子で、他方は以下に示す式Aで表される基であり、RおよびRの一方が水素原子で、他方は以下に示す式Aで表される基である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000085
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-7)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000084
In formula (S-7), one of R 1 and R 2 is a hydrogen atom, the other is a group represented by formula A shown below, one of R 3 and R 4 is a hydrogen atom, and the other is It is a group represented by the formula A shown in.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000085
 色素多量体(S-8)の合成スキーム
 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000086
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-8)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000086
 色素多量体(S-9)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000087
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-9)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000087
 色素多量体(S-10)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000088
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-10)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000088
 色素多量体(S-11)の合成スキーム
 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000089
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-11)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000089
 色素多量体(S-12)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000090
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-12)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000090
 色素多量体(S-13)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000091
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-13)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000091
 色素多量体(S-14)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000092
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-14)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000092
 色素多量体(S-15)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000093
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-15)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000093
 色素多量体(S-16)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000094
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-16)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000094
 色素多量体(S-17)の合成スキーム
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000095
Synthetic scheme of dye multimer (S-17)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000095
 色素多量体(S-1)~(S-17)の重量平均分子量、酸価およびエチレン性不飽和結合含有基価(C=C価)は以下の通りである。また、色素多量体(S-1)~(S-17)は、23℃のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルの100gに対する溶解量が1.0g以下であった。 The weight average molecular weight, acid value, and ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value (C=C value) of the pigment multimers (S-1) to (S-17) are as follows. In addition, the dye multimers (S-1) to (S-17) dissolved in 100 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether at 23° C. in an amount of 1.0 g or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000096
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000096
<分散液の製造>
 下記表に記載の原料を混合した混合液を、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.1mm径)を用いて3時間混合および分散した。次いで、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて圧力2000kg/cmおよび流量500g/minの条件の下、分散処理を行なった。この分散処理を全10回繰り返して、分散液を得た。下記表に記載の配合量を示す数値は質量部である。なお、分散剤の配合量の数値は、固形分換算での数値である。
<Production of dispersion liquid>
A mixed liquid obtained by mixing raw materials shown in the table below was mixed and dispersed for 3 hours using a bead mill (zirconia beads with a diameter of 0.1 mm). Then, dispersion treatment was carried out using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) equipped with a decompression mechanism under conditions of a pressure of 2000 kg/cm 2 and a flow rate of 500 g/min. This dispersing treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a dispersion. Numerical values indicating compounding amounts in the following table are parts by mass. In addition, the numerical value of the compounding quantity of a dispersing agent is a numerical value in solid content conversion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000097
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000097
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000098
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000098
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000099
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000099
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000100
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000100
 上記分散液の処方を示す表中の略語で示す素材の詳細は下記の通りである。 The details of the materials indicated by the abbreviations in the table showing the formulation of the dispersion are as follows.
(着色剤)
 PG36 : C.I.ピグメントグリーン36(ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料、緑色顔料)
 PG58 : C.I.ピグメントグリーン58(ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料、緑色顔料)
 PG59 : C.I.ピグメントグリーン59(ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料、緑色顔料)
 PG63 : C.I.ピグメントグリーン63(ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料、緑色顔料)
 PR254 : C.I.ピグメントレッド254(ジケトピロロピロール顔料、赤色顔料)
 PY129 : C.I.ピグメントイエロー129(アゾメチン顔料、黄色顔料)
 PY139 : C.I.ピグメントイエロー139(イソインドリン顔料、黄色顔料)
 PY150 : C.I.ピグメントイエロー150(アゾ顔料、黄色顔料)
 PY155 : C.I.ピグメントイエロー155(アゾ顔料、黄色顔料)
 PY215 : C.I.ピグメントイエロー215(プテリジン顔料、黄色顔料)
 PY185 : C.I.ピグメントイエロー185(イソインドリン顔料、黄色顔料)
 PB15:6 :C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6(フタロシアニン顔料、青色顔料)
(coloring agent)
PG36: C.I. I. Pigment Green 36 (halogenated phthalocyanine pigment, green pigment)
PG58: C.I. I. Pigment Green 58 (halogenated phthalocyanine pigment, green pigment)
PG59: C.I. I. Pigment Green 59 (halogenated phthalocyanine pigment, green pigment)
PG63: C.I. I. Pigment Green 63 (halogenated phthalocyanine pigment, green pigment)
PR254: C.I. I. Pigment Red 254 (diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment, red pigment)
PY129: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129 (azomethine pigment, yellow pigment)
PY139: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139 (isoindoline pigment, yellow pigment)
PY150: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150 (azo pigment, yellow pigment)
PY155: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 155 (azo pigment, yellow pigment)
PY215: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 215 (pteridine pigment, yellow pigment)
PY185: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 185 (isoindoline pigment, yellow pigment)
PB15:6: C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15:6 (phthalocyanine pigment, blue pigment)
(色素多量体)
 S-1~S-17:上述した色素多量体S-1~S-17
(pigment multimer)
S-1 to S-17: the dye multimers S-1 to S-17 described above
(赤外線吸収剤)
 IR-1:下記構造の化合物(赤外線吸収剤)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000101
(Infrared absorber)
IR-1: a compound having the following structure (infrared absorber)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000101
(顔料誘導体)
 A-1~A-6:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000102
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000103
(pigment derivative)
A-1 to A-6: compounds having the following structures
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000102
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000103
(分散剤)
 B-1:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量24000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000104
 B-2:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量10000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000105
(dispersant)
B-1: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 24,000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000104
B-2: Resin having the following structure (The numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 10,000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000105
(溶剤)
 Z-1:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)
(solvent)
Z-1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
<着色組成物の製造>
 下記表に記載の素材を混合して着色組成物を製造した。
<Production of coloring composition>
A coloring composition was produced by mixing the materials shown in the table below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000106
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000106
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000107
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000107
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000108
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000108
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000109
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000109
 上記着色組成物の処方を示す表中の略語で示す素材の詳細は下記の通りである。 The details of the materials indicated by the abbreviations in the table showing the formulation of the coloring composition are as follows.
(分散液)
 分散液1~53、c1:上述した分散液1~53、c1
(dispersion liquid)
Dispersions 1 to 53, c1: Dispersions 1 to 53, c1 described above
(光重合開始剤)
 E-1~E-4:下記構造の化合物
 E-5:2,2’,4-トリス(2-クロロフェニル)-5-(3,4-ジメトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニル-1,1’-ビイミダゾール
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000110
(Photoinitiator)
E-1 to E-4: compounds having the following structures E-5: 2,2′,4-tris(2-chlorophenyl)-5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenyl-1,1 '-Biimidazole
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000110
(アルカリ可溶性樹脂)
 J-1:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量15000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000111
(alkali-soluble resin)
J-1: Resin having the following structure (numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight: 15,000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000111
 J-2:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量15000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000112
J-2: Resin having the following structure (numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight: 15,000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000112
 J-3:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量24000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000113
 J-4:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量16000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000114
 J-5:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量16000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000115
 J-6:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量30000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000116
 J-7:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値は質量比である。重量平均分子量14600)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000117
 J-8:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値は質量比である。重量平均分子量10600)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000118
 J-9:以下の方法で合成した樹脂
 還流冷却器、滴下ロート及び攪拌機を備えたフラスコ内に窒素を適量流し窒素雰囲気に置換し、1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテ-ト371質量部を入れ、攪拌しながら85℃まで加熱した。次いで、アクリル酸54質量部、3,4-エポキシトリシクロ[5.2.1.02,6]デカン-8と9-イルアクリレートの混合物225質量部、ビニルトルエン(異性体混合物)81質量部、1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテ-ト80質量部の混合溶液を4時間かけて滴下した。一方、重合開始剤2,2-アゾビス(2,4-ジメチルバレロニトリル)30質量部を1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテ-ト160質量部に溶解した溶液を5時間かけて滴下した。開始剤溶液の滴下終了後、4時間85℃で保持した後、室温まで冷却して樹脂を得た。得られた樹脂の重量平均分子量は10600、分散度は2.01、酸価は43mgKOH/gであった。
J-3: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 24,000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000113
J-4: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight 16000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000114
J-5: Resin having the following structure (numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios, weight average molecular weight 16000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000115
J-6: Resin having the following structure (numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios. Weight average molecular weight: 30,000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000116
J-7: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the mass ratio, weight average molecular weight 14600)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000117
J-8: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the mass ratio. Weight average molecular weight 10600)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000118
J-9: Resin synthesized by the following method A flask equipped with a reflux condenser, a dropping funnel and a stirrer is filled with an appropriate amount of nitrogen to replace the atmosphere with nitrogen, and 371 parts by mass of 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate is added. was heated to 85° C. with stirring. Next, 54 parts by mass of acrylic acid, 225 parts by mass of a mixture of 3,4-epoxytricyclo[5.2.1.02,6]decane-8 and 9-yl acrylate, and 81 parts by mass of vinyl toluene (isomer mixture) , and 80 parts by mass of 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate was added dropwise over 4 hours. On the other hand, a solution prepared by dissolving 30 parts by mass of 2,2-azobis(2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) as a polymerization initiator in 160 parts by mass of 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate was added dropwise over 5 hours. After the completion of the dropwise addition of the initiator solution, the temperature was maintained at 85° C. for 4 hours, and then cooled to room temperature to obtain a resin. The obtained resin had a weight average molecular weight of 10,600, a dispersity of 2.01, and an acid value of 43 mgKOH/g.
(重合性モノマー)
 D-1:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000119
 D-2:下記構造の化合物の混合物(左側化合物(6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)と右側化合物(5官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)とのモル比が7:3の混合物)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000120
 D-3:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000121
 D-4:トリメチロールプロパンエチレンオキシ変性トリアクリレート(東亞合成(株)製、アロニックスM-350)
 D-5:EBECRYL80(ダイセル・オルネクス社製、アミン含有4官能アクリレート)
 D-6:エトキシ化ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサメタクリレート
(Polymerizable monomer)
D-1: A compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000119
D-2: A mixture of compounds having the following structure (a mixture in which the molar ratio of the left compound (hexafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) and the right compound (pentafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) is 7:3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000120
D-3: A compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000121
D-4: Trimethylolpropane ethyleneoxy-modified triacrylate (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., Aronix M-350)
D-5: EBECRYL80 (manufactured by Daicel Allnex, amine-containing tetrafunctional acrylate)
D-6: ethoxylated dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate
(界面活性剤)
 F-1:KF-6001(信越化学工業(株)製、シリコーン系界面活性剤、両末端カルビノール変性ポリジメチルシロキサン、ヒドロキシ基価62mgKOH/g)
 F-2:下記構造の化合物(重量平均分子量14000)。下記の式中、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%はモル%である。(フッ素系界面活性剤)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000122
 F-3:フタージェント208G(以上、NEOS製、フッ素系界面活性剤)
 F-4:BYK-330(ビックケミー社製、シリコーン系界面活性剤)
 F-5:DOWSIL SH8400 FLUID(ダウ・東レ(株)製、シリコーン系界面活性剤)
(Surfactant)
F-1: KF-6001 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., silicone surfactant, carbinol-modified polydimethylsiloxane at both ends, hydroxy value 62 mgKOH/g)
F-2: A compound having the following structure (weight average molecular weight: 14,000). In the following formulas, % indicating the ratio of repeating units is mol %. (Fluorine surfactant)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000122
F-3: Futergent 208G (manufactured by NEOS, fluorosurfactant)
F-4: BYK-330 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie, silicone surfactant)
F-5: DOWSIL SH8400 FLUID (manufactured by Dow Toray Industries, Inc., silicone surfactant)
(添加剤)
 G-1:下記構造の化合物(紫外線吸収剤)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000123
 G-2:下記構造の化合物(エポキシ基を有する化合物、重量平均分子量3500)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000124
 G-3:EHPE3150((株)ダイセル製、2,2’-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)-1-ブタノールの1,2-エポキシ-4-(2-オキシラニル)シクロヘキサン付加物)
 G-4:下記構造の化合物(シランカップリング剤)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000125
(Additive)
G-1: compound having the following structure (ultraviolet absorber)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000123
G-2: compound having the following structure (compound having an epoxy group, weight average molecular weight: 3500)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000124
G-3: EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation, 1,2-epoxy-4-(2-oxiranyl)cyclohexane adduct of 2,2′-bis(hydroxymethyl)-1-butanol)
G-4: A compound having the following structure (silane coupling agent)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000125
(重合禁止剤)
 H-1:p-メトキシフェノール
(Polymerization inhibitor)
H-1: p-methoxyphenol
(溶剤)
 Z-1:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)
 Z-2:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)
 Z-3:シクロペンタノン
 Z-4:シクロヘキサノン
 Z-5:アニソール
 Z-6:ジアセトンアルコール
(solvent)
Z-1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
Z-2: propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME)
Z-3: cyclopentanone Z-4: cyclohexanone Z-5: anisole Z-6: diacetone alcohol
<評価>
(耐光性)
 上記表に記載の着色組成物をガラス基板上にスピンコート法で塗布し、次いで、ホットプレートを使用して100℃で、120秒加熱処理(プリベーク)し、次いでi線で1000mJ/cmの露光量で露光し、次いで、200℃で5分間加熱を行い、厚さ0.6μmの膜を作製した。得られた膜について、大塚電子(株)製のMCPD-3000を用い、波長400~700nmの範囲の光透過率(透過率)を測定した。次に、上記で作製した膜に対し、耐光試験機(スーパーキセノンウェザーメーターSX75、スガ試験機株式会社製)を用いて100000Luxの光を2000時間かけて照射した(総照射量2億Lux・hr)。光照射後の膜の透過率を測定し、以下の基準にて耐光性を評価した。
 A:光照射後の膜の波長400~700nmの透過率の積算値が、光照射前の膜の波長400~700nmの透過率の積算値の98%以上である。
 B:光照射後の膜の波長400~700nmの透過率の積算値が、光照射前の膜の波長400~700nmの透過率の積算値の95%以上98%未満である。
 C:光照射後の膜の波長400~700nmの透過率の積算値が、光照射前の膜の波長400~700nmの透過率の積算値の93%以上95%未満である。
 D:光照射後の膜の波長400~700nmの透過率の積算値が、光照射前の膜の波長400~700nmの透過率の積算値の90%以上93%未満である。
 E:光照射後の膜の波長400~700nmの透過率の積算値が、光照射前の膜の波長400~700nmの透過率の積算値の90%未満である。
<Evaluation>
(light resistance)
The coloring composition described in the table above was applied to a glass substrate by spin coating, then heated (pre-baked) at 100°C for 120 seconds using a hot plate, and then irradiated with i-line at 1000 mJ/cm 2 . It was exposed to light and then heated at 200° C. for 5 minutes to form a film with a thickness of 0.6 μm. The obtained film was measured for light transmittance (transmittance) in a wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm using MCPD-3000 manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd. Next, the film prepared above was irradiated with light of 100,000 Lux for 2,000 hours using a light resistance tester (super xenon weather meter SX75, manufactured by Suga Test Instruments Co., Ltd.) (total irradiation amount: 200 million Lux hr. ). The transmittance of the film after light irradiation was measured, and the light resistance was evaluated according to the following criteria.
A: The integrated value of the transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm after light irradiation is 98% or more of the integrated value of the transmittance of the film before light irradiation at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm.
B: The integrated transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm after light irradiation is 95% or more and less than 98% of the integrated transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm before light irradiation.
C: The integrated transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm after light irradiation is 93% or more and less than 95% of the integrated transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm before light irradiation.
D: The integrated value of the transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm after light irradiation is 90% or more and less than 93% of the integrated value of the transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm before light irradiation.
E: The integrated value of the transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm after light irradiation is less than 90% of the integrated value of the transmittance of the film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm before light irradiation.
(現像残渣)
 上記表に記載の着色組成物をシリコンウエハ上にスピンコート法で塗布し、次いで、ホットプレートを使用して100℃で、120秒加熱処理(プリベーク)し、厚さ1μmの組成物層を形成した。次いで、得られた組成物層に、i線ステッパー露光装置FPA-3000i5+(キヤノン(株)製)を用い、2.0μm四方のベイヤーパターンのマスクを介して365nmの波長の光を1000mJ/cmの露光量で露光した。次いで、露光後の組成物層を、アルカリ現像液(水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム3%水溶液)を用いて23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。次いで、パドル現像後のシリコンウエハを、真空チャック方式で水平回転テーブルに固定し、回転装置によってシリコンウエハを回転数50rpmで回転させつつ、その回転中心の上方より純水を噴出ノズルからシャワー状に供給してリンス処理(23秒×2回)を行い、次いで、スピン乾燥を行い、次いで、200℃で300秒間、ホットプレートを用いて加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行い、パターン(画素)を形成した。
 走査型電子顕微鏡(測定倍率40000倍)を用い、シリコンウエハ上のパターン間の残渣の有無を観察し、以下の基準で現像残渣を評価した。
 A:パターン間に残渣が存在しない
 B:パターン間に残渣が存在しているが、パターンを形成することができた
 C:パターン間が残渣で埋まっている(パターンを形成できなかった)
(Development residue)
The coloring composition described in the above table is applied to a silicon wafer by spin coating, and then heated (pre-baked) at 100° C. for 120 seconds using a hot plate to form a composition layer having a thickness of 1 μm. bottom. Next, the obtained composition layer was irradiated with light having a wavelength of 365 nm at 1000 mJ/cm 2 through a 2.0 μm square Bayer pattern mask using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5+ (manufactured by Canon Inc.). was exposed at an exposure dose of Then, the exposed composition layer was puddle-developed at 23° C. for 60 seconds using an alkaline developer (3% aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide). Next, the silicon wafer after the paddle development is fixed on a horizontal rotary table by a vacuum chuck method, and while the silicon wafer is rotated at a rotation speed of 50 rpm by a rotating device, pure water is sprayed from above the center of rotation in the form of a shower. Supply and rinse treatment (23 seconds × 2 times), then spin drying, then heat treatment (post-baking) using a hot plate at 200 ° C. for 300 seconds to form a pattern (pixel) bottom.
Using a scanning electron microscope (measurement magnification: 40,000 times), the presence or absence of residues between patterns on the silicon wafer was observed, and development residues were evaluated according to the following criteria.
A: No residue between the patterns B: A residue was present between the patterns, but the pattern could be formed C: The space between the patterns was filled with residues (pattern could not be formed)
(保存安定性)
 製造直後の上記表に記載の着色組成物の粘度を測定した。粘度を測定した着色組成物を45℃の恒温槽で72時間保管したのち、粘度を測定した。なお、粘度は、着色組成物の温度を23℃に調整して測定した。以下の計算式から増粘率を算出し、保存安定性を評価した。
 増粘率(%)=((45℃の恒温槽で72時間保管後の着色組成物の粘度/製造直後の着色組成物の粘度)-1)×100
 A:着色組成物の増粘率が5%以下である。
 B:着色組成物の増粘率が5%を超えて、7.5%以下である。
 C:着色組成物の増粘率が7.5%を超えて、10%以下である。
 D:着色組成物の増粘率が10%を超えている。
(Storage stability)
The viscosities of the coloring compositions described in the table above were measured immediately after production. The viscosity was measured after storing the coloring composition which measured the viscosity for 72 hours in a 45 degreeC constant temperature bath. The viscosity was measured by adjusting the temperature of the coloring composition to 23°C. The viscosity increase rate was calculated from the following formula, and the storage stability was evaluated.
Thickening rate (%) = ((viscosity of the coloring composition after storage for 72 hours in a constant temperature bath at 45 ° C. / viscosity of the coloring composition immediately after production) -1) × 100
A: The viscosity increase rate of the coloring composition is 5% or less.
B: The viscosity increase rate of the coloring composition exceeds 5% and is 7.5% or less.
C: The viscosity increase rate of the coloring composition exceeds 7.5% and is 10% or less.
D: The viscosity increase rate of the coloring composition exceeds 10%.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000126
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000126
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000127
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000127
 上記表に示すように、実施例の着色組成物は耐光性に優れた膜を形成することができた。更には、実施例の着色組成物は、保存安定性にも優れていた。更にまた、実施例の着色組成物を用いることで、現像残渣の発生を抑制することもできた。 As shown in the table above, the colored compositions of Examples were able to form films with excellent light resistance. Furthermore, the colored compositions of Examples were also excellent in storage stability. Furthermore, the use of the coloring composition of the example could suppress the generation of development residue.
 界面活性剤を添加せずに実施例1~53と同様の着色組成物を調製し、耐光性と現像残渣を評価したところ、実施例1~53と同様の結果であった。 The same colored compositions as in Examples 1 to 53 were prepared without adding a surfactant, and the light resistance and development residue were evaluated. The results were the same as in Examples 1 to 53.
 実施例1~53の着色組成物から得られる膜を使用することで、耐光性に優れた光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置が得られる。 By using the films obtained from the colored compositions of Examples 1 to 53, optical filters, solid-state imaging devices, and image display devices with excellent light resistance can be obtained.

Claims (11)

  1.  色素多量体と、硬化性化合物とを含む着色組成物であって、
     前記色素多量体は、ヒドロキシ基を置換基として有する芳香族環同士がアゾメチン基を介して結合した構造a1、または、金属原子に前記構造a1が配位した構造a2を有する色素構造を含む、
     着色組成物。
    A coloring composition comprising a dye multimer and a curable compound,
    The dye multimer includes a dye structure having a structure a1 in which aromatic rings having a hydroxy group as a substituent are bonded via an azomethine group, or a structure a2 in which the structure a1 is coordinated to a metal atom.
    coloring composition.
  2.  前記色素多量体は、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位、式(B)で表される繰り返し単位、および、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を含む色素多量体であるか、または、
     式(D)で表される色素多量体である、
     請求項1に記載の着色組成物;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     式(A)中、Aは3価の連結基を表し、
     Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
     DyeIは、前記色素構造を表す;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
     式(B)中、Aは3価の連結基を表し、
     Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
     DyeIIは、Yとイオン結合または配位結合可能な基を有する前記色素構造を表し、
     Yは、DyeIIとイオン結合または配位結合可能な基を表す;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
     式(C)中、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
     DyeIIIは、前記色素構造を表し、
     mは0または1を表す;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
     式(D)中、Lは(n+k)価の連結基を表し、
     nは2~20の整数を表し、
     kは0~20の整数を表し、
     DyeIVは、前記色素構造を表し、
     Pは、置換基を表し、
     n個のDyeIVはそれぞれ異なっていても良く、
     kが2以上の場合、複数のPはそれぞれ異なっていても良く、
     n+kは、2~20の整数を表す。
    The dye multimer has at least one repeating unit selected from repeating units represented by formula (A), repeating units represented by formula (B), and repeating units represented by formula (C). is a dye multimer comprising
    A dye multimer represented by formula (D),
    The coloring composition of claim 1;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    In formula (A), A 1 represents a trivalent linking group,
    L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
    DyeI represents the dye structure;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    In formula (B), A 2 represents a trivalent linking group,
    L2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
    DyeII represents the dye structure having a group capable of forming an ionic bond or a coordinate bond with Y2,
    Y 2 represents a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with DyeII;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    In formula (C), L3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
    DyeIII represents the dye structure,
    m represents 0 or 1;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    In formula (D), L 4 represents an (n+k)-valent linking group,
    n represents an integer from 2 to 20,
    k represents an integer from 0 to 20,
    DyeIV represents the dye structure,
    P4 represents a substituent,
    Each of n DyeIV may be different,
    When k is 2 or more, the plurality of P 4 may be different,
    n+k represents an integer from 2 to 20;
  3.  前記式(A)のDyeIが表す色素構造は、式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造であり、
     前記式(B)のDyeIIが表す色素構造は、式(1)で表される構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造であり、
     前記式(C)のDyeIIIが表す色素構造は、式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を2個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を2個取り除いた構造であり、
     前記式(D)のDyeIVが表す色素構造は、式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造である、
     請求項2に記載の着色組成物;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
     式(1)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
     X~Xはそれぞれ独立して窒素原子、CHまたはCRを表し、
     Rは置換基を表し、
     X~Xのうち、隣接する2つがCRである場合、隣接する2つのCRのR同士は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
     式(B)のDyeIIの場合は、X~Xの少なくとも1つは、置換基として前記Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する。
    The dye structure represented by DyeI of formula (A) is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure represented by formula (1) coordinated to a metal atom. A structure in which one hydrogen atom is removed from the structure,
    The dye structure represented by DyeII of the formula (B) is a structure represented by the formula (1) or a structure in which the structure represented by the formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom,
    The dye structure represented by DyeIII of formula (C) is a structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure represented by formula (1) coordinated to a metal atom. A structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the structure,
    The dye structure represented by DyeIV of formula (D) is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure represented by formula (1) coordinated to a metal atom. A structure in which one hydrogen atom is removed from the structure,
    The coloring composition of claim 2;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    In formula (1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
    X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x ,
    R x represents a substituent,
    When adjacent two of X 2 to X 9 are CR x , R x of two adjacent CR x may combine to form a ring,
    In the case of DyeII of formula (B), at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent.
  4.  前記式(1)で表される構造が、式(1-1)で表される構造または式(1-2)で表される構造である、請求項3に記載の着色組成物;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
     式(1-1)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
     X~Xはそれぞれ独立して窒素原子、CHまたはCRを表し、
     Rは置換基を表し、
     X~Xのうち、隣接する2つがCRである場合、隣接する2つのCRのR同士は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
     式(B)のDyeIIの場合は、X~Xの少なくとも1つは、置換基として前記Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する;
     ただし、式(1-1)は、以下の要件1~4のいずれかの要件を満たしている;
     要件1 X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRであり、かつ、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成している;
     要件2 XとXがCRであり、かつ、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合してヘテロ環を形成している;
     要件3 X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRであり、かつ、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成している;
     要件4 XおよびXの少なくとも一方がCHであり、かつ、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つがCRである;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
     式(1-2)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
     R~R11はそれぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、
     R~R11のうち、隣接する2つは結合して環を形成していてもよく、R~R11の少なくとも1つは置換基である;
     ただし、式(B)のDyeIIの場合は、R~R11の少なくとも1つは、置換基として前記Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する。
    The structure represented by the formula (1) is a structure represented by the formula (1-1) or a structure represented by the formula (1-2), the coloring composition according to claim 3;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
    In formula (1-1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
    X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x ,
    R x represents a substituent,
    When adjacent two of X 2 to X 9 are CR x , R x of two adjacent CR x may combine to form a ring,
    In the case of DyeII of formula (B), at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with said Y 2 as a substituent;
    However, formula (1-1) satisfies any of the following requirements 1 to 4;
    Requirement 1 Adjacent two of X 3 to X 5 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring;
    Requirement 2 X 2 and X 3 are CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 2 and R x of CR x represented by X 3 combine to form a heterocyclic ring;
    Requirement 3 Adjacent two of X 6 to X 9 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring;
    Requirement 4 at least one of X 2 and X 3 is CH and at least one of X 2 to X 9 is CR x ;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
    In formula (1-2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
    R 2 to R 11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent;
    Adjacent two of R 2 to R 11 may combine to form a ring, and at least one of R 2 to R 11 is a substituent;
    However, in the case of DyeII of formula (B), at least one of R 2 to R 11 has a group capable of ionic or coordinate bonding with Y 2 as a substituent.
  5.  更に、前記色素多量体以外の着色剤を含み、
     前記着色剤は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料を含む、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物。
    Furthermore, containing a coloring agent other than the dye multimer,
    3. The coloring composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the coloring agent comprises a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment.
  6.  請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物から得られる膜。 A film obtained from the colored composition according to claim 1 or 2.
  7.  請求項6に記載の膜を有する光学フィルタ。 An optical filter having the film according to claim 6.
  8.  請求項6に記載の膜を有する固体撮像素子。 A solid-state imaging device having the film according to claim 6.
  9.  請求項6に記載の膜を有する画像表示装置。 An image display device having the film according to claim 6.
  10.  ヒドロキシ基を置換基として有する芳香族環同士がアゾメチン基を介して結合した構造a1、または、金属原子に前記構造a1が配位した構造a2を有する色素構造を含む色素多量体であって、
     式(A)で表される繰り返し単位、式(B)で表される繰り返し単位、および、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を含む色素多量体、または、式(D)で表される色素多量体である、色素多量体;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
     式(A)中、Aは3価の連結基を表し、
     Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
     DyeIは、式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造の色素構造を表す;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
     式(B)中、Aは3価の連結基を表し、
     Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
     DyeIIは、Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する、前記色素構造であって、式(1)で表される構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造の色素構造を表し、
     Yは、DyeIIとイオン結合または配位結合可能な基を表す;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
     式(C)中、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
     DyeIIIは、式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を2個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を2個取り除いた構造の色素構造を表し、
     mは0または1を表す;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
     式(D)中、Lは(n+k)価の連結基を表し、
     nは2~20の整数を表し、
     kは0~20の整数を表し、
     DyeIVは、式(1)で表される構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造、または、金属原子に式(1)で表される構造が配位した構造から水素原子を1個取り除いた構造の色素構造を表し、
     Pは、置換基を表し、
     n個のDyeIVはそれぞれ異なっていても良く、
     kが2以上の場合、複数のPはそれぞれ異なっていても良く、
     n+kは、2~20の整数を表す。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
     式(1)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
     X~Xはそれぞれ独立して窒素原子、CHまたはCRを表し、
     Rは置換基を表し、
     X~Xのうち、隣接する2つがCRである場合、隣接する2つのCRのR同士は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
     式(B)のDyeIIの場合は、X~Xの少なくとも1つは、置換基として前記Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する。
    A dye polymer comprising a dye structure having a structure a1 in which aromatic rings having a hydroxy group as a substituent are bonded via an azomethine group, or a structure a2 in which the structure a1 is coordinated to a metal atom,
    A dye multimer containing at least one repeating unit selected from repeating units represented by formula (A), repeating units represented by formula (B), and repeating units represented by formula (C), or , a dye multimer which is a dye multimer represented by the formula (D);
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
    In formula (A), A 1 represents a trivalent linking group,
    L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
    DyeI is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a structure in which the structure represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom represents the dye structure of;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
    In formula (B), A 2 represents a trivalent linking group,
    L2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
    DyeII is the dye structure having a group capable of forming an ionic bond or a coordinate bond with Y 2 , the structure represented by formula (1), or the structure represented by formula (1) on a metal atom represents the dye structure of the coordinated structure,
    Y 2 represents a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with DyeII;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
    In formula (C), L3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
    DyeIII is a structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a structure in which the structure represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom represents the pigment structure of
    m represents 0 or 1;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
    In formula (D), L 4 represents an (n+k)-valent linking group,
    n represents an integer from 2 to 20,
    k represents an integer from 0 to 20,
    DyeIV is a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the structure represented by formula (1), or a structure obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a structure in which the structure represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom represents the pigment structure of
    P4 represents a substituent,
    Each of n DyeIV may be different,
    When k is 2 or more, the plurality of P 4 may be different,
    n+k represents an integer from 2 to 20;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
    In formula (1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
    X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x ,
    R x represents a substituent,
    When adjacent two of X 2 to X 9 are CR x , R x of two adjacent CR x may combine to form a ring,
    In the case of DyeII of formula (B), at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with Y 2 as a substituent.
  11.  前記式(1)で表される構造が、式(1-1)で表される構造または式(1-2)で表される構造である、請求項10に記載の色素多量体;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
     式(1-1)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
     X~Xはそれぞれ独立して窒素原子、CHまたはCRを表し、
     Rは置換基を表し、
     X~Xのうち、隣接する2つがCRである場合、隣接する2つのCRのR同士は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
     式(B)のDyeIIの場合は、X~Xの少なくとも1つは、置換基として前記Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する;
     ただし、式(1-1)は、以下の要件1~4のいずれかの要件を満たしている;
     要件1 X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRであり、かつ、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成している;
     要件2 XとXがCRであり、かつ、Xが表すCRのRと、Xが表すCRのRとが結合してヘテロ環を形成している;
     要件3 X~Xのうち隣接する2つがCRであり、かつ、隣接する2つのCRのR同士が結合して環を形成している;
     要件4 XおよびXの少なくとも一方がCHであり、かつ、X~Xのうち少なくとも1つがCRである;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
     式(1-2)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
     R~R11はそれぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、
     R~R11のうち、隣接する2つは結合して環を形成していてもよく、R~R11の少なくとも1つは置換基である;
     ただし、式(B)のDyeIIの場合は、R~R11の少なくとも1つは、置換基として前記Yとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を有する。
    The structure represented by the formula (1) is a structure represented by the formula (1-1) or a structure represented by the formula (1-2), the dye multimer according to claim 10;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
    In formula (1-1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
    X 2 to X 9 each independently represents a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x ,
    R x represents a substituent,
    When adjacent two of X 2 to X 9 are CR x , R x of two adjacent CR x may combine to form a ring,
    In the case of DyeII of formula (B), at least one of X 2 to X 9 has a group capable of forming an ionic bond or coordinate bond with said Y 2 as a substituent;
    However, formula (1-1) satisfies any of the following requirements 1 to 4;
    Requirement 1 Adjacent two of X 3 to X 5 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring;
    Requirement 2 X 2 and X 3 are CR x , and R x of CR x represented by X 2 and R x of CR x represented by X 3 combine to form a heterocyclic ring;
    Requirement 3 Adjacent two of X 6 to X 9 are CR x , and the R x 's of the two adjacent CR x 's are bonded to form a ring;
    Requirement 4 at least one of X 2 and X 3 is CH and at least one of X 2 to X 9 is CR x ;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
    In formula (1-2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
    R 2 to R 11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent;
    Adjacent two of R 2 to R 11 may combine to form a ring, and at least one of R 2 to R 11 is a substituent;
    However, in the case of DyeII of formula (B), at least one of R 2 to R 11 has a group capable of ionic or coordinate bonding with Y 2 as a substituent.
PCT/JP2022/028563 2021-07-29 2022-07-25 Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and dye multimer WO2023008352A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2023538504A JPWO2023008352A1 (en) 2021-07-29 2022-07-25

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021-124048 2021-07-29
JP2021124048 2021-07-29
JP2022009912 2022-01-26
JP2022-009912 2022-01-26

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023008352A1 true WO2023008352A1 (en) 2023-02-02

Family

ID=85086910

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2022/028563 WO2023008352A1 (en) 2021-07-29 2022-07-25 Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and dye multimer

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2023008352A1 (en)
TW (1) TW202307142A (en)
WO (1) WO2023008352A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5543196A (en) * 1978-09-20 1980-03-26 Ciba Geigy Ag Chromium complex dyestuff and its manufacture and application
JPH04345668A (en) * 1991-03-11 1992-12-01 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Co <3M> Polymerizable, metal-azo and metal-azomethine dyes
JPH073180A (en) * 1993-04-23 1995-01-06 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Co <3M> Reactive polymeric dye
WO2007053181A2 (en) * 2005-05-31 2007-05-10 Northwestern University Chemically tailorable nanoparticles realized through metal-metalloligand coordination chemistry

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5543196A (en) * 1978-09-20 1980-03-26 Ciba Geigy Ag Chromium complex dyestuff and its manufacture and application
JPH04345668A (en) * 1991-03-11 1992-12-01 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Co <3M> Polymerizable, metal-azo and metal-azomethine dyes
JPH073180A (en) * 1993-04-23 1995-01-06 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Co <3M> Reactive polymeric dye
WO2007053181A2 (en) * 2005-05-31 2007-05-10 Northwestern University Chemically tailorable nanoparticles realized through metal-metalloligand coordination chemistry

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
KURUSU YASUHIKO, STORCK W, MANECKE G: "Die Autooxidation von Cumol in Gegenwart von Chelaten monomerer und polymerer Schiffscher Basen", MAKROMOL. CHEM AND PHYSICS, WILEY, vol. 176, no. 11, 1 January 1975 (1975-01-01), pages 3185 - 3200, XP002660906, ISSN: 0025-116X *
MANECKE GEORG, WERNER E. WILLE, GERHARD KOSSMEHL: "Darstellung und Eigenschaften monomerer und polymerer. SCHIFFSCher Basen vom Salicylaldehyd und vom 2.5-Dihydroxyterephthalaldehyd. Teil II. Elektrische Leitfahigkeit", MAKROMOLEKULARE CHEMIE, vol. 160, 18 October 1972 (1972-10-18), pages 111 - 126, XP093029411, DOI: 10.1002/macp.1972.021600108 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2023008352A1 (en) 2023-02-02
TW202307142A (en) 2023-02-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022202204A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP2024012409A (en) Colored photosensitive composition, cured product, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and asymmetric diketopyrrolopyrrole compound
WO2023243414A1 (en) Resin composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2022168741A1 (en) Colored composition, film, optical filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2022168742A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2022168743A1 (en) Resin composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2021002237A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter and solid-state imaging device
WO2023008352A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and dye multimer
JP7371121B2 (en) Colored compositions, films, optical filters, solid-state imaging devices, and image display devices
JP7389900B2 (en) Magenta photosensitive resin composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
WO2023145700A1 (en) Infrared absorbing composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, infrared sensor, and camera module
WO2023145699A1 (en) Infrared absorbing composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, infrared sensor, and camera module
JP7302014B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging device and image display device
WO2023162791A1 (en) Infrared absorbing composition, infrared absorber, film, optical filter and solid-state imaging element
WO2022230625A1 (en) Colored composition, film, optical filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2023162790A1 (en) Colored composition, film, color filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2023037828A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2023157740A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2023228791A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2023157741A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2023120343A1 (en) Colored composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2023085072A1 (en) Colored curable composition, method for producing cured product, film, optical element, image sensor, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and radical polymerization initiator
WO2023149273A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2022196450A1 (en) Colored composition, method for producing film, method for producing color filter, method for producing solid imaging element, and method for producing image display device
WO2023085056A1 (en) Curable composition, method for producing curable composition, film, optical device, image sensor, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and radical polymerization initiator

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22849413

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2023538504

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE